Skip to main content

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

See other formats


Catalog  1982-83 


LYCOMING  COLLEGE 


Communicating  with  Lycoming  College 

Please  address  specific  inquiries  as  follows: 

Director  of  Admissions: 

Admissions;  requests  for  catalogs  and  other  publications. 

Treasurer: 

Payment  of  bills;  expenses. 

Director  of  Student  Financial  Aid: 

Scholarships  and  loan  funds;  financial  assistance. 

Dean  of  the  College: 

Academic  programs;  faculty;  faculty  activities. 

Dean  of  Student  Services: 

Student  activities;  residence  halls;  religious  life;  health  services;  academic 
support  services. 

Registrar: 
Student  records;  transcript  requests;  academic  policies. 

Career  Development  Center: 

Career  counseling;  employment  opportunities. 

Director  of  Development: 

Institutional  relations;  annual  fund;  gift  programs. 

Director  of  Alumni  Affairs: 
Alumni  information. 

Director  of  Public  Relations: 

Public  information;  publications;  sports  information. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to: 
Lycoming  College 
Williamsport,  Pennsylvania  17701-5192 

The  College  telephone  number  is  (717)  326-1951. 


Visitors 


Lycoming  welcomes  visitors  to  the  campus.  If  you  would  like  a  guided  tour, 
call  the  Office  of  Admissions  before  your  visit  to  arrange  a  mutually  conve- 
nient time. 


Lycoming  College  welcomes  applications  from  prospective  students  regardless  of  age,  sex,  race, 
religion,  handicap,  finances,  national  or  ethnic  origin,  or  color.  Lycoming  does  not  discriminate 
on  the  basis  of  age,  sex,  race,  religion,  handicap,  finances,  national  or  ethnic  origin,  or  color  in  the 
administration  of  any  of  its  policies  and  programs. 


LYCOMING  COLLEGE 

Catalog  1982-83 


Contents 

Welcome  to  Lycoming 3 

The  Academic  Program 5 

The  Curriculum 20 

Student  Services 57 

Admission 59 

Financial  Matters 60 

Academic  Calendar,  1982-1983 63 

Directory 64 

Index 71 


Welcome  to  Lycoming 


Lycoming  is  an  independent, 
coeducational  college  dedicated  to 
providing  the  type  of  learning  that 
can  be  used  for  a  lifetime  —  the 
liberal  arts  and  sciences. 

Lycoming's  academic  relevance 
derives  from  its  enduring  commit- 
ment to  the  value  of  this  type  of 
education,  as  offered  by  a  superior 
teaching  faculty.  The  College's  prin- 
cipal aim  is  to  help  students  develop  a 
central    core    of   integrated    values, 


Students  who  have  special  interests 
not  met  entirely  by  a  major  field  can 
design  their  own  majors.  Or,  if  they 
are  interested  in  teaching,  medicine, 
law,  dentistry,  or  the  ministry,  they 
can  take  courses  needed  to  enter  their 
advanced  study. 

Students  also  can  study  engineer- 
ing, forestry  or  environmental 
studies,  podiatric  medicine,  op- 
tometry, medical  technology,  nuclear 
medicine  technology,   and  sculpture 


skill,  information,  and  strategies 
while  they  learn  to  communicate, 
reason,  make  decisions,  understand, 
and  use  their  imagination.  This  type 
of  education  can  lead  to  productive 
and  fulfilling  lives  in  many  fields 
while  allowing  lifelong  growth  and 
development. 

Lycoming  awards  bachelor  of  arts 
degrees  in  29  major  fields,  a  bachelor 
of  fine  arts  degree  in  sculpture,  and  a 
bachelor  of  science  degree  in  nursing. 
The  curriculum  is  challenging.  Be- 
cause it  is  built  upon  the  two  prin- 
ciples of  the  liberal  arts  known  as 
distribution  and  concentration,  it 
allows  students  to  study  in  breadth 
and  depth. 


through  cooperative  programs 
operated  by  Lycoming  with  other  col- 
leges and  universities.  Or,  they  can 
study  abroad  or  in  Harrisburg,  Pa., 
Washington,  D.C.,  or  New  York  City 
through  other  off-campus  study  pro- 
grams. 

Most  students  complete  their  pro- 
gram of  study  in  four  years,  usually 
by  taking  four  courses  each  fall  and 
spring  semester.  But  students  also  can 
take  one  course  during  Lycoming's 
May  term,  or  two  courses  during  the 
summer  term. 

Recognizing  students'  concerns 
about  careers,  Lycoming  offers  ex- 
tensive counseling  through  the  Career 
Development    Center    and    advisory 


committees  for  prelaw,  prehealth 
professions,  and  premedical  students. 
The  College  also  operates  a  wide- 
ranging  internship  program  that 
allows  students  to  earn  academic 
credit  while  working  at  area 
businesses,  government  offices,  and 
nonprofit  organizations. 

Lycoming's  ratio  of  faculty  to 
students  is  15  to  one,  which  means 
that  most  classes  are  small  and  there 
is  abundant  opportunity  for  in- 
dividual attention.  All  faculty 
members  teach.  More  than  70  percent 
of  Lycoming's  faculty  hold  the 
highest  degrees  in  their  fields  from 
the  nation's  outstanding  colleges  and 
universities.  And,  faculty  members 
take  their  advising  seriously.  They 
care  about  students,  and  encourage 
and  guide  them  so  they  receive  the 
education  they  want. 

Nineteen  buildings  sit  on  Lycom- 
ing's main  campus.  Most  of  them 
have  been  built  since  1950.  The 
modern  buildings  include  the  eight 
residence  halls,  the  library,  Arena 
Theatre,  planetarium,  student  union, 
computer  center,  electronic-music 
studio,  photography  laboratory,  art 
gallery,  and  physical  educa- 
tion/recreation center.  The  computer 
center  opened  in  1979;  the  art  gallery 
and  phys-ed  center  opened  in  1980. 

Lycoming  houses  approximately 
900  of  its  1,200  students  in  the 
residence  halls,  which  include  double 
and  single  rooms.  Most  students  find 
the  campus  friendly  and  comfortable, 
with  all  of  the  buildings  easy  to  reach 
from  anywhere  on  campus.  Students 
come  from  a  variety  of  economic 
classes,  religious  beliefs,  and 
geographic  areas,  although  most 
students  call  Pennsylvania,  New 
Jersey,  or  New  York  their  home. 
They  work  and  play  together  in  an  at- 
mosphere of  respect  and  tolerance. 

The  College  offers  a  variety  of  ex- 
tracurricular activities.  Student 
government  groups  help  to  plan  cam- 
pus activities  and  social  events. 
Numerous  clubs,  honor  societies, 
social  fraternities  and  sororities,  the 
yearbook  and  literary  magazine,  and 


the  band  and  widely  acclaimed  choir 
meet  other  student  interests.  Students 
who  like  to  perform  or  compete  can 
act  on  the  Arena  Theatre  stage  or 
play  on  intercollegiate  or  intramural 
sports  teams.  Intercollegiate 
teams  for  men  include  football,  soc- 
cer, basketball,  wrestling,  tennis, 
golf,  swimming,  and  track  and  field. 
Intercollegiate  teams  for  women 
include  basketball,  tennis,  field 
hockey,  swimming,  and  track  and 
field. 

In  addition,  students  who  like  hik- 
ing, backpacking,  skiing,  camping, 
fishing,  hunting,  kayaking,  spelunk- 
ing, and  other  outdoor  sports  will 
find  Lycoming's  location  ideal. 

Lycoming  is  situated  on  a  slight 
prominence  near  downtown 
Williamsport,  a  small  city  nestled 
along  the  West  Branch  of  the  Sus- 
quehanna River  in  northcentral  Penn- 
sylvania's rolling  hills  and  valleys. 
Yet,  the  College  is  only  a  three  or 
four     hour     drive     away     from 


metropolitan  centers  such  as  New 
York  City,  Philadelphia,  Pittsburgh, 
Washington,  D.C.,  Baltimore,  Syracuse, 
Rochester,  and  the  New  Jersey  shore 
points.  The  Williamsport-metro  area 
is  home  to  about  75,000  persons. 

Lycoming  enjoys  a  relationship 
with  The  United  Methodist  Church. 
It  supports  the  Methodist  tradition  of 
providing  an  education  for  persons  of 
all  faiths. 

Fully  accredited,  Lycoming  is  a 
member  of  the  Middle  States  Associa- 
tion of  Colleges  and  Schools,  and  the 
University  Senate  of  The  United 
Methodist  Church.  It  is  a  member  of 
the  Association  of  American  Col- 
leges, the  Pennsylvania  Association 
of  Colleges  and  Universities,  the 
Commission  for  Independent  Col- 
leges and  Universities,  the  National 
Commission  on  Accrediting,  and  the 
National  Association  of  Schools  and 
Colleges  of  The  United  Methodist 
Church. 


HISTORY 

Lycoming  College  was  founded  in 
1812  as  the  Williamsport  Academy, 
an  elementary  and  secondary  school. 
Thirty-six  years  later,  the  academy 
became  the  Williamsport  Dickinson 
Seminary  under  the  patronage  of  The 
Methodist  Episcopal  Church.  The 
seminary  operated  as  a  private  board- 
ing school  until  1929,  when  a  college 
curriculum  was  added  and  it  became 
the  Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary 
and  Junior  College.  In  1947,  the 
junior  college  became  a  four-year 
degree-granting  college  of  liberal  arts 
and  sciences.  It  adopted  the  name 
Lycoming,  derived  from  the  Indian 
word  "lacomic,"  meaning  "Great 
Stream."  The  word  Lycoming  has 
been  common  to  northcentral  Penn- 
sylvania since  colonial  days. 


Academic  Program 


THE  BACHELOR  OF  ARTS 
DEGREE 

Lycoming  is  committed  to  the  princi- 
ple that  a  liberal  arts  education  is  the 
best  hope  for  an  enlightened 
citizenry.  Consequently,  the  bachelor 
of  arts  degree  is  conferred  upon  the 
student  who  has  completed  an  educa- 
tional program  incorporating  the  two 
principles  of  the  liberal  arts  known  as 
distribution  and  concentration.  The 
objective  of  the  distribution  principle 
is  to  insure  that  the  student  achieves 
breadth  in  learning  through  the  study 
of  the  major  dimensions  of  human  in- 
quiry: the  humanities,  the  social 
sciences,  and  the  natural  sciences. 
The  objective  of  the  concentration 
principle  is  to  provide  depth  of  learn- 
ing through  completion  of  a  program 
of  study  in  a  given  discipline  or  sub- 
ject area  known  as  the  major. 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  DEGREE 

Every  degree  candidate  is  expected  to 
complete  the  following  requirements 
in  order  to  qualify  for  graduation: 

—  complete  the  distribution 
program. 

—  complete  a  major  consisting 
of  at  least  eight  courses  while 
achieving  a  minimum  grade 
point  average  of  2.0  in  those 
courses. 

—  earn  one  year  of  credit  in 
physical  education.  All 
students  must  demonstrate 
competence  in  swimming. 
(Medical  exemptions  may  be 
granted  by  the  College  physi- 
cian after  an  examination 
and  review  of  the  student's 
medical  history  and  family 
physician's  report.) 

—  pass  a  minimum  of  128 
semester  hours  (32  unit 
courses)  with  a  minimum 
cumulative  average  of  2.0. 
Additional  credits  beyond 
128  semester  hours  may  be 
completed  provided  the 
minimum     2.0     cumulative 


average  is  maintained. 

—  complete  in  residence  the 
final  eight  courses  offered 
for  the  degree  at  Lycoming. 

—  satisfy  all  financial  obliga- 
tions incurred  at  the  College. 

—  complete  the  above  re- 
quirements within  seven 
years  of  continuous  enroll- 
ment following  the  date  of 
matriculation. 

All  exemptions  or  waivers  of 
specific  requirements  are  made  by  the 
Committee  on  Academic  Standing. 

THE  BACHELOR  OF  FINE  ARTS 
DEGREE 

The  bachelor  of  fine  arts  degree  is 
specifically  designed  to  train  profes- 
sional artists.  The  BFA  in  sculpture  is 
a  synthesis  of  three  diverse  forms  of 
education:  a  studio  art  program  that 
emphasizes  the  skills  and  concepts  of 
the  visual  language;  an  appren- 
ticeship that  takes  technical  expertise 
as  the  departure  point,  and  the 
scholastic  method  employed  in  both 
art  history  and  the  general-education 
component. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE 
BACHELOR  OF  FINE  ARTS 
DEGREE 

Every  BFA  degree  candidate  is  ex- 
pected to  complete  the  following  re- 
quirements in  order  to  qualify  for 
graduation: 

—  complete  the  12-course  Art 
Department  course  of  study. 

—  complete  the  distribution 
program. 

—  complete  a  total  of  32  course 
units  achieving  a  minimum 
grade  point  average  of  2.0  in 
those  courses  taken  within 
the  College. 

—  complete  one  of  the  field 
specialization  appren- 
ticeships at  the  Johnson 
Atelier  Technical  Institute  of 
Sculpture. 

—  earn  one  year  of  credit  in 
physical     education.     All 


students  must  demonstrate 
competence  in  swimming. 
(Medical  exemptions  may  be 
granted  by  the  College  physi- 
cian after  an  examination 
and  review  of  the  student's 
medical  history  and  family 
physician's  report.) 
complete  in  residence  the 
final  eight  courses  offered 
for  the  degree  at  Lycoming, 
satisfy  all  financial  obliga- 
tions incurred  at  the  College, 
have  a  public  exhibition  of 
original  art  work  and  make 
an  oral  defense. 


THE  BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN 
NURSING  DEGREE 

The  program  of  study  leading  to  the 
bachelor  of  science  in  nursing  degree 
is  designed  to  prepare  men  and 
women  as  beginning  practitioners  of 
professional  nursing,  qualified  for 
first-level  positions  in  a  variety  of 
health  settings  or  for  graduate  study 
in  nursing.  Upon  satisfactory  comple- 
tion of  the  program,  a  graduate  is 
eligible  to  write  the  State  Board  of 
Nursing  examination  for  licensure  as 
a  registered  nurse.  The  goal  of  the 
program  is  to  develop  a  liberally 
educated  and  self-directed  individual 
who  is  prepared  to  contribute  to  the 
welfare  of  the  nation  through  the 
practice  of  professional  nursing 
which  supports  the  promotion  and 
restoration  of  health  of  individuals 
and  families  in  a  variety  of  settings. 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE 
BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN 
NURSING  DEGREE 

Every  BSN  degree  candidate  is  ex- 
pected to  complete  the  following  re- 
quirements in  order  to  qualify  for 
graduation: 

—  complete  the  13  course  major 
with  a  minimum  cumulative 
average  of  2.0,  including  the 
required  May  term  following 
the  junior  year. 


—  complete  the  distribution  re- 
quirement as  modified  for 
the  BSN  degree. 

—  complete  a  minimum  of  128 
semester  hours  (32  units) 
with  a  minimum  cumulative 
average  of  2.0. 

—  earn  one  year  of  credit  in 
physical  education.  All 
students  must  demonstrate 
competence  in  swimming. 
(Medical  exemption  may  be 
granted  by  the  College  physi- 
cian after  an  examination 
and  review  of  the  student's 
medical  history  and  family 
physician's  report.) 

—  complete  in  residence  the 
final  eight  courses  offered 
for  the  degree  at  Lycoming. 

—  satisfy  all  financial  obliga- 
tions incurred  at  the  College. 

—  complete  the  degree  re- 
quirements within  a  five-year 
period  after  admission  to  the 
nursing  major.  Candidates 
who  are  unable  to  meet  this 
requirement  must  petition 
for  an  extension. 

THE  DISTRIBUTION  PROGRAM 

A  course  can  be  used  to  satisfy  only 
one  distribution  requirement. 
Courses  for  which  a  grade  of  "S"  is 
recorded  may  not  be  used  toward  the 
fulfillment  of  the  distribution  re- 
quirements. (Refer  to  page  9  for 
an  explanation  of  the  grading 
system.)  A  course  in  any  of  the 
following  distribution  requirements 
refers  to  a  full-unit  (four  semester 
hours)  course  taken  at  Lycoming,  any 
appropriate  combination  of  frac- 
tional unit  courses  taken  at  Lycoming 
which  accumulate  to  four  semester 
hours,  or  any  single  course  of  three  or 
more  semester  hours  transferred  from 
another  institution. 

English  —  All  students  are  required 
to  pass  English  2  and  one  other 
English  course,  excluding  English  1. 
English  2  should  be  taken  during  the 
freshman  year  and  must  be  taken  no 
later  than  the  second  semester  (usual- 


ly the  spring  semester)  of  the 
sophomore  year.  In  addition,  all 
students  who  have  not  been  exempted 
from  English  1  must  receive  a  mark 
of  "Satisfactory"  in  English  1  before 
being  permitted  to  enroll  in  English  2. 
Students  are  placed  in  English  1  or  2 
on  the  basis  of  their  performance  on 
the  Achievement  Examination  in 
English  Composition. 

Foreign  Language  or  Mathematics 

—  Students  are  required  to  meet  a 
minimum  basic  requirement  in  either 
a  foreign  language  or  the 
mathematical  sciences. 

Foreign  Language.  Students  may 
choose  from  among  French,  German, 
Greek,  Hebrew,  or  Spanish  and  are 
required  to  pass  two  courses  on  the 
intermediate  or  higher  course  level. 
Placement  at  the  appropriate  course 
level  will  be  determined  by  the  faculty 
of  the  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages  and  Literatures.  Students 
who  have  completed  two  or  more 
years  of  a  given  language  in  high 
school  are  not  admitted  for  credit  to 
the  elementary  course  in  the  same 
foreign  language  except  by  written 
permission  of  the  chairman  of  the 
department.  French  28  and  Spanish 
28  will  meet  part  of  this  requirement 
only  if  the  section  taught  in  the 
language  is  completed. 

Mathematics.  Students  are  re- 
quired to  demonstrate  competence  in 
basic  algebra  and  to  pass  three  units 
of  mathematical  science  other  than 
Mathematics  5.  Competence  in  basic 
algebra  may  be  demonstrated  either 
by  passing  the  basic  algebra  section  of 
the  Mathematics  Placement  Ex- 
amination or  by  passing  Mathematics 
5.  By  demonstrating  higher  com- 
petence on  the  Mathematics  Place- 
ment Examination,  students  may 
reduce  the  requirement  to  two  units 
of  mathematical  science.  No  more 
than  I '/'  units  may  be  taken  in  com- 
puter science. 

Religion  or  Philosophy  —  Students 
are  required  to  pass  two  courses  in 

either  religion  or  philosophy.  Any 
two  religion  courses  may  be  used  to 


fulfill  the  philosophy/religion 
distribution  requirement,  with  this 
exception:  only  one  course  from  the 
combination  Religion  20-21  may  be 
selected  for  distribution. 

Fine  Arts  —  Students  are  required 
to  pass  two  courses  as  indicated  in 
art,  literature,  music,  or  theatre. 

Art.  Any  two  courses. 

Literature.  Any  two  literature 
courses  selected  from  the  offerings  of 
the  Departments  of  English  and 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 
(French,  German,  or  Spanish). 

Music.  Any  of  the  following  com- 
binations of  music  offerings  totaling 
the  equivalent  of  eight  semester 
hours: 

—  two  courses  from  those 
numbered  Music  10  through 
Music  46. 

—  eight  semesters  of  applied 
music  (private  lessons)  and  / 
or  ensemble  (choir,  band) 
from  courses  numbered  60 
through  69,  earned  frac- 
tionally as  follows: 

—  (1)  for  private  lessons  (Music 
60  through  66),  a  one-half 
hour  lesson  per  week  earns 
one-half  hour  of  credit;  a 
one-hour  lesson  earns  one 
hour  of  credit.  Note:  There 
are  extra  fees  for  these 
lessons.  (For  details  see 
Department  of  Music  course 
offerings  described  elsewhere 
in  this  catalog.) 

—  (2)  credit  may  be  earned  for 
participation  in  the  College 
choir  (Music  68)  and  /  or 
band  (Music  69);  however,  a 
student  may  earn  no  more 
than  one  hour  each  semester 
even  though  participating  in 
both  band  and  choir.  (For 
further  details,  please  see  the 
Department  of  Music  offer- 
ings elsewhere  in  this 
catalog.) 

Theatre.  The  fine  arts  distribution 
requirement  may  be  satisfied  by  selec- 
ting any  two  of  the  following  recom- 
mended courses:  Theatre  10,  11,  14, 


18,  32,  33,  or  other  courses  with  the 
consent  of  the  instructor. 

Natural  Science  —  Students  are  re- 
quired to  pass  any  two  courses  in  one 
of  the  following  disciplines: 
astronomy  /  physics,  biology,  chem- 
istry. 

History    and    Social    Science    — 

Students  are  required  to  pass  two 
courses  as  indicated  in  economics, 
history,  political  science,  psychology, 
or  sociology  /  anthropology. 

Economics.  Any  two  courses. 

History.  Any  two  courses. 

Political  Science.  Any  two  courses. 

Psychology.  Any  two  courses. 

Sociology  /  Anthropology. 
Sociology  /  Anthropology  10  plus 
another  course. 

THE  MAJOR 

Students  are  required  to  complete  a 
series  of  courses  in  one  departmental 
or  interdisciplinary  (established  or  in- 
dividual) major.  Specific  course  re- 
quirements for  each  major  offered  by 
the  College  are  listed  in  the  cur- 
riculum section  of  this  catalog. 
Students  must  earn  a  2.0  or  higher 
grade-point  average  in  those  courses 
stipulated  as  comprising  the  major. 
(This  requirement  is  not  met  by 
averaging  the  grades  for  all  courses 
completed  in  the  major  department.) 
Students  must  declare  a  major  by  the 
beginning  of  their  junior  year. 
Departmental  and  established  inter- 
disciplinary majors  are  declared  in 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar,  whereas 
individual  interdisciplinary  majors 
must  be  approved  by  the  Committee 
on  Curriculum  Development. 
Students  may  complete  more  than 
one  major,  each  of  which  will  be 
recorded  on  the  transcript.  Students 
may  be  removed  from  major  status  if 
they  are  not  making  satisfactory  pro- 
gress in  the  major.  This  action  is 
taken  by  the  Dean  of  the  College 
upon  the  recommendation  of  the 
department,  coordinating  committee 
(for  established  interdisciplinary  ma- 
jors),   or    Curriculum    Development 


Committee  (for  individual  inter- 
disciplinary majors).  The  decision  of 
the  Dean  of  the  College  may  be  ap- 
pealed to  the  Academic  Standing 
Committee  by  the  student  involved  or 
the  recommending  department  or 
committee. 

Departmental  Majors  —  Depart- 
mental majors  are  available  in  the 
following  areas: 


Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business 

Administration 
Chemistry 
Computer  Science 
Economics 
English 
Foreign 
Languages  and 

Literatures 

French, 


German, 

Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political  Science 
Psychology 
Religion 
Sociology  / 

Anthropology 
Theatre 


Established  Interdisciplinary  Majors 

—  The  following  established  inter- 
disciplinary majors  include  course 
work  in  two  or  more  departments: 


Accounting- 
Mathematical 
Sciences 

American 
Studies 

Criminal 
Justice 


International 

Studies 
Literature 
Mass 

Communications 
Near  East  Culture 

and  Archaeology 


Individual  Interdisciplinary  Majors 

—  Students  may  design  a  major 
which  is  unique  to  their  needs  and  ob- 
jectives and  which  combines  course 
work  in  more  than  one  department. 
This  major  is  developed  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  student's  faculty  adviser 
and  with  a  panel  of  faculty  members 
from  each  of  the  sponsoring  depart- 
ments. The  application  is  acted  upon 
by  the  Curriculum  Development 
Committee.  The  major  normally  con- 
sists of  10  courses  beyond  those  taken 
to     satisfy     the     distribution     re- 


quirements. Students  are  expected  to 
complete  at  least  six  courses  at  the 
junior  or  senior  level.  Examples  of  in- 
dividual interdisciplinary  majors  are 
Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities,  Il- 
lustration in  the  Print  Medium,  En- 
viornmental  Law,  Advertising, 
Human  Behavior,  and  Images  of 
Man. 

Major    in    Sculpture    Leading    to 
Bachelor    of    Fine    Arts    Degree    — 

Through  a  cooperative  program  with 
the  Johnson  Atelier  Technical  In- 
stitute of  Sculpture,  Princeton,  New 
Jersey,  students  may  earn  a  BFA 
degree  in  sculpture.  The  major  con- 
sists of  a  core  academic  program,  a 
course  of  study  in  art,  elective 
courses,  and  an  apprenticeship  at  the 
Johnson  Atelier. 


THE  MINOR 

The  College  awards  a  minor  in 
recognition  of  concentrated  work  in 
an  area  other  than  a  student's  major. 
The  requirements  for  a  minor  vary 
from  department  to  department  and 
students  interested  in  pursuing  a 
minor  in  a  department  should  consult 
that  department  for  its  policy  regard- 
ing minors. 

The  minor  must  be  approved  and 
named  appropriately  by  a  major- 
granting  department  subject  to  the 
following  limitations: 

—  a  minor  must  consist  of  a 
minimum  of  four  unit  courses 
selected  from  among  the 
courses  that  are  offered  by  one 
department. 

—  a  major  department  may 
count  no  more  than  two 
elementary  courses  as  part  of  a 
minor. 

—  if  a  major  department  counts 
an  elementary  course  as  part 
of  the  minor,  then  the  minor 
must  consist  of  at  least  five 
courses;  if  the  major  depart- 
ment counts  two  elementary 
courses  as  part  of  the  minor, 
then  the  minor  must  consist  of 
at  least  six  courses. 


—  no  course  which  is  counted  as 
part  of  a  student's  major  may 
be  counted  as  part  of  his 
minor. 

—  only  one  of  the  four  courses 
may  be  numbered  50  or  above. 

—  no  student  with  two  majors 
may  receive  a  minor. 

—  no  student  may  receive  two 
minors. 

—  a  student's  minor  must  be  in 
an  area  different  from  his  ma- 
jor and  a  student  may  not 
receive  a  minor  from  his  major 
department  unless  his  major 
department  is  foreign 
languages  or  mathematical 
sciences. 

—  A  student  may  not  receive  a 
minor  unless  his  average  in  the 
courses  which  a  department 
counts  for  his  minor  is  a 
minimum  of  2.0. 

Students  must  declare  their  intention 
to  minor  in  a  department  by  signing  a 
form  available  from  the  department's 
chairperson.  The  name  of  the  minor  a 
student  receives  will  be  noted  on  the 
student's  transcript. 


ACADEMIC  ADVISEMENT 

One  advantage  of  a  small  college  is 
the  rich  experience  gained  by  the  close 
association  of  students  and  faculty. 
The  advisement  program  at  Lycom- 
ing enables  students  to  discuss 
academic  and  other  problems  as  well 
as  opportunities  with  faculty  ad- 
visers, instructors,  and  the  staffs  of 
the  Dean  of  the  College  and  the  Dean 
of  Student  Services. 

During  the  summer  orientation, 
freshmen  are  assigned  a  faculty  ad- 
viser who  is  prepared  to  assist  new 
students  with  the  challenges  of  an  un- 
familiar social  and  academic  environ- 
ment. All  students  are  required  to 
have  a  faculty  adviser.  When  students 
have  declared  a  major,  they  are  then 
assigned  an  adviser  from  within  the 
major  department  or  program. 

Although  the  advisement  program 
is  an  important  part  of  the  Lycoming 


academic  experience,  students  are  ex- 
pected to  accept  full  responsibility  for 
their  academic  programs,  including 
satisfactory  completion  of  program 
and  College-wide  requirements. 

Special  advising  for  selected  pro- 
fessions is  provided  by  the  health, 
legal,  and  theological  professions  ad- 
visory committees.  Students  in- 
terested in  these  professions  should 
register  with  the  appropriate  commit- 
tee during  their  first  semester  of 
enrollment  at  Lycoming  or  im- 
mediately after  they  decide  to  enter 
these  professions. 

Preparation  for  Health  Professions 

—  The  program  of  pre-professional 
education  for  the  health  professions 
(allopathic,  dental,  osteopathic, 
podiatric  and  veterinary  medicine, 
optometry,  pharmacy)  is  organized 
around  a  solid  foundation  in  biology, 
chemistry,  mathematics,  and  physics 
and  a  wide  range  of  subject  matter 
from  the  humanities,  social  sciences, 
and  fine  arts.  At  least  three  years  of 
undergraduate  study  is  recommended 
before  entry  into  a  professional 
school;  the  normal  procedure  is  to 
complete  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree. 

Students  interested  in  one  of  the 
health  professions  or  in  an  allied 
health  career  should  make  their  inten- 
tions known  to  the  admissions  office 
when  applying  and  to  the  Health  Pro- 
fessions Advisory  Committee 
(HPAC)  during  their  first  semester. 
The  committee  advises  students  con- 
cerning preparation  for  and  applica- 
tion to  health-professions'  schools. 
All  pre-health  professions  students 
are  invited  to  join  the  student  pre- 
health  professions  association.  (See 
also  cooperative  programs  in 
podiatric  medicine,  optometry,  and 
medical  technology.) 

Preparation  for  Legal  Professions 

—  Lycoming  offers  a  strong 
academic  preparation  for  students  in- 
terested in  law  as  a  profession.  Ad- 
mission to  law  school  is  not 
predicated  upon  a  particular  major  or 


area  of  study;  rather,  a  student  is  en- 
couraged to  design  a  course  of  study 
(traditional  or  interdisciplinary  ma- 
jor) which  is  of  personal  interest  and 
significance.  While  no  specific  major 
is  recommended,  there  are  certain 
skills  of  particular  relevance  to  the 
pre-law  student:  clear  writing, 
analytical  thinking,  and  language 
comprehension.  These  skills  should 
be  developed  during  the 
undergraduate  years. 

Pre-law  students  should  register 
with  the  Legal  Professions  Advisory 
Committee  (LPAC)  upon  enterng 
Lycoming  and  should  join  the  Pre- 
Law  Society  on  campus.  LPAC 
assists  the  pre-law  student  through 
advisement,  compilation  of  recom- 
mendations, and  dissemination  of  in- 
formation and  materials  about  law 
and  the  legal  profession.  It  sponsors 
Pre-LSAT  workshops  to  help  prepare 
students  for  the  law  boards  and  an 
annual  Pre-law  Night  which  brings 
admission  deans,  law  students,  and 
practicing  lawyers  on  campus.  The 
Pre-Law  Society  has  sponsored  films, 
speakers,  and  field  trips,  including 
several  to  the  United  States  Supreme 
Court. 

Preparation  for  Theological  Pro- 
fessions —  The  Theological  Profes- 
sions Advisor  Committee  (TPAC) 
acts  as  a  "center"  for  students,  facul- 
ty, and  clergy  to  discuss  the  needs  of 
students  who  want  to  prepare 
themselves  for  the  ministry,  religious 
education,  advanced  training  in 
religion,  or  related  vocations.  Also,  it 
may  help  coordinate  internships  for 
students  who  desire  practical  ex- 
perience in  the  parish  ministry  or 
related  areas.  Upon  entering  Lycom- 
ing, students  should  register  with 
TPAC  if  they  plan  to  investigate  the 
religious  vocations. 

In  general,  students  preparing  to 
attend  a  theological  seminary  should 
examine  the  suggestions  set  down  by 
the  Association  of  Theological 
Schools  (available  from  TPAC). 
Recommended  is  a  board  program  in 
the  liberal  arts,  a  major  in  one  of  the 


8 


humanities  (English,  history, 
languages,  literature,  philosophy, 
religion)  or  one  of  the  social  sciences 
(American  studies,  criminal  justice, 
economics,  international  studies, 
political  science,  psychology, 
sociology-anthropology),  and  a  varie- 
ty of  electives.  Students  preparing  for 
a  career  in  religious  education  should 
major  in  religion  and  elect  five  or  six 
courses  in  psychology,  education, 
and  sociology.  This  program  of  study 
will  qualify  students  to  work  as  an 
educational  assistant  or  a  director  of 
religious  education  after  graduate 
study  in  a  theological  seminary. 

REGISTRATION 

During  the  registration  period, 
students  file  a  schedule  form  with  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  The  filing  of 
this  form  by  students  and  its  accep- 
tance by  the  College  is  evidence  of  a 
commitment  by  students  to  perform 
in  the  courses  listed  to  the  best  of 
their  abilities.  Any  changes  in  the 
schedule  of  courses  listed  on  the 
form,  including  changes  in  sections, 
without  the  formal  approval  of  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  will  result  in  a 
grade  of  F.  Students  may  not  receive 
credit  in  courses  in  which  they  are  not 
registered.  Registration  procedures 
may  not  be  initiated  after  the  close  of 
the  registration  period. 

During  the  first  five  days  of  classes, 
students  may  drop  any  course 
without  any  record  of  such  enroll- 
ment appearing  on  the  permanent 
record,  and  they  may  add  any  course 
that  is  not  closed.  Students  wishing  to 
drop  a  course  between  the  fifth  day 
and  the  12th  week  of  classes  must 
secure  a  withdrawal  form  from  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar,  which  is 
presented  to  the  instructor  of  the 
course  in  question,  who  assigns  a 
withdrawal  grade  based  on  the  level 
of  the  student's  performance  from 
the  beginning  of  the  course  to  the 
date  of  withdrawal.  Withdrawal 
grades  are  not  computed  in  the  grade 
point  average.  Students  may  not 
withdraw  from  courses  after  the  12th 


week  of  a  semester  and  the  com- 
parable period  during  the  May  and 
summer  terms. 

In  two-credit  (Vi  unit)  courses 
meeting  only  during  the  last  half  of 
any  semester,  students  may  drop  / 
add  for  a  period  of  five  days,  effec- 
tive with  the  mid-term  date  shown  on 
the  academic  calendar.  Withdrawal 
from  half-semester  courses  with  a 
withdrawal  grade  may  occur  within 
six  weeks  of  the  beginning  of  the 
course.  It  is  understood  that  the 
period  of  time  at  the  beginning  of  the 
semester  and  at  the  mid-point  of  the 
semester  will  be  identical;  for  exam- 
ple, a  period  of  five  days  as  indicated 
above. 

THE  UNIT  COURSE  SYSTEM 

Instruction  at  Lycoming  College  is 
organized,  with  few  exceptions,  on  a 
departmental  basis.  Most  courses  are 
unit  courses,  meaning  that  each 
course  taken  is  considered  to  be 
equivalent  to  four  semester  hours  of 
credit.  Exceptions  occur  in  applied 
music  courses,  which  are  offered  for 
either  one-half  or  one  semester  hour 
of  credit,  and  in  departments  that 
have  elected  to  offer  certain  courses 
for  the  equivalent  of  two  semester 
hours  of  credit.  Further,  independent 
studies  and  internships  carrying  two 
semester  hours  of  credit  may  be 
designed.  The  normal  student  course 
load  is  four  courses  during  the  fall 
and  spring  semesters.  Students  who 
elect  to  attend  the  special  sessions 
may  enroll  in  one  course  during  the 
May  term  and  one  or  two  courses  in 
the  summer  term.  A  student  is  con- 
sidered full  time  when  enrolled  for  a 
minimum  of  three  courses  during  the 
fall  or  spring  semesters,  one  course 
for  the  May  term,  and  two  courses 
for  the  summer  term.  Students  may 
enroll  in  five  courses  during  the  fall 
and  spring  semesters  if  they  are 
Lycoming  Scholars  or  were  admitted 
to  the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of  the 
previous  semester.  Exceptions  may  be 
granted  by  the  Dean  of  the  College. 
Overloads  are  not  permitted  during 
the  May  and  summer  terms. 


THE  SYSTEM  OF  GRADING  AND 
REPORTING  OF  GRADES 

The  evaluation  of  student  perfor- 
mance in  credit  courses  is  indicated 
by  the  use  of  traditional  letter  sym- 
bols. These  symbols  and  their  defini- 
tions are  as  follows: 

A  Excellent  —  Signifies  superior 
achievement  through  mastery  of  con- 
tent or  skills  and  demonstration  of 
creative  and  independent  thinking. 
B  High  Pass  —  Signifies  better-than- 
average  achievement  wherein  the  stu- 
dent reveals  insight  and  understand- 
ing. 

C  Pass  —  Signifies  satisfactory 
achievement  wherein  the  student's 
work  has  been  of  average  quality  and 
quantity.  The  student  has 
demonstrated  basic  competence  in  the 
subject  area  and  may  enroll  in  addi- 
tional course  work. 
D  Low  Pass  —  Signifies  unsatisfac- 
tory achievement  wherein  the  student 
met  only  the  minimum  requirements 
for  passing  the  course  and  should  not 
continue  in  the  subject  area  without 
departmental  advice. 
F  Failing  —  Signifies  that  the  student 
has  not  met  the  minimum  re- 
quirements for  passing  the  course. 
I  Incomplete  Work  —  Assigned  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  restrictions  of 
established  academic  policy. 
R  A  Repeated  Course  —  Students 
shall  have  the  option  of  repeating 
courses  for  which  they  already  have 
received  a  passing  grade  in  addition 
to  those  which  they  have  failed.  No 
credit  is  received  for  the  second  at- 
tempt. Grades  will  be  averaged. 
S  Passing  Work,  no  grade  assigned  — 
Converted  from  traditional  grade  of 
D  or  better. 

U  Failing  work,  no  grade  assigned.  — 
Converted  from  traditonal  grade  of 
F. 

X  Audit  —  Work  as  an  auditor  for 
which  no  credit  is  earned. 
W  Withdrawal  —  Signifies 
withdrawal  from  the  course  early  in 
the  term  when  it  cannot  be  determin- 
ed that  the  student  is  passing  or  fail- 
ing. 


WP  Withdrawal,  passing  —  The  stu- 
dent was  passing  at  the  time  of 
withdrawal;  no  credit  is  earned. 
WP  Withdrawal,  failing  —  The  stu- 
dent was  failing  at  the  time  of 
withdrawal;  no  credit  is  earned. 

Use  of  the  satisfactory  /  unsatisfac- 
tory grading  option  is  limited  as 
follows  (this  does  not  apply  to 
English  1): 

—  students  may  enroll  on  an  S  / 
U  basis  in  no  more  than  one 
course  per  semester  and  no 
more  than  four  courses  during 
their  undergraduate  career. 

—  S  /  U  courses  completed  after 
declaration  of  the  major  may 
not  be  used  to  satisfy  a  re- 
quirement of  that  major,  in- 
cluding courses  required  by 
the  major  department  which 
are  offered  by  other  depart- 
ments. (Instructor-designated 
courses  are  excepted  from  this 
limitation.) 

—  courses  for  which  a  grade  of  S 
is  recorded  may  not  be  used 
toward  fulfillment  of  any 
distribution  requirement. 

—  students  may  not  enroll  in 
English  2  on  an  S  /  U  basis. 

—  a  course  selected  on  an  S  /  U 
basis  which  is  subsequently 
withdrawn  will  not  count 
toward  the  four-course  limit. 

—  instructor-designated  courses 
may  be  offered  during  the 
May  term  with  the  approval  of 
the  Dean  of  the  College.  Such 
courses  are  not  counted 
toward  the  four-course  limit. 

—  S  /  U  grades  are  not  computed 
in  the  grade  point  average. 

—  students  electing  the  S  /  U  op- 
tion may  designate  a  minimum 
acceptance  letter  grade  of  A  or 
B.  If  the  letter  grade  actually 
earned  by  the  student  equals 
or  exceeds  this  minimum,  that 
letter  grade  is  entered  on  the 
student's  permanent  record 
and  is  computed  in  the  grade 
point  average.  In  such  a  case, 
the    course    does    not    count 


toward  the  four-course  limit. 
If  the  student  does  not  indicate 
a  minimum  acceptable  letter 
grade  or  if  the  letter  grade  ac- 
tually earned  is  lower  than  the 
minimum  designated  by  the 
student,  the  Registrar 
substitutes  an  S  for  any  pass- 
ing grade  (A,  B,  C,  or  D)  and  a 
U  for  an  F  grade. 

—  students  must  declare  the  S  / 
U  option  before  the  end  of  the 
period  during  which  courses 
may  be  added  during  any 
given  semester,  half-semester, 
or  term. 

—  instructors  are  not  notified 
which  of  their  students  are 
enrolled  on  an  S  /  U  basis. 

—  students  electing  the  S  /  U  op- 
tion are  expected  to  perform 
the  same  work  as  those  enroll- 
ed on  a  regular  basis. 

Incomplete  grades  may  be  given  if, 
for  absolutely  unavoidable  reasons 
(usually  medical  in  nature),  the  stu- 
dent has  not  been  able  to  complete 
the  work  requisite  to  the  course.  An 
incomplete  grade  must  be  removed 
within  six  weeks  of  the  next  regular 
semester. 

Students  shall  have  the  option  of 
repeating  courses  for  which  they 
already  have  received  a  passing  grade 
in  addition  to  those  which  they  have 
failed.  Recording  of  grades  for  all 
repeated  courses  shall  be  governed  by 
the  following  conditions: 

—  a  course  may  be  repeated  only 
one  time. 

—  both  attempts  will  be  recorded 
on  the  student's  transcript. 

—  credit  for  the  course  will  be 
given  only  once. 

—  for  the  purpose  of  determining 
the  student's  G.P.A.,  the 
average  grade  received  for  the 
two  attempts  will  be  used  as  if 
it  were  the  grade  for  a  single 
course. 

—  a  repeated  course  will  be 
counted  toward  the  total 
number  of  unsuccessful  at- 
tempts. 


ATTENDANCE 

The  academic  program  at  Lycoming 
is  based  upon  the  assumption  that 
there  is  value  in  class  attendance  for 
all  students.  Individual  instructors 
have  the  prerogative  of  establishing 
reasonable  absence  regulations  in  any 
course.  The  student  is  responsible  for 
learning  and  observing  these  regula- 
tions. 

STUDENT  RECORDS 

The  policy  regarding  student  educa- 
tional records  is  designed  to  protect 
the  privacy  of  students  against  un- 
warranted intrusions  and  is  consistent 
with  Section  438  of  the  General 
Education  Provision  Act  (commonly 
known  as  the  Family  Educational 
Rights  and  Privacy  Act  of  1974,  as 
amended).  The  details  of  the  College 
policy  on  student  records  and  the  pro- 
cedures for  gaining  access  to  student 
records  are  contained  in  the  current 
issue  of  The  Pathfinder,  which  is 
available  in  the  library  and  the  Office 
of  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

ACADEMIC  STANDING  AND 
ACADEMIC  HONESTY 

Students  will  be  placed  on  academic 
probation  if  either  the  number  of 
hours  completed  or  cumulative  grade 
point  average  falls  below  the  follow- 
ing standards: 

Semester  Hours  Cumulative 

(Full-time)  Completed  GPA 

1  12  1.66 

2  24  1.85 

3  40  1 .90 

4  56  2.00 

5  72  2.00 

6  88  2.00 

7  104  2.00 

8  120  2.00 

In  order  to  meet  graduation  re- 
quirements, students  must  complete 
128  credit  hours.  Students  who  are 
enrolled  part-time  or  for  fewer  than 
the  normal  four  courses  per  term  will 
be  expected  to  complete  an  equivalent 
proportion  of  their  program  each 
semester. 


10 


Students  will  be  subject  to  suspension 
from  the  College  if  they: 

—  can  not  achieve  good  standing 
by  the  end  of  summer  term; 

—  are  on  probation  for  two  con- 
secutive semesters; 

—  achieve  a  grade  point  average 
of  1.00  or  below  during  any 
one  semester. 

Students  will  be  subject  to  dismissal 
from  the  College  if  they: 

—  can  not  reasonably  complete 
all  requirements  for  a  degree; 

—  exceed  24  semester  hours  of 
unsuccessful  course  attempts 
(grades  of  F,  U,  W,  WP,  WF, 
and  R)  except  in  the  case  of 
withdrawal  for  medical  or 
psychological  reasons. 

The  integrity  of  the  academic  pro- 
cess of  the  College  requires  honesty  in 
all  phases  of  the  instructional  pro- 
gram. The  College  assumes  that 
students  are  committed  to  the  princi- 
ple of  academic  honesty.  Students 
who  fail  to  honor  this  commitment 
are  subject  to  dismissal.  Procedural 
guidelines  and  rules  for  the  adjudica- 
tion of  cases  of  academic  dishonesty 
are  printed  in  The  Faculty  Handbook 
and  The  Pathfinder  (the  student 
academic  handbook),  copies  of  which 
are  available  in  the  library. 

CREDIT  BY  EXAMINATION 

Advanced  Placement  —  Entering 
freshmen  who  have  completed  an  ad- 
vanced course  while  in  secondary 
school  and  who  have  taken  the  ap- 
propriate advanced-placement  ex- 
amination of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  (CEEB)  are  en- 
couraged to  apply  for  credit  and  ad- 
vanced placement  at  the  time  of  ad- 
mission. A  grade  of  three  or  above  is 
considered  satisfactory. 

College  Level  Examination  Pro- 
gram (CLEP)  —  Students  may  earn 
college  credit  for  superior  achieve- 
ment through  CLEP.  By  achieving  at 
the  75th  percentile  or  above  on  the 
General  Examinations  and  the  65th 
percentile  or  above  on  approved  Sub- 


ject Examinations,  students  may  earn 
up  to  50  percent  of  the  course  re- 
quirements for  a  bachelor  of  arts 
degree.  Although  these  examinations 
may  be  taken  after  enrollment,  new 
students  who  are  competent  in  a  given 
area  are  encouraged  to  take  the  ex- 
aminations of  their  choice  during  the 
second  semester  of  their  senior  year 
so  that  Lycoming  will  have  the  test 
scores  available  for  registration  ad- 
visement for  the  first  semester  of 
enrollment.  Further  information 
about  CLEP  may  be  obtained 
through  the  secondary-school 
guidance  office  or  the  Office  of  Ad- 
missions at  Lycoming  College. 

ACADEMIC  HONORS 

Dean's  List  —  Students  are  admitted 
to  the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of  the 
fall  and  spring  semesters  if  they  have 
completed  at  least  four  courses  with 
other  than  S  /  U  grades,  and  have  a 
minimum  grade  point  average  of  3.50 
for  the  semester. 

Graduation  Honors  —  Students 
are  awarded  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree,  the  bachelor  of  fine  arts 
degree,  or  the  bachelor  of  science  in 
nursing  degree  with  honors  when  they 
have  earned  the  following  grade  point 
averages  based  on  all  courses  attemp- 
ted, including  courses  transferred 
from  other  institutions  to  Lycoming: 

summa  cum  laude 3.90-4.00 

magna  cum  laude 3.50-3.89 

cum  laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic  Honor  Awards,  Prizes, 
and  Societies  —  Superior  academic 
achievement  is  recognized  through 
the  conferring  of  awards  and  prizes  at 
the  annual  Honors  Day  convocation 
and  Commencement  and  through 
election  to  membership  in  honor 
societies. 

Societies 

Blue  Key Freshman  Men 

Gold  Key Freshman  Women 

Beta  Beta  Beta Biology 

Omicron  Delta 

Epsilon Economics 

Phi  Alpha  Theta History 


Phi  Sigma  Tau Philosophy 

Sigma  Pi  Sigma Physics 

Pi  Sigma 

Alpha Political  Science 

Psi  Chi Psychology 

Pi  Gamma  Mu  ....Social  Science 

Phi  Kappa  Phi General 

Academic 
Prizes  and  Awards 

American   Chemical  Society  Award 

—  The  award,  sponsored  by  the  Sus- 
quehanna Valley  Chapter  of  the 
society,  is  given  to  the  outstanding 
senior  in  chemistry  who  plans  to  enter 
the  profession. 

American  Institute  of  Chemists  Prize 

—  The  prize,  given  by  the 
Philadelphia  section  of  the  institute, 
goes  to  the  senior  major  for  ex- 
cellence in  chemistry. 

Bryon  C.  Brunstetter  Science  A  ward 

—  The  award  is  given  for  outstanding 
achievement  in  chemical  and 
biological  sciences. 

CRC  Press  Chemistry  Achievement 
A  ward  —  The  award  is  given  to  the 
freshman  who  has  exhibited  out- 
standing academic  achievement  in 
chemistry. 

Chieftain  Award  —  Given  by  Lycom- 
ing, the  College's  most  prestigious 
award  is  given  to  the  senior  who  has 
contributed  most  to  Lycoming 
through  support  of  school  activities; 
who  has  exhibited  outstanding  leader- 
ship qualities;  who  has  worked  effec- 
tively with  other  members  of  the  col- 
lege community;  who  has  evidenced  a 
good  moral  code;  and  whose 
academic  rank  is  above  the  median 
for  the  preceding  senior  class. 

Civic  Choir  Award  —  The  award, 
sponsored  by  the  College  choir,  is 
given  to  the  choir  member  who  has 
outstanding  musical  ability  and  who 
has  made  significant  leadership  con- 
tributions to  the  choir. 

Class  of  1907  Prize  —  The  prize  is 
given  to  the  senior  who  has  been 
outstanding  in  the  promotion  of  col- 
lege spirit  through  participation  in 
athletics  and  other  activities. 


11 


Benjamin  C.  Conner  Prize  —  The 
prize  is  given  to  the  graduating  stu- 
dent who  has  done  outstanding  work 
in  mathematics. 

Durkheim  Award  —  The  award  is 
given  to  the  senior  sociology  /  an- 
thropology major  who  has  done 
outstanding  work  in  the  field. 

Bishop  William  Perry  Eve/and  Prize 
— Sponsored  by  the  College,  the  prize 
is  given  to  the  senior  who  has  shown 
progress  in  scholarship,  loyalty, 
school  spirit,  and  participation  in 
school  activities. 

Excellence  in  Two-Dimensional  Art 
Award  —  Sponsored  by  the  Art 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
outstanding  senior  art  major  in  this 
field. 

Excellence  in  Three-Dimensional  Art 
Award  —  Sponsored  by  the  Art 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
outstanding  senior  art  major  in  this 
field. 

Excellence  in  Theatre  Performance 
A  ward  —  Sponsored  by  the  Theatre 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
student  who  has  been  outstanding  as 
a  performer  in  the  Arena  Theatre. 

Excellence  in  Technical  Theatre 
A  ward  —  Sponsored  by  the  Theatre 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
student  who  has  been  outstanding  as 
a  technician  for  the  Arena  Theatre. 

Excellence  in  Political  Science  A  ward 
—  Given  by  the  Political  Science 
Department,  the  award  goes  to  the 
senior  political  science  major  who  has 
performed  with  excellence. 

J.  W.  Ferree  Award  —  Given  by  the 
Mathematical  Sciences  Department  in 
memory  of  the  first  mathematics  pro- 
fessor at  Lycoming's  forerunner,  the 
Dickinson  Seminary,  the  award  goes 
to  the  student  most  active  in 
mathematical  sciences. 

Faculty  Prize  —  Sponsored  by 
Lycoming,  the  prize  is  given  to  the 
commuting  student  with  satisfactory 
scholarship     and     who     has     been 

12 


outstanding  in  promotion  of  school 
spirit  through  participation  in  school 
activities. 

Durant  L.  Furey  III  Memorial  Prize 
—  The  prize  is  given  to  the  senior  ac- 
counting major  who  has  shown 
outstanding  achievement  in  accoun- 
ting. 

Gillette  Foreign  Language  Prizes  — 
The  prizes  are  given  to  the  French, 
German,  and  Spanish  majors  who 
have  achieved  excellence  in  foreign 
languages. 

John  P.  Graham  A  ward  —  Named  in 
honor  of  a  professor  emeritus,  the 
award  is  given  to  the  senior  English 
major  who  achieves  the  highest 
average  in  English. 

Edward  J.  Gray  Prizes  —  Sponsored 
by  Lycoming,  the  prizes  are  given  to 
the  graduating  students  with  the 
highest  and  second  highest  averages. 

Dan  Gustafson  A  ward  —  In  memory 
of  a  former  member  of  the  English 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
senior  English  major  whose  analytical 
writing  demonstrates  the  highest  stan- 
dards of  literary  and  critical  ex- 
cellence. 

1  RUSK  A  Awards  —  The  awards 
denote  membership  in  the  society  for 
juniors  who  are  very  active  on  cam- 
pus; they  are  given  by  the  Office  of 
Student  Services. 

Junior  Book  A  ward  —  Sponsored  by 
the  Political  Science  Department,  the 
award  is  given  to  the  outstanding 
junior  political  science  major. 

Elisha  Benson  Kline  Prize  —  The 
prize  is  given  to  the  senior 
mathematics  major  with  outstanding 
achievement  in  the  field. 

Charles  J.  Kocian  Awards  —  The 
awards  are  given  to  the  accounting, 
business  administration,  and 
economics  majors  who  show  the 
greatest  proficiency  in  statistics;  the 
mathematics  major  who  shows  the 
greatest  proficiency  in  applied 
mathematics,     and    the    graduating 


senior  who  shows  the  greatest  profi- 
ciency in  computer  science. 

Don  Lincoln  Larrabee  Law  Prize  — 
The  prize  is  given  to  the  graduating 
student  who  has  shown  outstanding 
scholarship  in  legal  principles. 

C.  Daniel  Little  A  ward  —  Sponsored 
by  the  Political  Science  Department, 
the  prize  is  given  to  the  outstanding 
student  in  public  administration. 

John  C.  McCune  Memorial  Prizes  — 
The  prizes  are  given  to  the  senior  ma- 
jors in  mathematics,  biology, 
chemistry,  physics,  philosophy,  and 
psychology  who  have  attained  the 
highest  averages. 

Walter  J.  Mclver  A  ward  —  Named 
after  Lycoming's  former  choir  direc- 
tor, the  award  is  given  to  the  choir 
member  who  has  made  outstanding 
campus  contributions  outside  of 
choir. 

Pennsylvania  Institute  of  Certified 
Public  Accountants  Award  —  The 
award  is  given  to  the  senior  accoun- 
ting major  who  has  demonstrated 
high  scholastic  standing  and  qualities 
of  leadership. 

Pocahontas  Award  —  Sponsored  by 
the  Athletic  Department,  the  award  is 
given  to  Lycoming's  outstanding 
female  athlete. 

Research  and  Writing  Prize  in 
History  —  Sponsored  by  the  History 
Department,  the  prize  is  given  to  the 
student  who  does  the  best  work  in 
History  45. 

Sadler  Prize  —  Sponsored  by  the 
Mathematical  Sciences  Department, 
the  prize  is  given  to  the  student  with 
the  highest  achievement  in  calculus, 
foundations  of  mathematics,  algebra, 
and  analysis. 

Senior  Management  A  ward  —  Spon- 
sored by  the  Business  Administration 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
senior  business  major  with  the  best 
senior  project  in  Business  Ad- 
ministration 41. 


Senior  Scholarship  Prize  in  History 
—  The  prize  is  given  to  the  senior  ma- 
jor with  the  highest  average. 

Service  to  Lycoming  A  ward  —  Spon- 
sored by  the  Office  of  Student  Ser- 
vices, the  award  is  given  to  students 
who  have  made  outstanding  contribu- 
tions to  Lycoming. 

Frances  K.  Skeath  Award  —  Spon- 
sored by  the  Mathematical  Sciences 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
senior  with  outstanding  achievement 
in  mathematics. 

John  A .  Streeter  Memorial  A  ward  in 
Economics  —  The  award  is  given  to 
the  graduating  student  with  outstand- 
ing achievement  in  economics. 

Tomahawk  Award  —  Sponsored  by 
the  Athletic  Department,  the  award  is 
given  to  the  outstanding  male  athlete. 

Trask  Chemistry  Prize  —  The  prize  is 
given  to  the  senior  chemistry  major 
who  has  done  outstanding  work  in 
the  field. 

Wall  Street  Journal  A  ward  —  Spon- 
sored by  the  Business  Administration 
Department,  the  award  is  given  to  the 
senior  business  major  for  excellence 
in  the  field  and  service  to  the  College 
community. 

Sol  "Woody"  Wolf  Award—  Spon- 
sored by  the  Athletic  Department,  the 
award  is  given  to  the  junior  athlete 
who  has  shown  the  most  improve- 
ment. 

Women  of  Lycoming  Scholarship  — 
The  scholarship  is  given  to  the  junior 
woman  student  who  has  shown 
satisfactory  scholarship,  outstanding 
school  spirit,  and  who  is  active  in 
campus  activities. 


Department  Honors  —  Honors  pro- 
jects are  normally  undertaken  only  in 
a  student's  major,  and  are  available 
only  to  exceptionally  well-qualified 
students  who  have  a  solid  back- 
ground in  the  area  of  the  project  and 
are  capable  of  considerable  self- 
direction.     The     prerequisites     for 


registration  in  an  honors  program  are 
as  follows: 

—  a  faculty  member  from  the 
department(s)  in  which  the 
honors  project  is  to  be  under- 
taken must  agree  to  be  the 
director  and  must  secure 
departmental  approval  of  the 
project. 

—  the  director,  in  consultation 
with  the  student,  must  con- 
vene a  committee  consisting 
of  two  faculty  members  from 
the  department  in  which  the 
project  is  to  be  undertaken, 
one  of  whom  is  the  director 
of  the  project,  and  one  facul- 
ty member  from  each  of  two 
other  departments  related  to 
the  subject  matter  of  the 
study. 

—  the  honors  committee  must 
then  certify  by  their 
signatures  on  the  application 
that  the  project  in  question  is 
academically  legitimate  and 
worthy  of  pursuit  as  an 
honors  project,  and  that  the 
student  in  question  is 
qualified  to  pursue  the  pro- 
ject. 

—  the  project  must  be  approved 
by  the  Committee  on  In- 
dividual Studies. 

Students  successfully  complete 
honors  projects  by  satisfying  the 
following  conditions  in  accordance 
with  guidelines  established  by  the 
Committee  on  Individual  Studies: 

—  the  student  must  produce  a 
substantial  research  paper, 
critical  study,  or  creative 
project.  If  the  end  product  is 
a  creative  project,  a  critical 
paper  analyzing  the  techni- 
ques and  principles  employed 
and  the  nature  of  the 
achievement  represented  in 
the  project  shall  be  submit- 
ted. 

—  the  student  must  successfully 
explain  and  defend  the  work 
in  a  final  oral  examination 


given  by  the  honors  commit- 
tee. 

—  the  honors  committee  must 
certify  that  the  student  has 
successfully  defended  the 
project,  and  that  the 
student's  achievement  is 
clearly  superior  to  that  which 
would  ordinarily  be  required 
to  earn  a  grade  of  "A"  in  a 
regular  independent-studies 
course. 

—  the  Committee  on  Individual 
Studies  must  certify  that  the 
student  has  satisfied  all  of 
the  conditions  mentioned 
above. 

Except  in  unusual  circumstances, 
honors  projects  are  expected  to  in- 
volve independent  study  in  two  con- 
secutive unit  courses.  Successful  com- 
pletion of  the  honors  project  will 
cause  the  designation  of  honors  in 
that  department  to  be  placed  upon 
the  permanent  record.  Acceptable 
theses  are  deposited  in  the  College 
library.  In  the  event  that  the  study  is 
not  completed  successfully  or  is  not 
deemed  worthy  of  honors,  the  stu- 
dent shall  be  re-registered  in  indepen- 
dent studies  and  given  a  final  grade 
for  the  course. 

SPECIAL  FEATURES 

Independent  Studies  —  Indepen- 
dent studies  are  available  to  any 
qualified  student  who  wishes  to 
engage  in  and  receive  academic  credit 
for  any  academically  legitimate 
course  of  study  for  which  he  or  she 
could  not  otherwise  receive  credit.  It 
may  be  pursued  at  any  level  (in- 
troductory, intermediate,  or  advanc- 
ed) and  in  any  department,  whether 
or  not  the  student  is  a  major  in  that 
department.  Studies  projects  which 
duplicate  catalog  courses  are 
sometimes  possible,  and  are  subject 
to  the  same  provisions  which  apply  to 
all  studies  projects.  In  order  for  a  stu- 
dent to  be  registered  in  an 
independent-study  course,  the  follow- 
ing conditions  must  be  satisfied: 

—  an  appropriate  member  of 
the    faculty    must    agree    to 

13 


supervise  the  project  and 
must  certify  by  signing  the 
application  form  that  the 
project  is  academically 
legitimate  and  involves  an 
amount  of  work  appropriate 
for  the  amount  of  academic 
credit  requested,  and  that  the 
student  in  question  is 
qualified  to  pursue  the  pro- 
ject. 

—  the  studies  project  must  be 
approved  by  the  chairman  of 
the  department  in  which  the 
studies  project  is  to  be  under- 
taken. 

—  after  the  project  is  approved 
by  the  instructor  and  by  the 
chairman  of  the  appropriate 
department,  the  studies  pro- 
ject must  be  approved  by  the 
Committee  on  Individual 
Studies. 

In  addition,  participation  in 
independent-studies  projects,  with 
the  exception  of  those  which 
duplicate  catalog  courses,  is  subject 
to  the  following: 

—  students  may  not  engage  in 
more  than  one  independent- 
studies  project  during  any 
given  semester. 

—  students  may  not  engage  in 
more  than  two  independent- 
studies  projects  during  their 
academic  career  at  Lycoming 
College. 

As  with  other  academic  policies, 
any  exceptions  to  these  two  rules 
must  be  approved  by  the  Academic 
Standing  Committee. 

Internship  Program  —  An  intern- 
ship is  a  course  jointly  sponsored  by 
the  College  and  a  public  or  private 
agency  or  subdivision  of  the  College 
in  which  a  student  is  enabled  to  earn 
college  credit  by  participating  in  some 
active  capacity  as  an  assistant,  aide, 
or  apprentice.  At  least  one-half  of  the 
effort  expended  by  the  intern  should 
consist  of  academic  work  related  to 
agency  situations.  The  objectives  of 
the  internship  program  are  (1)  to  fur- 

14 


ther  the  development  of  a  central  core 
of  values,  awarenesses,  strategies, 
skills,  and  information  through  ex- 
periences outside  the  classroom  or 
other  campus  situations,  and  (2)  to 
facilitate  the  integration  of  theory 
and  practice  by  encouraging  students 
to  relate  their  on-campus  academic 
experiences  more  directly  to  society  in 
general  and  to  possible  career  and 
other  post-baccalaureate  objectives  in 
particular. 

Any  junior  or  senior  student  in 
good  academic  standing  may  petition 
the  Committee  on  Individual  Studies 
for  approval  to  serve  as  an  intern.  A 
maximum  of  16  credits  can  be  earned 
through  the  internship  program. 
Guidelines  for  program  development, 
assignment  of  tasks  and  academic  re- 
quirements, such  as  exams,  papers, 
reports,  grades,  etc.,  are  established 
in  consulation  with  a  faculty  director 
at  Lycoming  and  an  agency  super- 
visor at  the  place  of  internship. 

Students  with  diverse  majors  have 
participated  in  a  wide  variety  of  in- 
ternships, including  those  with  the 
Allenwood  Federal  Prison  Camp, 
Lycoming  County  Commissioners 
Office,  Department  of  Environmen- 
tal Resources,  Head  Start,  Lycoming 
County  Historical  Society,  business 
and  accounting  firms,  law  offices, 
hospitals,  social  service  agencies, 
banks,  and  congressional  offices. 

May  Term  —  The  May  term  is  a 
four-week  voluntary  session  designed 
to  provide  students  with  courses  listed 
in  the  catalog  and  experimental  and 
special  courses  that  are  not  normally 
available  during  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters  and  summer  term.  Some 
courses  are  offered  on  campus;  others 
involve  travel.  A  number  offer  inter- 
disciplinary credit.  Illustrations  of  the 
types  of  courses  offered  during  the 
May  term  are: 

(a)  Study-Travel:  Cultural  Tours  of 
Germany,  Spain,  France,  Ireland, 
and  the  United  Kingdom;  Ar- 
chaeological Expeditions  to  the  Mid- 
dle East;  Oceanographic  Expeditions 
in  Bermuda;  Literature  of  the  Sea  on 


location  in  the  Caribbean;  An- 
thropological Expeditions  to  New 
Mexico  to  study  tri-cultural  com- 
munities; Utopian  Communities; 
Photography  Workshops  in  Ver- 
mont; Revolutionary  and  Civil  War 
Sites. 

(b)  On-Campus:  Financial  State- 
ment Analysis,  Silk-screeen  Printing, 
Field  Geology,  History  of 
Astronomy,  Field  Ornithology, 
Chemical  Analysis,  Managing  the 
Small  Business,  Women  in  Manage- 
ment, Energy  Economics,  Public 
School  Curriculum,  Writer's 
Seminar,  Modern  American  Humor, 
The  Norman  Kingdom,  Practical 
Logic,  Psychology  of  Group  Pro- 
cesses, Ancient  Near  East  Religion, 
Juvenile  Delinquency. 

Although  participation  in  the  May 
term  is  voluntary,  student  response 
has  been  outstanding  with  approx- 
imate 25  to  30  percent  of  the  student 
body  enrolling.  In  addition  to  the 
courses  themselves,  attractions  in- 
clude small  and  informal  classes  and 
reduced  tuition  rates. 

Study  Abroad  —  Students  have  the 
opportunity  to  study  abroad  under 
auspices  of  approved  universities  and 
agencies.  While  study  abroad  is  par- 
ticularly attractive  to  students  major- 
ing in  foreign  languages  and  lit- 
eratures, this  opportunity  is  open  to 
all  students  in  good  academic  stan- 
ding. Mastery  of  a  foreign  language  is 
desirable  but  not  required  in  all  pro- 
grams. A  file  of  opportunities  is 
available  in  the  library. 

NOTE:  Lycoming  College  cannol  assume 
responsibility  for  the  health,  safety,  or  welfare 
of  any  student  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or 
from  any  off-campus  study  or  activity  not 
under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institu- 
tion. 

Auditors  —  Any  person  may  audit 
courses  at  Lycoming  at  one-fourth 
tuition  per  course.  Laboratory  and 
other  special  fees  must  be  paid  in  full. 
Examinations,  papers,  and  other 
evaluation  devices  are  not  required  of 
auditors,  but  individual  arrangements 
may  be  made  to  complete  such 
exercises    with    the    consent    of   the 


instructor.  The  option  to  audit  a 
course  must  be  declared  during  the 
same  period  (currently  five  days)  at 
the  beginning  of  each  semester,  half- 
semester,  or  term  as  drop/add  and 
pass/fail  and  must  be  completed  in 
the  Registrar's  Office. 

Part-Time  Students  —  Any  person 
may  take  up  to  two  courses  during 
any  semester  or  summer  term  (one  in 
May  term).  Part-time  special  students 
pay  the  $15  application  fee  for  the 
first  registration  and  the  part-time 
tuition  rate  in  effect  at  the  time  of 
each  enrollment. 

COOPERATIVE  PROGRAMS 

Lycoming  has  developed  several 
cooperative  programs  to  provide 
students  with  opportunities  to  extend 
their  knowledge,  abilities,  and  talents 
in  selected  areas  through  access  to  the 
specialized  academic  programs  and 
facilities  of  other  colleges,  univer- 
sities, academies,  and  hospitals. 
Although  thorough  advisement  and 
curricular  planning  are  provided  for 
each  of  the  cooperative  programs,  ad- 
mission to  Lycoming  and  registration 
in  the  program  of  choice  does  not 
guarantee  admission  to  the 
cooperating  institution.  The 
prerogative  of  admitting  students  to 
the  cooperative  aspect  of  the  program 
rests  with  the  cooperating  institution. 
Students  who  are  interested  in  a 
cooperative  program  should  contact 
the  coordinator  during  the  first  week 
of  the  first  semester  of  their  enroll- 
ment at  Lycoming.  This  is  necessary 
to  plan  their  course  programs  in  a 
manner  that  will  insure  completion  of 
required  courses  according  to  the 
schedule  stipulated  for  the  program. 
All  cooperative  programs  require 
special  coordination  of  course 
scheduling  at  Lycoming. 

Engineering  —  Combining  the  ad- 
vantages of  a  liberal-arts  education 
and  the  technical  training  of  an 
engineering  curriculum,  this  program 
is  offered  in  conjunction  with 
Bucknell  University  and  the  Penn- 
sylvania  State   University.    Students 


complete  three  years  of  study  at 
Lycoming  and  two  years  at  the 
cooperating  university.  Upon 
satisfactory  completion  of  the  first 
year  of  engineering  studies,  Lycom- 
ing awards  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree.  When  students  successfully 
complete  the  second  year  of  engineer- 
ing studies,  the  cooperating  university 
awards  the  bachelor  of  science  degree 
in  engineering. 

At  Lycoming,  students  complete 
the  distribution  program  and  courses 
in  physics,  mathematics,  and 
chemistry.  Engineering  specialties  of- 
fered at  Bucknell  University  include 
chemical,  civil,  electrical,  and 
mechanical.  The  Pennsylvania  State 
University  offers  aerospace, 
agricultural,  chemical,  civil,  elec- 
trical, engineering  science,  en- 
vironmental, industrial,  mechanical, 
and  nuclear  engineering. 

Forestry  or  Environmental  Studies 

—  Lycoming  College  offers  a 
cooperative  program  with  Duke 
University  in  environmental  manage- 
ment and  forestry.  Qualified  students 
can  earn  the  bachelor's  and  master's 
degrees  in  five  years,  spending  three 
years  at  Lycoming  and  two  years  at 
Duke.  All  Lycoming  distribution  and 
major  requirements  must  be  com- 
pleted by  the  end  of  the  junior  year. 
At  the  end  of  the  first  year  at  Duke, 
the  B.A.  degree  will  be  awarded  by 
Lycoming.  Duke  will  award  the  pro- 
fessional degree  of  Master  of  Forestry 
or  Master  of  Environmental  Manage- 
ment to  qualified  candidates  at  the 
end  of  the  second  year. 

The  major  program  emphases  at 
Duke  are  Natural  Resources 
Science/Ecology,  Natural  Resources 
Systems  Science,  and  Natural 
Resources  Economics/Policy.  The 
program  is  flexible  enough,  however, 
to  accommodate  a  variety  of  in- 
dividual designs.  An  undergraduate 
major  in  one  of  the  natural  sciences, 
social  sciences,  or  business  may  pro- 
vide good  preparation  for  the  pro- 
grams at  Duke,  but  a  student  with 
any  undergraduate  concentration  will 
be    considered    for    admission.    All 


students  need  at  least  two  courses 
each  in  biology,  mathematics,  and 
economics. 

Students  begin  the  program  at 
Duke  in  July  after  their  junior  year  at 
Lycoming  with  a  one-month  session 
of  field  work  in  natural  resource 
measurements.  They  must  complete  a 
total  of  60  units  which  generally  takes 
four  semesters. 

Some  students  prefer  to  complete 
the  bachelor's  degree  before  under- 
taking graduate  study  at  Duke.  The 
master's  degree  requirements  for 
these  students  are  the  same  as  for 
those  students  entering  after  the 
junior  year,  but  the  60-unit  require- 
ment may  be  reduced  for  completed 
relevant  undergraduate  work  of 
satisfactory  quality.  All  credit  reduc- 
tions are  determined  individually  and 
consider  the  student's  educational 
background  and  objectives. 

Medical  Technology  —  Students 
desiring  a  career  in  medical 
technology  may  either  complete  a 
bachelor  of  arts  program  followed  by 
a  clinical  internship  at  any  American 
Medical  Association — accredited 
hospital,  or  they  may  complete  the 
cooperative  program.  Students  elec- 
ting the  cooperative  program  normal- 
ly study  for  three  years  at  Lycoming, 
during  which  time  they  complete  24 
unit  courses,  including  the  College 
distribution  requirements,  a  major, 
and  requirements  of  the  National  Ac- 
crediting Agency  for  Clinical 
Laboratory  Sciences  (NAACLS).  The 
current  requirements  of  the  NAACLS 
are:  four  courses  in  chemistry  (one  of 
which  must  be  either  organic  or 
biochemistry);  four  courses  in 
biology  (including  courses  in 
microbiology  and  immunology),  and 
one  course  in  mathematics. 

Students  in  the  cooperative  pro- 
gram usually  major  in  biology, 
following  a  modified  major  of  six 
unit  courses  that  exempts  them  from 
Ecology  (Biology  24)  and  Plant 
Sciences  (Biology  25).  Students  must 
take  either  Animal  Physiology 
(Biology    23)    or    Cell    Physiology 


15 


(Biology  35).  The  cooperative  pro- 
gram requires  successful  completion 
of  a  one-year  internship  at  an 
American  Medical  Association — ac- 
credited hospital.  Lycoming  is  af- 
filiated with  the  following  accredited 
hospitals:  Williamsport,  Divine 
Providence,  Robert  Packer,  Lan 
caster,  and  Abington.  Students  in  the 
cooperative  program  receive  credit  at 
Lycoming  for  each  of  eight  unit 
courses  in  biology  and  chemistry  suc- 
cessfully completed  during  the 
clinical  internship.  Successful  com- 
pletion of  the  Registry  Examination  is 
not  considered  a  graduation  require- 
ment at  Lycoming  College. 

Students  entering  a  clinical  intern- 
ship for  one  year  after  graduation 
from  Lycoming  must  complete  all  of 
the  requirements  of  the  cooperative 
program,  but  are  not  eligible  for  the 
biology  major  exemptions  indicated 
above.  Upon  graduation,  such 
students  may  apply  for  admission  to  a 
clinical  program  at  any  hospital. 


Nuclear  Medicine  Technology   — 

Students  desiring  a  career  in  nuclear 
medicine  technology  may  complete 
either  1)  a  bachelor  of  arts  program 
followed  by  a  clinical  internship,  or  2) 
the  cooperative  program. 

Students  enrolling  in  the 
cooperativev  program  in  Nuclear 
Medicine  Technology  will  study  for 
three  years  at  Lycoming,  followed  by 
a  fourth  year  of  prescribed  study  at  a 
cooperating  hospital.  Students  must 
apply  directly  to  a  cooperating 
hospital  for  admission  to  the  clinical 
year.  Lycoming  College  is  presently 
affiliated  with  the  Williamsport 
Hospital  Department  of  Nuclear 
Medicine.  The  courses  completed 
during  the  clinical  year  are  entered  on 
the  Lycoming  College  transcript. 
Upon  successful  completion  of  the 
clinical  year,  which  serves  to  com- 
plete the  College  degree  re- 
quirements, students  are  eligible  to 
take  a  certification  examination  in 
nuclear  medicine  technology.  Suc- 
cessful completion  of  a  certifying  ex- 

16 


amination  is  not  a  graduation  re- 
quirement at  Lycoming  College. 

Students  may  enter  the  cooperative 
program  with  backgrounds  in  dif- 
ferent fields  of  study.  However,  they 
must  complete  24  units,  including  the 
College  distribution  requirements,  a 
major,  and  the  following  re- 
quirements of  the  Joint  Review  Com- 
mittee on  Education  Programs  of  the 
American  Medical  Association: 
Anatomy  and  Physiology  (Biology 
5-6  or  10-11),  Basic  Physics 
(Astronomy/Physics  15-16  or  25-26), 
Basic  Mathematical  Sciences  (two 
courses  from  Math  9,  13,  17,  18,  19, 
Computer  Science  15),  Oral  and 
Written  Communication  (Mass  Com- 
munication 1 1  and  English  2),  and 
General  Chemistry  (two  courses  from 
Chemistry  10  [or  8],  11,  15  [or  20]).  If 
Computer  Science  15  has  not  been 
taken  as  a  basic  math  option,  it  is 
highly  recommended  as  an  elective. 

For  students  in  the  cooperative 
program,  modified  majors  are 
presently  available  in  Biology  and 
Physics.  Students  who  wish  to  major 
in  another  academic  discipline  shall 
consult  with  their  advisors  early  in 
their  college  careers  to  determine 
whether  a  major  in  a  given  discipline 
can  be  completed  within  a  three-year 
period. 

Those  who  wish  to  major  in 
Biology  are  allowed  a  modified  major 
of  six  Biology  courses  (Biology  5-6  or 
10-11,  21,  22,  23  or  35,  and  an  ad- 
vanced elective,  along  with  the  usual 
requirement  in  Chemistry  and 
Mathematical  Sciences.  Those  who 
wish  to  major  in  Physics  are  required 
to  take  the  following  courses: 
Astronomy/Physics  25,  26,  27,  29,  a 
course  in  Nuclear  and  Particle 
Physics,  and  two  elective  physics 
courses  numbered  1 1  or  above, 
Biology  5-6  or  10-11,  Mathematics  18 
and  19,  and  one  year  in  chemistry. 


Optometry  —  Through  the  Ac- 
celerated Optometry  Education  Cur- 
riculum Program,  students  interested 
in  a  career  in  optometry  may  qualify 


for  admission  to  the  Pennsylvania 
College  of  Optometry  after  only  three 
years  at  Lycoming  College.  After 
four  years  at  the  Pennsylvania  Col- 
lege of  Optometry,  a  student  will  earn 
a  Doctor  of  Optometry  degree.  Selec- 
tion of  candidates  for  the  profes- 
sional segment  of  the  program  is 
completed  by  the  admissions  commit- 
tee of  the  Pennsylvania  College  of 
Optometry  during  the  student's  third 
year  at  Lycoming.  (This  is  one  of  two 
routes  that  students  may  choose.  Any 
student,  of  course,  may  follow  the 
regular  application  procedures  for 
admission  to  the  Pennsylvania  Col- 
lege of  Optometry  or  another  college 
of  optometry  to  matriculate  follow- 
ing completion  of  his  or  her  bac- 
calaureate program.)  During  the 
three  years  at  Lycoming  College,  the 
student  will  complete  24  unit  courses, 
including  all  distribution  re- 
quirements, and  will  prepare  for  his 
or  her  professional  training  by  ob- 
taining a  solid  foundation  in  biology, 
chemistry,  physics,  and  mathematics. 
During  the  first  year  of  study  at  the 
Pennsylvania  College  of  Optometry, 
the  student  will  take  39  semester 
hours  of  basic  science  courses  in  addi- 
tion to  introductions  to  optometry 
and  health  care.  Successful  comple- 
tion of  the  first  year  of  professional 
training  will  complete  the  course  re- 
quirements for  the  B.A.  degree  at 
Lycoming  College. 

Most  students  will  find  it  conve- 
nient to  major  in  biology  in  order  to 
satisfy  the  requirements  of  Lycoming 
College  and  the  Pennsylvania  College 
of  Optometry.  Such  students  are 
allowed  to  complete  a  modified 
biology  major  which  will  exempt 
them  from  two  biology  courses: 
Ecology  (Bio.  24)  and  Plant  Sciences 
(Bio.  25).  (This  modified  major  re- 
quires the  successful  completion  of 
the  initial  year  at  the  Pennsylvania 
College  of  Optometry).  Students 
desiring  other  majors  must  coor- 
dinate their  plans  with  the  Health 
Professions  Advisory  Committee  in 
order  to  insure  that  they  have 
satisfied  all  requirements. 


Podiatry  —  Students  interested  in 
podiatry  may  either  seek  admission  to 
a  college  of  podiatric  medicine  upon 
completion  of  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree  or  through  the  Accelerated 
Podiatric  Medical  Education- 
Curriculum  Program  (APMEC).  The 
latter  program  provides  an  oppor- 
tunity for  students  to  qualify  for  ad- 
mission to  the  Pennsylvania  College 
of  Podiatric  Medicine  (PCPM)  or  the 
Ohio  College  of  Podiatric  Medicine 
(OCPM)  after  three  years  of  study  at 
Lycoming.  At  Lycoming,  students  in 
the  APMEC  program  must  success- 
fully complete  24  unit  courses,  in- 
cluding the  distribution  program  and 
a  basic  foundation  in  biology, 
chemistry,  physics,  and  mathematics. 
During  the  first  year  of  study  at 
PCPM  or  OCPM,  students  must  suc- 
cessfully complete  a  program  of  basic 
science  courses  and  an  introduction 
to  podiatry.  Successful  completion  of 
the  first  year  of  professional  training 
will  contribute  toward  the  fulfillment 
of  the  course  requirements  for  the 
bachelor  of  arts  degree  at  Lycoming. 

Sculpture  —  The  Art  Department 
with  the  Johnson  Atelier  Technical 
Institute  of  Sculpture  in  Princeton, 
New  Jersey,  offers  a  BFA  degree  in 
sculpture.  It  uses  a  classical  appren- 
ticeship approach  as  its  teaching 
method.  This  ancient  method  of 
teaching  is  combined  at  Johnson  with 
the  most  modern  and  technically  ad- 
vanced foundry  and  fabricating 
techniques. 

The  Art  Department  offers  a  syn- 
thesis program  that  interrelates  the 
student  experience  at  both  institu- 
tions. This  is  achieved  by  having  the 
student  rotate  between  Lycoming  and 
the  atelier  so  that  each  form  of  educa- 
tion is  preparation  for  the  other. 
Lycoming  offers  a  core  academic  pro- 
gram, a  course  of  study  in  the  Art 
Department,  and  elective  course  op- 
portunities. Lycoming  gives  eight 
course  units  of  college  credit  to  the 
student  for  having  successfully  com- 
pleted one  of  the  apprenticeship  pro- 
grams at  the  Johnson  Atelier. 


All  work  completed  by  the  student 
at  Lycoming  by  the  end  of  the 
sophomore  year  will  be  applicable  to 
a  bachelor  of  arts  degree  with  a  major 
in  art  should  the  student  decide  to 
withdraw  from  the  BFA  program.  If 
the  student  should  withdraw  from  the 
cooperative  program  prior  to  com- 
pleting the  apprenticeship  at  the 
Johnson  Atelier,  Lycoming  will  give 
up  to  four  units  of  credit  or  one 
semester's  work  for  the  internship.  If, 
however,  the  student  completes  more 
work  at  the  atelier  than  the  four 
units,  that  extra  work  will  not  be 
credited  to  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree;  it  will  only  be  used  as  part  of 
the  bachelor  of  fine  arts  degree,  and 
then  only  if  the  course  at  the  atelier  is 
completed. 

This  course  of  study  is  very 
rigorous.  It  will  require  that  the  stu- 
dent be  involved  almost  continuous- 
ly, either  at  Lycoming  or  at  the 
Johnson  Atelier,  during  the  four 
years  it  will  take  to  complete  the 
degree.  (See  Art  Department  listing 
for  specific  program.) 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps 
Program  (R.O.T.C.)  —  The  program 
provides  a  voluntary  opportunity  for 
Lycoming  students  to  enroll  on  a 
non-credit  basis  in  the  Bucknell 
Universtiy  R.O.T.C.  unit.  Lycoming 
notes  enrollment  in  and  successful 
completion  of  the  program  on  stu- 
dent transcripts.  Military  Science  is  a 
four-year  program  divided  into  a 
basic  course  given  during  the 
freshman  and  sophomore  years  and 
an  advanced  course  given  during  the 
junior  and  senior  years.  Students  who 
have  not  completed  the  basic  course 
may  qualify  for  the  advanced  course 
by  completing  summer  camp  between 
the  sophomore  and  junior  years. 
Students  enrolled  in  the  advanced 
course  receive  a  monthly  stipend  of 
$100  for  up  to  10  months  a  year. 
Students  successfully  completing  the 
advanced  course  and  advanced  sum- 
mer camp  between  the  junior  and 
senior  years  will  qualify  for  a  com- 
mission as  a  Second  Lieutenant  in  the 


United  States  Army  upon  graduation, 
and  will  incur  a  service  obligation  in 
the  active  Army  or  Army  Reserves. 
The  only  expense  to  the  student  for 
this  program  is  the  $60  basic  and  ad- 
vanced course  deposits  payable  to 
Bucknell. 

Student   Enrichment   Semester   — 

This  voluntary  program  is  designed  to 
expand  academic  and  life  oppor- 
tunities for  students  and  to  provide 
for  participation  in  specialized  pro- 
grams and  courses  not  available  at 
Lycoming.  Other  members  of  the 
program  are  Bucknell  and  Sus- 
quehanna Universities,  the 
Williamsport  Area  Community  Col- 
lege, and  Bloomsburg,  Lock  Haven, 
and  Mansfield  State  Colleges. 
Students  other  than  freshmen  enroll 
full  or  part  time  for  credit,  normally 
for  one  semester  or  term,  at  any  par- 
ticipating institution  in  selected 
courses.  Students  in  the  program  re- 
main fully  enrolled  as  degree  can- 
didates at  their  home  institutions.  A 
special  opportunity  within  the  pro- 
gram is  the  cross-registration  arrange- 
ment with  the  Williamsport  Area 
Community  College,  whereby 
students  may  enroll  for  less  than  a 
full-time  course  load  while  remaining 
enrolled  in  courses  at  Lycoming. 

Washington,  United  Nations,  Lon- 
don and  Harrisburg  Urban  Semesters 

—  With  the  consent  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Political  Science,  selected 
students  are  permitted  to  study  in 
Washington,  D.C.,  at  The  American 
University  for  one  semester.  They 
may  choose  from  seven  different  pro- 
grams: Washington  Semester,  Urban 
Semester,  Foreign  Policy  Semester, 
International  Development  Semester, 
Economic  Policy  Semester,  Science 
and  Technology  Semester,  American 
Studies  Semester. 

With  the  consent  of  either  the 
Department  of  History  or  Political 
Science,  selected  students  may  enroll 
at  Drew  University  in  Madison,  New 
Jersey,  in  the  United  Nations 
Semester,  which  is  designed  to  pro- 
vide a  first-hand  acquaintance  with 


17 


the  world  organization.  Students  with 
special  interests  in  world  history,  in- 
ternational relations,  law,  and 
politics  are  eligible  to  participate. 

The  London  Semester  programs  of 
Drew  and  The  American  Universities 
emphasize  European  history,  politics, 
and  culture.  Interested  students  par- 
ticipate with  the  consent  of  either  the 
Departments  of  History  or  Political 
Science. 

The  Harrisburg  Urban  Semester 
(THUS)  is  a  project  of  the  Central 
Pennsylvania  Consortium:  Dickin- 
son, Franklin  &  Marshall,  and 
Gettysburg  Colleges.  THUS  is  a  one- 
semester  off-campus  academic  intern- 
ship program  designed  for  students 
who  wish  to  participate  in  a  career- 
oriented  internship  experience  while 
exploring  the  social,  economic,  and 
political  problems  which  our  states 
and  cities  face.  THUS  students,  in 
most  cases,  receive  a  full  semester's 
academic  credit  by  working  25  hours 
a  week  in  their  internship,  writing  a 
substantial  analytical  paper  re- 
lated to  the  internship,  and  taking 
two  academic  seminars — one  in  ur- 
ban affairs  and  one  in  a  more 
specialized  area.  Opportunities  for  in- 
dependent study  are  also  available. 
The  20  students  in  the  program 
each  semester  live  near  one  another  in 
apartments  or  houses  available 
through  THUS,  and  students  spend  a 
great  deal  of  time  together  sharing 
their  common  experiences  in  an  infor- 
mal and  sometimes  intense  manner. 
Students  will  receive  academic  credit 
from  the  Franklin  &  Marshall  Col- 
lege. The  internship  is  graded  on  a 
pass/fail  basis. 

Normally  the  above  special- 
semester  programs  are  open  only  to 
juniors. 


Lycoming  College  cannot  assume  responsibili- 
ty for  the  health,  safety,  or  welfare  of  students 
engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from  any  off- 
campus  studies  or  activities  which  are  not 
under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institu- 
tion. 


THE  SCHOLAR  PROGRAM 

The  Lycoming  College  Scholar  Pro- 
gram is  a  special  program  designed  to 
meet  the  needs  and  aspirations  of 
highly  motivated  students  of  superior 
intellectual  ability.  The  Lycoming 
Scholar  satisfies  the  general  distribu- 
tion requirements,  but  on  a  more  ex- 
acting level  and  with  more  challeng- 
ing courses  than  the  average  student. 
Lycoming  Scholars  also  participate  in 
special  courses  and  seminars  and  in 
serious  independent  study  cul- 
minating in  a  senior  project  super- 
vised by  their  major  department. 

Students  are  admitted  to  the  pro- 
gram by  invitation  of  the  Scholar 
Council,  the  group  which  oversees  the 
program.  The  council  consists  of  four 
students  elected  by  current  scholars 
and  four  faculty  selected  by  the  Dean 
of  the  College.  The  guidelines  govern- 
ing selection  of  new  scholars  are  flexi- 
ble: academic  excellence,  intellectual 
curiosity,  and  creativity  are  all  taken 
into  account.  Students  who  desire  to 
participate  in  the  Scholar  Program 
but  are  not  invited  may  petition  the 
Scholar  Council  for  consideration. 

To  remain  in  the  program,  students 
must  maintain  a  GPA  of  3.0  or  bet- 
ter. Students  dropping  below  this 
average  will  be  placed  on  Scholar  pro- 
bation until  their  average  improves, 
or  they  are  asked  to  leave  the  pro- 
gram. To  graduate  as  a  Scholar,  a 
student  must  have  at  least  a  3.0 
cumulative  average.  Scholars  must 
take  the  First  Year  Scholar  Seminar 
during  their  first  semester  in  the  pro- 
gram. In  addition,  the  following 
course  requirements  must  be  met. 

A.  English.  Scholars  must  display 
above-average  writing  skills  by  the 
end  of  the  sophomore  year,  as  cer- 
tified by  the  Department  of  English 
and  the  Scholar  Council.  This  re- 
quirement may  be  met  by  obtaining  a 
sufficiently  high  score  on  an  ap- 
propriate CLEP  examination  or  by  a 
grade  of  "B"  in  English  2.  Students 
not  meeting  the  requirement  in  either 
of  these  ways  by  the  end  of  the 
freshman  year  will  be  asked  to  do  ex- 


tra work  until  the  competency  is 
reached.  Beyond  English  2,  the  re- 
quirement is  one  literature  course 
numbered  20  or  higher. 

B.  Language/Mathematical 
Sciences.  Scholars  must  satisfy  the  re- 
quirement in  either  language  or 
mathematical  sciences.  Language: 
Scholars  must  complete  two  courses 
numbered  10  or  higher  (excluding 
courses  taught  in  English). 
Mathematical  Sciences:  Two  options 
are  available  in  mathematics/com- 
puter science.  Either  Math  18  and  19, 
plus  one  course  numbered  20  or 
higher  (continous  mathematics)  or 
two  courses  chosen  from  Math  12, 
13,  and  Computer  Science  15,  plus 
one  course  numbered  20  or  higher 
(discrete  mathematics).  By 
demonstrating  higher  competence  on 
the  Mathematics  Placement  Ex- 
amination, scholars  may  reduce  the 
requirement  to  two  units  of 
mathematical  science. 

C.  Philosophy/Religion.  Scholars 
must  satisfy  this  requirement  in  either 
of  the  two  areas.  Philosophy:  Two 
courses  numbered  20  or  higher. 
Religion:  Two  courses  numbered  22 
or  higher. 

D.  Fine  Arts.  Scholars  must  satisfy 
the  requirement  in  one  of  four  areas. 
Art:  Two  options  are  available  in  art. 
Either  two  courses  taken  from  Art  22, 
23,  24,  31,  32,  33,  and  34  (Art 
History),  or  two  courses  taken  from 
Art  11,  15,  20,  and  25  (Studio  Art). 
Music:  Two  courses  taken  from 
Music  17,  30,  or  higher.  Theatre: 
Two  courses  taken  from  Theatre  12 
or  higher,  excluding  Theatre  18. 
Literature:  Two  literature  courses 
taken  from  English  20  or  higher, 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literature  25, 
or  other  Foreign  Language  and 
Literature  courses  taught  in  English. 

E.  Natural  Sciences.  Scholars  must 
satisfy  the  requirements  in  one  of 
three  areas.  Astronomy/Physics: 
Two  courses  numbered  1 1  or  higher. 
Biology:  Two  courses  numbered  10  or 
higher.  Chemistry:  Two  courses 
numbered  10  or  higher. 

F.  History/Social     Sciences. 


18 


Scholars  must  satisfy  the  re- 
quirements in  one  of  five  areas. 
Economics:  Two  courses  numbered 
10  or  higher.  History:  Two  courses, 
one  of  which  must  be  numbered  20  or 
higher.  Political  Science:  Two  courses 
numbered  15  or  higher.  Psychology: 
Two  courses  including  Psychology  10 
and  one  course  numbered  24  or 
higher  (excluding  Psychology  38). 
Sociology  /Anthropology:  Two 
courses  including  Sociology  10  and 
one  course  numbered  30  or  higher 
(excluding  Sociology  40). 

G.  Physical  Education.  Scholars 
must  satisfy  the  same  physical  educa- 
tion requirement  stipulated  by  the 
College  for  all  students. 

H.  Designated  Courses.  In  addition 
to   completing   the   distribution   re- 


quirements, Scholars  will  be  required 
to  complete  four  upper-level  courses 
(numbered  30  and  above)  chosen 
from  a  list  of  "designated"  courses 
selected  and  maintained  by  the 
Scholar  Council.  Each  full-time 
Lycoming  instructor  is  invited  to 
nominate  one  of  his/her  courses  hav- 
ing special  depth  and  merit  for  inclu- 
sion on  this  list.  The  Scholar  Council 
may  alter  the  list  from  time  to  time.  A 
scholar  may  use  no  more  than  two 
such  designated  courses  from  any  one 
department  to  satisfy  this  require- 
ment. 

I.  Senior  Project.  In  the  senior 
year,  scholars  must  successfully  com- 
plete an  independent  studies  or 
departmental  honors  project  which 
has  been  approved  in  advance  by  the 


Independent  Studies  Committee  and 
the  Scholar  Council.  This  project 
must  be  presented  orally  and  be  ac- 
cepted by  the  Scholar  Council. 

J.  Scholars  must  complete  a  major 
and  32  units,  exclusive  of  the  First 
Year  Scholar  Seminar. 

K.  In  the  case  of  transfer  students 
and  those  who  seek  to  enter  the  pro- 
gram after  their  freshman  year  and  in 
other  cases  deemed  by  the  Scholar 
Council  to  involve  special  or  extraor- 
dinary circumstances,  the  Council 
shall  have  the  right  to  grant  excep- 
tions and  make  adjustments  to  the 
scholar  distribution  requirements 
provided  that  in  all  cases  such  excep- 
tions and  adjustments  would  still 
satisfy  the  regular  College  distribu- 
tion requirements. 


19 


Curriculum 


Numbers  1-9  Elementary  courses  in 
departments   where   such    courses 
are  not  counted  as  part  of  the  stu- 
dent's major. 
Numbers     10-19     Freshman     level 

courses 
Numbers    20-29    Sophomore    level 

courses 
Numbers  30-39  Junior  level  courses 
Numbers  40-49  Senior  level  courses 
Numbers  50-59  Non-catalog  courses 

(offered  on  a  limited  basis) 
Numbers  60-69  Applied  Music 
Numbers  70-79  Internships 
Numbers  80-89  Independent  Study 
Numbers   90-99    Independent   Study 
for  Department  Honors 

Courses  not  in  sequence  are  listed 
separately,  as: 

Drawing  Art  1 1 

Color  Theory      Art  12 

Courses  which  imply  a  sequence  are 
indicted  with  a  dash  between,  mean- 
ing that  the  first  semester  must  be 
taken  prior  to  the  second,  as: 

Intermediate  French 

French  10-11 

All  students  have  the  right  of  access 
to  all  courses. 

ACCOUNTING 

Professor:  Richmond  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professors:  Kuhns, 

Wienecke 

The  purpose  of  the  accounting  major 
is  to  help  prepare  the  student  for  a 
career  within  the  accounting  profes- 
sion, whether  public,  private,  or 
governmental,  through  a  curriculum 
stressing  pre-professional  education. 

A  major  consists  of  Accounting  10, 
20-21,  30,  40,  41,  43,  45, 
Mathematics  13,  Computer  Science 
15,  and  one  unit  to  be  selected  from 
Accounting  25,  26,  31,42,44,46,47, 
and  48  or  Internship.  Business  10  may 
be  substituted  for  Accounting  10  if  a 
student  changes  majors.  Duplicate 
credit  will  not  be  granted. 

Students  seeking  entry  into 
the  public  accounting  field  are  ad- 
vised to  investigate  the  professional 


requirements  for  certification  in  the 
state  in  which  they  intend  to  practice 
so  that  they  may  meet  all  educational 
requirements  prior  to  graduation.  All 
majors  are  advised  to  enroll  in 
Economics  10  and  11,  Business  35, 
36,  and  38,  and  one  of  the  following: 
Business  33,  Economics  20,  or  37. 

10      ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING  THEORY 
An  introductory  course  in  recording, 
classifying,  summarizing,  and  inter- 
preting the  basic  business  transaction. 
Problems  of  classification  and  interpreta- 
tion of  accounts  and  preparation  of  finan- 
cial statements  are  studied.  Prerequisite: 
Second-semester  freshman  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

20-21     INTERMEDIATE 

ACCOUNTING  THEORY 
An  intensive  study  of  accounting 
statements  and  analytical  procedures  with 
an  emphasis  upon  corporate  accounts, 
various  decision  models,  price-level 
models,  earnings  per  share,  pension  ac- 
counting, accounting  for  leases,  and 
financial  statement  analysis.  Prerequisite: 
Accounting  10. 

25  FINANCIAL  STATEMENT 
ANALYSIS 

Deals  with  the  analysis  of  financial 
statements  as  an  aid  to  decision  making. 
The  theme  of  the  course  is  understanding 
the  financial  data  which  are  analyzed  as 
well  as  the  methods  by  which  they  are 
analyzed  and  interpreted.  This  course 
should  prove  of  value  to  all  who  need  a 
thorough  understanding  of  the  uses  to 
which  financial  statements  are  put  as  well 
as  to  those  who  must  know  how  to  use 
them  intelligently  and  effectively.  This  in- 
cludes accountants,  security  analysts, 
lending  officers,  credit  analysts, 
managers,  and  all  others  who  make  deci- 
sions on  the  basis  of  financial  data.  Pre- 
requisite: Accounting  10  or  Business  10. 
May  term. 

26  GOVERNMENT  AND  FUND 
ACCOUNTING 

This  course  is  designed  to  introduce  ac- 
counting for  not-for-profit  organizations. 
Municipal  accounting  and  reporting  are 
studied.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  10  or 
Business  10,  one-half  unit  of  credit. 

30-31     COST  AND  BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING  THEORY 
Methods    of    accounting    for    material, 
labor,  and  factory  overhead  expenses  con- 
sumed in  manufacturing  using  job  order, 


process,  and  standard  costing.  Applica- 
tion of  cost  accounting  and  budgeting 
theory  to  decision  making  in  the  area  of 
make  or  buy,  expansion  of  production 
and  sales,  and  accounting  for  control  are 
dealt  with.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  20 
or  consent  of  instructor. 


40  AUDITING  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  science  or  art  of  verifying, 
analyzing,  and  interpreting  accounts  and 
reports.  The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  em- 
phasize concepts  which  will  enable 
students  to  understand  the  philosophy 
and  environment  of  auditing.  Special  at- 
tention is  given  to  the  public  accounting 
profession,  studying  auditing  standards, 
professional  ethics,  the  legal  liability  in- 
herent in  the  attest  function,  the  study 
and  evaluation  of  internal  control,  the 
nature  of  evidence,  the  growing  use  of 
statistical  sampling,  the  impact  of  elec- 
tronic data  processing,  and  the  basic  ap- 
proach to  planning  an  audit.  Finally, 
various  audit  reports  expressing  indepen- 
dent expert  opinions  on  the  fairness  of 
financial  statements  are  studied.  Prereq- 
uisite: Accounting  21,  Mathematics  13, 
and  Computer  Science  15. 

41  FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX 
ACCOUNTING  AND  PLANNING 
Analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Internal 
Revenue  Code  relating  to  income  deduc- 
tions, inventories,  and  accounting 
methods.  Practical  problems  involving 
determination  of  income  and  deductions, 
capital  gains  and  losses,  computation  and 
payment  of  taxes  through  withholding  at 
the  source,  and  through  declaration  are 
considered.  Planning  transactions  so  that 
a  minimum  amount  of  tax  will  result  is 
emphasized.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  10 
or  consent  of  instructor. 


42      FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX 

ADMINISTRATION  AND  PLANNING 
An  analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Inter- 
nal Revenue  Code  relating  to  partner- 
ships, estates,  trusts,  and  corporations. 
An  extensive  series  of  problems  is  con- 
sidered, and  effective  tax  planning  is  em- 
phasized. Prerequisite:  Accounting  41. 


43      ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING  1 

An  intensive  study  of  partnerships,  in- 
stallment and  consignment  sales,  branch 
accounting,  bankruptcy  and  reorganiza- 
tion, estates  and  trusts,  government  en- 
tities, nonprofit  organizations,  and  ac- 
counting and  reporting  for  the  SEC. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  21.  One-half 
unit  of  credit. 


20 


44  CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control  process  in  the  organization. 
General  systems  theory,  financial  control 
systems,  centralization-decentralization, 
performance  measurement  and  evalua- 
tion, forecasts  and  budgets,  and 
marketing,  production  and  finance 
models  for  control  purposes.  Prere- 
quisite: Accounting  31  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. Alternate  years. 

45  AUDITING  PRACTICE 

An  audit  project  is  presented,  solved  and 
the  auditor's  report  written.  THIS 
COURSE  IS  LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS 
WHO  HAVE  EITHER  COMPLETED 
OR  ARE  ENROLLED  IN  ACCOUN- 
TING 40.  One-half  unit  of  credit.  Grade 
will  be  recorded  as  "S"  or  "U.  " 

46  SEMINAR  ON  APB  OPINIONS  AND 
FASB  STANDARDS 

A  seminar  course  for  accounting  majors 
with  library  assignments  to  gain  a 
workable  understanding  of  the  highly 
technical  opinions  of  the  Accounting 
Principles  Board  and  standards  of  the 
Financial  Accounting  Standards  Board. 
One  term  paper.  Possible  trip  to  New 
York  City  to  attend  a  public  hearing  of 
the  Financial  Accounting  Standards 
Board.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  10.  May 
term. 

47  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING  II 
Certain  areas  of  advanced  accounting 
theory,  including  business  combinations, 
consolidated  financial  statements,  and  ac- 
counting and  reporting  for  the  Securities 
and  Exchange  Commission  are  covered. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  21.  One- ha  If 
unit  of  credit. 

48  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  FOR 
CPA  CANDIDATES 

Problems  from  the  Accounting  Practice 
sections  of  past  C.P.A.  examinations, 
which  require  a  thorough  knowledge  of 
the  core  courses  in  their  solution,  are 
assigned.  The  course  is  intended  to  meet 
the  needs  of  those  interested  in  public  ac- 
counting and  preparation  for  the  Cer- 
tified Public  Accountants  Examination. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  30  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One-half  unit  of  credit.  Grade 
will  be  recorded  as  "S"  or  "U.  " 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  accounting  typically  work  off 
campus  under  the  supervision  of  a  public 
or  private  accountant. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Typical  examples  of  recent  studies  in  ac- 
counting are:  computer  program  to 
generate  financial  statements,  educational 


core   for   public   accountants,   inventory 
control,  and  church  taxation. 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 


ACCOUNTING  — 
MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 

Assistant  Professor:  Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The  Accounting-Mathematical 
Sciences  interdisciplinary  major  is 
designed  to  offer,  within  a  liberal-arts 
framework,  courses  which  will  aid  in 
constructing  mathematical  models 
for  business  decision  making. 
Students  obtain  the  necessary 
substantial  background  in  both 
mathematical  sciences  and  accoun- 
ting. 

Required  accounting  courses  are: 
Accounting  10,  20,  21,  30,  31,  41,  42. 
In  Mathematical  Sciences  required 
courses  are:  Computer  Science  15  and 
37  and  Mathematics  12,  18,  19,  38, 
and  13  or  32.  Recommended  courses 
include:  Mathematics  20,  33; 
Business  23,  34,  35,  36,  38,  39;  Com- 
puter Science  26;  Economics  10,  11; 
Psychology  15,  24;  and  Sociology  10. 


AMERICAN  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The  American  Studies  major  offers  a 
comprehensive  program  in  American 
civilization  which  introduces  students 
to  the  complexities  underlying  the 
development  of  America  and  its  con- 
temporary life.  The  13  major  courses 
include: 

FOUR  CORE  COURSES  —  The 
primary  integrating  units  of  the  ma- 
jor, these  team-taught  courses  will 
teach  you  how  to  think  of  ideas  from 
different  points  of  view  and  how  to 
correlate  information  and  methods 
from  various  disciplines: 

America    As    a    Civilization    (First 
semester  of  major  study) 


American  Studies  —  Research  and 
Methodology  (Second  semester) 

American  Tradition  in  the  Arts  and 
Literature  (Third  semester) 

Internship  or  Independent  Study 
(Junior  and/or  senior  year) 

CONCENTRATION    AREAS    — 

Six  courses  in  one  option  and  three  in 
the  other  are  needed.  Six  primary 
concentration-option  courses  in 
American  Arts  or  American  Society 
build  around  the  insights  gained  in 
the  core  courses.  They  focus  par- 
ticular attention  on  areas  most  ger- 
mane to  academic  and  vocational  in- 
terests. The  three  additional  courses 
from  the  other  option  give  further 
breadth  to  understanding  of 
America.  Students  also  will  be  en- 
couraged to  take  elective  courses 
relating  to  other  cultures. 

American  Arts  Concentration  Option 

American  Art  —  Art  24 

American  Art  of  the  20th  Century  —  Art  32 

19th  Century  American  Literature 

—  English  22 

20th  Century  American  Literature 

—  English  23 

American  Music  —  Music  18  or  19 
American  Theatre  —  Theatre  51 

American  Society  Concentration 
Option 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  to  1877 

—  History  42 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  since  1877 

—  History  43 

The  American  Constitutional  System 

—  Political  Science  30 

The  American  Political  Tradition 

—  Political  Science  47 
American  Economic  Development 

—  Economics  51 

Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 

—  Sociology  34 

Students  should  design  their 
American  Studies  major  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  program  coordinator  or 
a  member  of  the  American  Studies 
Committee. 

10      AMERICA  AS  A  CIVILIZATION 

An  analysis  of  the  historical,  socio- 
cultural,  economic,  and  political  perspec- 
tives on  American  civilization  with  special 
attention  to  the  inter-relationships  bet- 
ween these  various  orientations. 


21 


1 1  AMERICAN  STUDIES  —  RESEARCH 
AND  METHODOLOGY 

The  study  and  application  of  various 
research  methods,  including  new  trends  in 
historical  study,  quantitative  analysis, 
cross-cultural  studies,  and  on-site  inspec- 
tion. 

12  AMERICAN  TRADITION  IN  THE 
ARTS  AND  LITERATURE 

The  relationships  of  the  arts  and  literature 
to  the  various  historical  periods  of 
American  life. 

70-79  or  80-89     INTERNSHIP  OR 

INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  Index) 
An  opportunity  to  relate  the  learning  in 
the  core  courses  and  the  concentration 
areas  to  an  actual  supervised  off-campus 
learning  situation  or  independent  study 
project. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
HONORS  (See  Index) 


ART 


Associate  Professor:  Shipley 

(Chairman) 

Assistant  Professors:  Bogle,  Lesko 

The  Art  Department  offers  two 
degree  programs:  a  bachelor  of  arts 
degree  and  a  bachelor  of  fine  arts  in 
sculpture. 

The  B.A.  degree: 

The  student  chooses  between  a  two- 
dimensional  and  a  three-dimensional 
studio  track,  and  completes  a  core  art 
history  program. 

The  two-dimensional  track  consists 
of  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  1 1  and  21), 
Figure  Modeling  I  (Art  16),  Two- 
Dimensional  Design  (Art  15),  and 
Painting  I  and  II  (Art  20  and  30). 
Printmaking  I  and  II  (Art  28  and  38) 
may  be  substituted  for  Painting  I  and 
II  (Art  20  and  30). 

The  three-dimensional  track  con- 
sists of  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  1 1  and 
21),  Figure  Modeling  I  (Art  16), 
Sculpture  I  and  II  (Art  25  and  35), 
and  either  Figure  Modeling  II  (Art 
26)  or  Sculpture  III  (Art  45). 

22 


Each  major  must  take  Art  22  and 
23  (Survey  of  Art)  and  two  additional 
courses  in  art  history  (Art 
24-31-32-33-34).  Studio  Research 
(Art  46)  in  the  chosen  track  is  re- 
quired along  with  participation  in  a 
senior  exhibition. 


The  BFA  degree  in  sculpture: 
The  student  completes  a  specified 
course  of  study  in  the  Art  Depart- 
ment, the  Lycoming  College  distribu- 
tion requirements,  and  one  of  the 
field  specialization  apprenticeship 
programs  at  the  Johnson  Atelier  in 
Princeton,  New  Jersey. 

The  Art  Department  course  of 
study  consists  of  12  courses  in  studio 
and  art  history:  Figure  Modeling  I 
and  II  (Art  16  and  26),  Sculpture  I 
and  II  (Art  25  and  35),  Drawing  I  and 
II  (Art  11  and  21),  Introduction  to 
Photography  (Art  27),  2-D  Design 
(Art  15),  Survey  of  Art  (Art  22  and 
23),  and  two  additional  courses  in  Art 
History  (Art  24,  31,  32,  33,  34). 

Twelve  additional  course  units  are 
required  of  the  student.  The  student 
must  meet  the  requirements  of  the 
distribution  program  within  these 
courses. 

The  student  must  also  complete 
one  of  the  field  specialization  appren- 
ticeships at  the  Johnson  Atelier 
Technical  Institute  of  Sculpture  in 
Princeton,  New  Jersey.  This  requires 
the  student  to  be  at  the  Johnson 
Atelier  for  a  period  of  between  16  and 
23  Vi  months.  The  student  receives 
eight  course  units  of  credit  at 
Lycoming  College  for  successfully 
completing  the  field  specialization  ap- 
prenticeship at  Johnson  Atelier.  It  is 
expected  that  the  work  for  the  ap- 
prenticeship component  will  be  com- 
pleted during  the  summers  and  the 
junior  year. 

Admission  to  the  BFA  degree  pro- 
gram is  on  the  basis  of  meeting  the 
admission  standards  of  Lycoming 
College,  and  passing  a  portfolio 
review  and  interview  by  members  of 
the  Lycoming  College  Art  Depart- 
ment. 


n      DRAWING  I 

Study  of  the  human  figure  with  gesture 
and  proportion  stressed.  Student  is  made 
familiar  with  different  drawing  techni- 
ques and  media.  Some  drawing  from 
nature.  Offered  in  alternate  semesters 
with  Drawing  II  and  III. 

12      COLOR  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  physical  and  emotional 
aspects  of  color.  Emphasis  will  be  placed 
on  the  study  of  color  as  an  aesthetic  agent 
for  the  artist.  The  color  theories  of  Johan- 
nes Itten  will  form  the  base  for  this  course 
with  some  study  of  the  theories  of  Albert 
Munsell,  Faber  Berren,  and  Wilhelm 
Ostwald. 

15  TWO-DIMENSIONAL  DESIGN 

The  basic  fundamentals  found  in  the  two- 
dimensional  arts:  line,  shape,  form, 
space,  color,  and  composition  are  taught 
in  relationship  to  the  other  two- 
dimensional  arts.  Perceptual  theories  and 
their  relationships  to  what  and  why  we  see 
what  we  see  in  art  are  discussed  with  each 
problem. 

16  FIGURE  MODELING  I 
Understanding  the  figure  will  be  ap- 
proached through  learning  the  basic  struc- 
tures and  proportions  of  the  figure.  The 
course  is  conceived  as  a  three-dimensional 
drawing  class.  At  least  one  figure  per  stu- 
dent will  be  cast. 

19  CERAMICS  I 

Emphasis  placed  on  pottery  design  as  it 
relates  to  function  of  vessels  and  the 
design  parameters  imposed  by  the 
characteristics  of  clay.  The  techniques  of 
ceramics  are  taught  to  encourage  expres- 
sion rather  than  to  dispense  merely  a 
technical  body  of  information. 

20  PAINTING  I 

An  introduction  of  painting  techniques 
and  materials.  Coordination  of  color, 
value,  and  design  within  the  painting  is 
taught.  Some  painting  from  the  figure. 
No  limitations  as  to  painting  media,  sub- 
ject matter,  or  style.  Prerequisite:  Art  15 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

21  DRAWING  11 

Continued  study  of  the  human  figure. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  realism  and  figure- 
ground  coordination  with  the  use  of  value 
and  design.  Prerequisite:  Art  11. 

22  SURVEY  OF  ART:  PREHISTORY  TO 
THE  MIDDLE  AGES 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture, 
sculpture,  and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on 
the  interrelation  of  form  and  content  and 


on  the  relatedness  of  the  visual  arts  to 
their  cultural  environment:  Near  East, 
Egypt,  Greece,  Rome,  and  Medieval 
Europe. 

23  SURVEY  OF  ART:  FROM  THE 
RENAISSANCE  TO  THE  MODERN 
AGE 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture, 
sculpture,  and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on 
the  interrelation  of  form  and  content  and 
on  the  relatedness  of  the  visual  arts  to 
their  cultural  environment:  Renaissance 
to  modern. 

24  AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE  18TH  AND 
19TH  CENTURIES 

The  development  of  the  arts  in  America 
from  Colonial  times  through  the  19th  cen- 
tury; from  the  unknown  folk  artist  to 
popular  artists  such  as  Winslow  Homer 
and  Thomas  Eakins. 

25  SCULPTURE  1 

An  introduction  to  the  techniques, 
materials,  and  ideas  of  sculpture.  Clay, 
plaster,  wax,  wood,  and  other  materials 
will  be  used.  The  course  will  be  concerned 
with  ideas  about  sculpture  as  expression, 
and  with  giving  material  form  to  ideas. 

26  FIGURE  MODELING  II 

Will  exploit  the  structures  and 
understandings  learned  in  Figure  Model- 
ing I  to  produce  larger,  more  complete 
figurative  works.  There  will  be  a  require- 
ment to  cast  one  of  the  works  in  plaster. 
Prerequisite:  Art  16  and  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

27  INTRODUCTION  TO 
PHOTOGRAPHY 

Objectives  of  the  course  are  to  develop 
technical  skills  in  the  use  of  photographic 
equipment  (cameras,  films,  darkroom, 
print  maker)  and  to  develop  sensitivity  in 
the  areas  of  composition,  form,  light,  pic- 
ture quality,  etc.  Each  student  must  own 
or  have  access  to  a  35mm  camera. 

28  PRINTMAKING  I 

Practice  of  the  techniques  of  silk-screen, 
wood-block,  and  linoleum-block  printing. 
Prerequisite:  Art  11  or  15. 

29  CERAMICS  II 

Continuation  of  Ceramics  I.  Emphasis  on 
use  of  the  wheel  and  technical  aspects 
such  as  glaze  making  and  kiln  firing. 
Prerequisite:  Art  19. 

30  PAINTING  II 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  individual  style  and 
technique.  Artists  and  movements  in  art 
are  studied.  No  limitations  as  to  painting 


media,   subject   matter,   or  style.   Prere- 
quisite: Art  20. 

31  20TH  CENTURY  EUROPEAN  ART 
Stylistic  developments  in  Europe  from 
1880  to  the  present,  including  Cubism, 
Fauvism,  Expressionism,  Dada,  and  Sur- 
realism. Picasso,  Matisse,  Kandinsky, 
and  Mondrian  are  among  the  major  ar- 
tists studied. 


32      AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE  20TH 
CENTURY 

Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in 
the  United  States  from  1900  to  the  present 
with  emphasis  on  developments  of  the 
1950's  and  1960's:  an  inquiry  into  the 
meaning  and  historical  roots  of  contem- 
porary art. 


33  19TH  CENTURY  EUROPEAN  ART 
Emphasis  on  painting,  sculpture,  and  ar- 
chitecture of  Western  Europe  from  1760 
to  1900,  including  the  work  of  late  18th- 
century  artists  David  and  Goya  and  19th- 
century  developments  from  Romanticism 
to  Post-impressionism. 

34  ART  OF  THE  RENAISSANCE 
Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in 
Italy  and  the  Northern  countries  from  the 
late  13th  century  through  the  early  16th 
century.  Artists  include  Giotto, 
Donatello,  Alberti,  Leonardo  da  Vinci, 
Michelangelo,  Van  Eyck,  Durer,  and 
Bruegel. 

35  SCULPTURE  II 

A  continuation  of  Sculpture  I  (Art  25). 
Emphasis  is  on  advanced  technical  pro- 
cesses. Casting  of  bronze  and  aluminum 
sculpture  will  be  done  in  the  school  foun- 
dry. Prerequisite:  Art  25. 

37  PHOTOGRAPHY  II 

To  extend  the  skills  developed  in 
Photography  I  by  continued  growth  in 
technical  expertise,  presentation,  concep- 
tual ability,  and  aesthetic  sensibility.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  upon  term  essay  in  area  of 
student's  interest  and  presented  in  booklet 
format.  Prerequisite:  Art  27. 

38  PRINTMAKING  II 

Further  exploration  of  silk-screen  printing 
techniques,  practice  of  the  techniques  of 
engraving,  drypoint,  etching,  and  aqua- 
tint. 

40      PAINTING  III 

Professional  quality  is  stressed.  There  is 
some  experimentation  with  new  painting 
techniques  and  styles. 


41      DRAWING  III 

Continued  study  of  human  figure,  in- 
dividual style,  and  professional  control  of 
drawing  techniques  and  media  are  now 
emphasized. 

45  SCULPTURE  III 

In  Sculpture  III  the  student  is  expected  to 
produce  a  series  of  sculptures  that  follow 
a  conceptual  and  technical  line  of 
development.  Prerequisites:  Art  16,  25. 
and  35. 

46  STUDIO  RESEARCH 

Independent  research  in  an  elective  studio 
area,  conducted  under  the  supervision  of 
the  appropriate  faculty  member,  includes 
creation  of  work  which  may  be  incor- 
porated in  the  senior  group  exhibition. 
Student  works  in  private  studio  assigned 
by  the  department. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Commercial  design,  interior  design,  and 
photography  programs  in  local 
businesses,  and  museum  work  at  the 
Lycoming  County  Historical  Museum. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Recent  studies  in  anatomy.  Aspects  of  the 
art  noveau,  lithography,  photography, 
pottery,  problems  in  illustration,  and 
watercolor. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 


ASTRONOMY  AND  PHYSICS 

Professor:  Fineman 
Assistant  Professor:  Erickson 
(Chairman) 
Instructor:  Keig 

The  department  offers  two  majors. 
The  major  in  astronomy  is  specifical- 
ly designed  to  train  students  in  the 
field  of  planetarium  education.  The 
major  in  physics  prepares  students 
for  graduate  work  in  physics  or 
astronomy,  for  the  cooperative  pro- 
gram in  engineering,  or  for  state  cer- 
tification as  secondary  school 
teachers  of  physics.  Juniors  and 
seniors  in  both  majors  are  required  to 
attend  and  participate  in  the  weekly 
departmental  colloquia. 

A  number  of  courses  in  this  depart- 
ment are  offered  on  two  levels,  which 
differ  in  the  degree  of  mathematical 


23 


rigor  and  sophistication  needed.  All 
such  courses  have  dual  catalog 
numbers,  with  the  letters  B  (basic) 
and  A  (advanced)  appearing  after  the 
course  names  to  indicate  the  level. 
Both  the  B  and  A  level  of  a  course 
meet  together  for  the  same  three 
hours  of  lecture  each  week,  while  the 
A  level  meets  for  one  additional  hour 
each  week  of  more  advanced 
mathematical  development  of  the 
material.  This  system  is  designated  as 
the  "3  +  1"  method.  No  student  may 
earn  credit  for  both  levels  of  a  course. 

The  major  in  astronomy  requires 
AsPh  11,12,  either  15  or  25,  either  16 
or  26,  30,  either  34  or  44,  either  35  or 
45,  and  either  36  or  46;  Mathematics 
18  and  19  (Calculus  I  and  II),  and  one 
year  of  chemistry.  One  or  more  of  the 
following  are  recommended:  AsPh  3, 
4,  5,  27,  and  33,  and  Art  27 
(Photography  I). 

The  major  in  physics  requires  AsPh 
11,  either  12  or  13,  25,  26,  28,  29,  and 
at  least  two  courses  chosen  from  27, 
33,  37,  38,  44,  45,  46,  and  48; 
Mathematics  18  and  19  (Calculus  I 
and  II),  and  one  year  of  chemistry. 
With  departmental  consent,  advanc- 
ed courses  may  be  substituted  for 
AsPh  11,  12,  or  13.  Students  in  the 
cooperative  engineering  program  may 
substitute  AsPh  27  for  29.  In  addi- 
tion, Mathematics  20  (Multivariate 
Calculus)  and  21  (Differential  Equa- 
tions) are  required  for  graduate 
school  preparation  and  the 
cooperative  engineering  program.  It 
is  also  recommended  that  students 
planning  on  graduate  study  take  a 
foreign  language  and  courses  in  com- 
puter science. 


3  OBSERVATIONAL  ASTRONOMY 

A  methods  course  providing  the  oppor- 
tunity to  make  a  variety  of  astronomical 
observations,  both  visually  and 
photographically,  with  and  without 
telescopes.  The  planetarium  is  used  to 
familiarize  the  student  with  the  sky  at 
various  times  during  the  year  and  from 
different  locations  on  earth. 

4  FIELD  GEOLOGY 

A  methods  course  introducing  the  field 


techniques  needed  to  study  the  geology  of 
an  area.  May  term. 

5        HISTORY  OF  ASTRONOMY 

A  comprehensive  view  of  the  evolution  of 
astronomical  thought  from  ancient 
Greece  to  the  present,  emphasizing  the 
impact  that  astronomical  discoveries  and 
the  conquest  of  space  have  had  on 
Western  culture.  Four  hours  of  lecture  per 
week. 

1  PRINCIPLES  OF  ASTRONOMY  (B) 

1 1  PRINCIPLES  OF  ASTRONOMY  (A) 

A  summary  of  current  concepts  of  the 
universe  from  the  solar  system  to  distant 
galaxies.  Describes  the  techniques  and  in- 
struments used  in  astronomical  research. 
Presents  not  only  what  is  reasonably  well 
known  about  the  universe,  but  also  con- 
siders some  of  the  major  unsolved  pro- 
blems. Lectures  presented  by  the  "3  +  I" 
method;  also  two  hours  of  laboratory  per 
week.  Fall  semester.  Corequisite  for  II: 
Mathematics  17  or  consent  of  instructor. 

2  EARTH  SCIENCE  (B) 

12  EARTH  SCIENCE  (A) 

A  study  of  the  physical  processes  that 
continually  affect  the  planet  Earth,  shap- 
ing our  environment.  Describes  how  past 
events  and  lifeforms  can  be  reconstructed 
from  preserved  evidence  to  reveal  the 
history  of  our  planet  from  its  origin  to  the 
present.  Emphasizes  the  ways  in  which 
geology,  meteorology,  and  oceanography 
interrelate  with  man  and  the  environment. 
Lectures  presented  by  the  "3  +  I" 
method;  also  two  hours  of  laboratory  per 
week.  Spring  semester.  Corequisite  for 
12:  Mathematics  17  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

13  METEOROLOGY 

The  general  properties  of  the  atmosphere 
and  their  measurements  will  be  discussed 
in  terms  of  basic  physical  and  chemical 
laws.  Two  basic  themes  will  guide  the  ap- 
proach, i.e.,  the  atmosphere  behaves  like 
a  giant  heat  engine,  and  weather  patterns 
exist  from  a  micro-to-macro  scale.  Three 
lectures  and  one  two-hour  laboratory  per 
week.  May  term  only.  Alternate  years. 

15-16  PHYSICS  WITH  LIFE  SCIENCE 
APPLICATIONS 
The  basic  concepts,  principles,  and  laws 
of  physics  are  presented  in  this  non- 
calculus  introductory  physics  course. 
Topics  include  mechanics,  elastic  proper- 
ties of  matter,  fluids,  thermodynamics, 
electricity  and  magnetism,  waves,  optics, 
and  radioactivity.  Many  of  the  examples 
and  problems  used  to  illustrate  the  physics 
are  selected  from  the  life  sciences.  Three 
hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of  recitation. 


and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  17  or  consent 
of  instructor.  (Credit  may  not  be  earned 
for  both  15  and  25  or  for  both  16  and  26.) 

25-26  INTRODUCTORY  PHYSICS  WITH 
CALCULUS 
A  mathematically  rigorous  introduction 
to  physics  designed  for  majors  in  physics, 
astronomy,  chemistry,  and  mathematics. 
Topics  include  mechanics,  ther- 
modynamics, electricity  and  magnetism, 
waves,  optics,  and  modern  physics.  Five 
hours  of  lecture  and  recitation  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Core- 
quisite: Mathematics  18-19  (Calculus  I 
and  II).  (Credit  may  not  be  earned  for 
both  15  and  25  or  for  both  16  and  26.) 

27  ELECTRONICS 

D.C.  and  A.C.  circuit  and  network 
theory,  active  devices  such  as  transistors, 
operational  amplifiers,  integrated  cir- 
cuits, and  introduction  to  digital  elec- 
tronics will  be  covered.  Three  lectures  and 
two  two-hour  laboratory  sessions  per 
week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy/ Physics 
16  or  26,  and  Mathematics  9  or  18  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

28  MECHANICS 

Kinematics  and  dynamics  of  single  par- 
ticles and  systems  of  particles.  Rigid 
bodies.  Introduction  to  the  mechanics  of 
continuous  media.  Moving  reference 
frames.  Lagrangian  mechanics.  Four 
hours  of  lecture  and  three  hours  of 
laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Astronomy  and  Physics  25  (Concepts  of 
Phvsics  A)  and  Mathematics  19  (Calculus 
III 

29  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM 
The  electromagnetic  field,  electrical 
potential,  magnetic  field  and  electric  and 
magnetic  properties  of  matter.  Electric 
circuits.  Maxwell's  equations.  Laboratory 
includes  electronics  as  well  as  classical 
electricity  and  magnetism.  Four  hours  of 
lecture  and  three  hours  of  laboratory  per 
week.  Prerequisite:  Astronomy  and 
Physics  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A). 

30  PLANETARIUM  TECHNIQUES 

A  methods  course  covering  major  aspects 
of  planetarium  programming,  operation 
and  maintenance.  Students  are  required 
to  prepare  and  present  a  planetarium 
show.  Upon  successfully  completing  the 
course,  students  are  eligible  to  become 
planetarium  assistants.  Two  hours  of  lec- 
ture and  demonstration  and  four  hours  of 
practical  training  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Astronomy  and  Physics  I  or  11  (Prin- 
ciples of  Astronomy)  or  consent  of  the  in- 
structor. 


24 


33  OPTICS 

Geometrical  optics  and  optical  systems; 
physical  optics,  interference,  Fraunhofer 
and  Fresnel  diffraction  and  coherence  and 
lasers  will  be  covered.  Three  lectures  and 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prere- 
quisites: Astronomy/ Physics  16  or  26  and 
Mathematics  9  or  18  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. A  Iternate  years. 

34  RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY  B 

44  RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY  A 
A  detailed  presentation  of  the  special 
theory  of  relativity,  and  a  short  view  of 
the  general  theory  and  its  classical  proofs. 
Man's  concepts  of  the  universe,  with  par- 
ticular attention  to  alternative  modern 
cosmological  models.  Discussion  of  the 
Cosmological  Principle,  its  rationale,  and 
its  implications.  Lectures  will  be 
presented  by  the  "3  +  I  "  method.  Credit 
may  not  be  earned  for  both  Astronomy 
and  Physics  34  and  44.  Prerequisites  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  34:  11  (Principles 
of  Astronomy)  and  either  Astronomy  and 
Physics  15  or  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  B 
or  A),  Mathematics  18  (Calculus  I). 
Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics 
44:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  25 
(Concepts  of  Physics  A).  Alternate  years. 

35  STELLAR  EVOLUTION  AND 
NUCLEOSYNTHESIS  B 

45  STELLAR  EVOLUTION  AND 
NUCLEOSYNTHESIS  A 

The  physical  principles  governing  the  in- 
ternal structure  and  external  appearance 
of  stars.  Mechanisms  of  energy  genera- 
tion and  transport  within  stars.  The 
evolution  of  stars  from  initial  formation 
to  final  stages.  The  creation  of  chemical 
elements  by  nucleosynthesis.  Lectures 
presented  by  the  "3  +  I  "  method.  Credit 
may  not  be  earned  for  both  Astronomy 
and  Physics  35  and  45.  Prerequisites  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  35:  11  (Principles 
of  Astronomy)  and  either  Astronomy  and 
Physics  16  or  26  (Waves  and  Particles  B 
or  A).  Corequisite  for  Astronomy  and 
Physics  35:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II) 
or  consent  of  instructor.  Prerequisites  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  45:  II  (Principles 
of  Astronomy)  and  26  (Waves  and  Par- 
ticles A).  Alternate  years. 

36  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND 
GALACTIC  STRUCTURE  B 

46  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND 
GALACTIC  STRUCTURE  A 
The  notion  of  objects  in  gravitational 
fields.  Introduction  to  the  n-body  pro- 
blem. The  relation  between  stellar 
motions  and  the  galactic  potential.  The 
large  scale  structure  of  galaxies  in  general 
and  of  the  Milky  Way  Galaxy  in  par- 
ticular. Lectures  presented  by  the  "3   + 


1"  method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for 
both  Astronomy  and  Physics  36  and  46. 
Prerequisites  for  36:  11  (Principles  of 
Astronomy)  and  either  15  or  25  (Concepts 
of  Physics  B  or  A).  Corequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  36:  Mathematics 
19  (Calculus  II)  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Prerequisite  for  Astronomy  and  Physics 
46:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  25 
(Concepts  of  Physics  A).  Corequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  46:  28 
(Mechanics)  or  consent  of  instructor. 
A  Iternate  years. 

37  THERMODYNAMICS  AND 
STATISTICAL  MECHANICS 
Classical  thermodynamics  will  be 
presented  showing  that  the  macroscopic 
properties  of  a  system  can  be  specified 
without  a  knowledge  of  the  microscopic 
properties  of  the  constituents  of  the 
system.  Then,  statistical  mechanics  will  be 
developed  showing  these  same  macro- 
scopic properties.  Four  hours  of  lecture 
and  recitation  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
AsPh  16  or  26  and  Mathematics  19 
(Calculus  It).  Alternate  years. 

38  ATOMIC  AND  MOLECULAR 
PHYSICS 

The  development  of  the  principles  and 
methods  of  quantum  mechanics  from  the 
earliest  evidence  of  quantization.  Struc- 
ture and  spectra  of  atoms  and  molecules. 
Extension  of  quantum  theory  to  the  solid 
state.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  recitation 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  AsPh  16  or  26  and 
Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II).  Alternate 
years. 

48  INTRODUCTION  TO  QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

Basic  concepts  and  formulation  of  quan- 
tum theory.  The  free  particle,  the  simple 
harmonic  oscillator,  the  hydrogen  atom, 
and  central  force  problems  will  be  discuss- 
ed. Both  time-independent  and  time- 
dependent  perturbation  theory  will  be 
covered.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  recita- 
tion. Prerequisite:  either  Astronomy  and 
Physics  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A)  or 
Chemistry  31  (Physical  Chemistry  II)  and 
Mathematics  21  (Differential  Equations). 

49  ASTRONOMY  AND  PHYSICS 
COLLOQUIA 

Active  scientists  in  astronomy,  physics, 
and  related  areas  are  invited  to  present 
lectures  on  their  own  research  or  other 
professional  activities.  In  addition, 
seniors  majoring  in  astronomy  or  physics 
present  the  results  of  a  literature  survey  or 
individual  research  project.  One  hour  per 
week.  Majors  in  this  department  must  at- 
tend three  semesters  without  credit  during 


junior  and  senior  years  (register  for  non- 
credit  00,  Colloquia).  Credit  may  be  earn- 
ed during  the  senior  semester  in  which  the 
student's  presentation  is  given. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  physics  work  off  campus  under 
the  supervision  of  professional  physicists 
employed  by  local  industries  or  hospitals. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Independent  studies  may  be  undertaken  in 
most  areas  of  astronomy  and/or  physics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 


BIOLOGY 


Associate  Professors:  Angstadt 
(Chairman),  Diehl,  Zaccaria 
Assistant  Professors:  Gabriel, 
D.  King,  Zimmerman 
A  major  consists  of  eight  biology 
courses,  including  10-11,  21,  22,  23, 
24,  and  25.  Departmental  internships 
cannot  be  used  to  fulfill  the  eighth  re- 
quired course.  In  addition,  three  units 
of  chemistry  and  two  units  of 
mathematical  science  are  required. 
The  chemistry  requirement  must  in- 
clude at  least  one  unit  of  organic 
chemistry  chosen  from  Chemistry  15, 
20,  or  21.  The  mathematical  science 
courses  must  be  chosen  from  Com- 
puter Science  15  and  Mathematics  9, 
13,  17  or  above,  or  their  equivalent. 
Certain  specific  exceptions  to  the  core 
program  will  be  made  for  three-year 
students  enrolled  in  cooperative  pro- 
grams. Such  exceptions  are  noted 
under  the  particular  cooperative  pro- 
gram described  in  the  last  section  of 
the  Academic  Program  chapter  of  the 
catalog.  Students  interested  in  these 
programs  should  contact  the  program 
director  before  finalizing  their  in- 
dividual programs.  Credit  may  not  be 
earned  for  both  Biology  1  and  10  or 
for  both  Biology  2  and  1 1 .  Consent  of 
instructor  may  replace  Biology  10-11 
as  a  prerequisite  for  all  biology 
courses. 


25 


1-2     PRINCIPLES  OF  BIOLOGY 

An  investigation  of  biological  principles, 
including  ecological  systems,  form  and 
function  in  selected  representative 
organisms  (especially  man),  cell  theory, 
molecular  biology,  reproduction,  in- 
heritance, adaptation,  and  evolution.  The 
course  is  designed  primarily  for  students 
not  planning  to  major  in  the  biological 
sciences.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
two-hour  laboratory  per  week. 

3       FIELD  BIOLOGY  FOR  TEACHERS 
A  methods  course  for  students  preparing 
to  teach  biology.  Sources  and  methods  of 
collecting  and  preserving  various  plant 
and  animal  materials.  Summer  term  only. 

5-6     HUMAN  ANATOMY  — 
PHYSIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physics  and 
chemistry  relative  to  biological  systems. 
Human  anatomy,  physiology,  and 
developmental  biology  will  be  surveyed. 
An  introduction  to  microbiology  with  em- 
phasis given  to  host-pathogen  relation- 
ships and  the  immune  response.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour 
laboratory  per  week. 

10- 1 1     INTRODUCTION  TO  BIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  biology 
designed  for  students  planning  to  major 
in  the  biological  sciences.  Major  topics 
considered  include  the  origin  of  life, 
cellular  respiration  and  photosynthesis, 
genetics,  development,  anatomy  and 
physiology,  ecology,  behavior,  and  evolu- 
tion. Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 

21  MICROBIOLOGY 

A  study  of  microorganisms.  Emphasis  is 
given  to  the  identification  and  physiology 
of  microorganisms  as  well  as  to  their  role 
in  disease,  their  economic  importance, 
and  industrial  applications.  Three  hours 
of  lecture  and  two-hour  laboratory 
periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
10-11. 

22  GENETICS 

A  general  consideration  of  the  principles 
governing  inheritance,  including  treat- 
ment of  classical,  molecular,  cytological, 
physiological,  microbial,  human,  and 
population  genetics.  Three  hours  of  lec- 
ture and  two  two-hour  laboratory  periods 
per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  1 0-1 1. 


23 


ANIMAL  PHYSIOLOGY 
The  mechanisms  and  functions  of  animal 
systems,  including  the  autonomic,  en- 
docrine, digestive,  cardio-vascular, 
respiratory,  renal,  nervous,  and  reproduc- 
tive systems.   Mammalian  physiology  is 


stressed.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-1 1. 

24  ECOLOGY 

The  study  of  the  principles  of  ecology 
with  emphasis  on  the  role  of  chemical, 
physical,  and  biological  factors  affecting 
the  distribution  and  succession  of  plant 
and  animal  populations  and  communities. 
Included  will  be  field  studies  of  local 
habitats  as  well  as  laboratory  experimen- 
tation. Two  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
four-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11. 

25  PLANT  SCIENCES 

A  survey  of  the  structure,  development, 
function,  classification,  and  use  of  plants 
and  related  organisms.  The  study  will 
comprise  four  general  topic  areas:  form, 
including  morphology  and  anatomy  of 
plants  in  growth  and  reproduction;  func- 
tion, concentrating  on  nutrition  and 
metabolism  peculiar  to  photosynthetic 
organisms;  classification  systems  and 
plant  identification,  and  human  uses  of 
plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-1 1. 

30      COMPARATIVE  ANATOMY  OF 
VERTEBRATES 

Detailed  examination  of  the  origins, 
structure,  and  functions  of  the  principal 
organs  of  the  vertebrates.  Special  atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  progressive  modifica- 
tion of  organs  from  lower  to  higher 
vertebrates.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and 
one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisite:    Biology    10-11.    Alternate 


31  HISTOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  body  tissues  and  the 
microscopic  anatomy  of  the  organs  and 
structures  of  the  body  which  are  formed 
from  them.  Focus  is  on  normal  human 
histology.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
four-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

32  PLANT  AND  GREENHOUSE 
MANAGEMENT 

A  course  concerned  with  the  care  of 
houseplants  and  the  management  of  small 
greenhouses.  Class  time  will  include  lec- 
tures, discussions,  demonstrations, 
greenhouse  exercises,  and  field  trips  to 
local  greenhouses.  Topics  will  include  the 
theoretical  and  practical  aspects  of  the 
care  and  feeding,  propagation,  light  and 
water  requirements,  and  disease  control 
for  many  of  the  common  house  and 
greenhouse  plants.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
1-2  or  10-11.  Mav  term  only. 


33  ECONOMIC  AND 
SYSTEMATIC  BOTANY 

Structure  and  classification  of  plants  with 
emphasis  on  those  species,  particularly 
food  and  drug  plants,  having  significance 
for  human  affairs.  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  10-11.  Biology  25. 
A  Iternate  years. 

34  INVERTEBRATE  ZOOLOGY 
Comparative  study  of  the  invertebrate 
phyla  with  emphasis  on  phylogeny, 
physiology,  morphology,  and  ecology. 
Two  three-hour  lecture/laboratory 
periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
10-11.  Alternate  years. 

35  CELLULAR  PHYSIOLOGY 
Physico-chemical  background  of  cellular 
function:  functions  of  membrane  systems 
and  organelles;  metabolic  pathways; 
biochemical  and  cellular  bases  of  growth, 
development  and  responses  of  organisms. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour 
laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Biology  10-11  and  a  year  of  chemistry. 
Alternate  years. 

36  INTRODUCTION  TO  MARINE 
BIOLOGY  AND  BIOLOGICAL 
OCEANOGRAPHY 

The  study  of  major  marine  habitats  and 
the  adaptations  of  marine  organisms  as 
well  as  the  physical  and  chemical 
characteristics  of  oceans.  This  field- 
oriented  course  is  held  at  a  major  marine 
biological  station,  and  includes  diving  and 
collecting  from  boats.  Prerequisite: 
Biology  10-11.  May  term  only. 

37  FIELD  ORNITHOLOGY 

A  field-oriented  course,  with  in-the-field 
discussions,  demonstrations,  and  exer- 
cises dealing  with  the  systematics  and 
identification  of  the  birds  of  the  Northern 
U.S.,  their  behavior,  migration,  habitat 
selection,  and  populations  dynamics. 
Studies  will  stress  experimental  techniques 
used  in  the  field,  including  banding, 
recording  and  playback  methods,  ter- 
ritorial mapping,  and  population 
analysis.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 
May  term  only. 

38  CLINICAL  MICROBIOLOGY 

A  rigorous  introduction  to  clinical 
microbiology  with  emphasis  given  to 
rapid  identification  of  human  bacterial 
pathogens.  Laboratory  to  include  such 
diagnostic  procedures  as  antibiotic  sen- 
sitivity testing,  serological  diagnosis, 
anaerobic  culture  techniques,  and 
hemolytic  reactions.   Field  trips  will  be 


26 


taken  to  several  clinical  labs.  Prere- 
quisites: Biology  10-11,  Biology  21.  May 
term  onlv. 


39      MEDICAL  GENETICS 

This  course  is  concerned  with  the  relation- 
ships of  heredity  to  disease.  Discussions 
will  focus  on  topics  such  as  chromosomal 
abnormalities,  metabolic  variation  and 
disease,  somatic  cell  genetics,  genetic 
screening,  and  immunogenetics. 
Laboratory  exercises  will  offer  practical 
experiences  in  genetic  diagnostic  techni- 
ques. Prerequisite:  Biology  1-2  or  10-11. 
Mav  term  onlv. 


40      PARASITOLOGY  AND 

MEDICAL  ENTOMOLOGY 

The  biology  of  parasites  and  parasitism. 
Studies  on  the  major  groups  of  animal 
parasites  and  anthropod  vectors  of 
disease  will  involve  taxonomy  and  life 
cycles.  Emphasis  will  be  made  on 
parasites  of  medical  and  veterinary  im- 
portance. Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 


41      VERTEBRATE 
EMBRYOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  development  of  vertebrates 
from  fertilization  to  the  fully  formed 
fetus.  Particular  attention  is  given  to  the 
chick  and  human  as  representative 
organisms.  Two  three-hour  lec- 
ture/laboratory periods  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 


42      ANIMAL  BEHAVIOR 

A  study  of  the  causation,  function,  evolu- 
tion, and  biological  significance  of  animal 
behaviors  in  their  normal  environment 
and  social  contexts.  Three  hours  of  lec- 
ture and  one  four-hour  laboratory  each 
week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-/1.  Alter- 
nate vears. 


44      BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of 
carbohydrates,  lipids,  amino  acids,  pro- 
teins, and  nucleic  acids;  integration  of 
metabolism;  and  biochemical  control 
mechanisms,  including  allosteric  control, 
induction,  repression,  as  well  as  the 
various  types  of  inhibitive  control 
mechanisms.  Three  hours  of  lecture,  one 
three-hour  laboratory  and  one  hour  of  ar- 
ranged work  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  20-21  or  Chemistry  5,  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as 
Chemistry  44.  Alternate  years. 


46  PLANT  ANATOMY 
AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

A  study  of  plant  physiology  as  a  function 
of  plant  anatomy.  Metabolic  relationships 
and  environmental  factors  will  be  examin- 
ed from  a  background  of  the  structure 
and  development  of  cells,  tissues,  organs, 
and  whole  plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  10-11,  Biology  25. 
A  Iternate  years. 

47  IMMUNOLOGY 

The  course  introduces  concepts  concern- 
ing how  pathogens  cause  disease  and  host 
defense  mechanisms  against  infectious 
diseases.  Characterization  of  and  rela- 
tionships between  antigens,  haptens,  and 
antibodies  are  presented.  Serological 
assays  will  include:  agglutination 
precipitations,  immunofluorescence,  Im- 
munoelectrophoresis, and  complement 
fixation.  Other  topics  are:  immediate  and 
delayed  hypersensitivities  (i.e.  allergies 
such  as  hay  fever  and  poison  ivy),  im- 
munological renal  diseases,  im- 
munohematology  (blood  groups,  etc.), 
the  chemistry  and  function  of  comple- 
ment autoimmunity,  and  organ  graft  re- 
jection phenomena.  Three  hours  of  lec- 
ture, one  three-hour  laboratory,  and  one 
hour  of  arranged  work  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

48  ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This  course  begins  with  a  survey  of  the 
role  of  the  endocrine  hormones  in  the  in- 
tegration of  body  functions.  This  is 
followed  by  a  study  of  the  control  of  hor- 
mone synthesis  and  release,  and  a  con- 
sideration of  the  mechanisms  by  which 
hormones  accomplish  their  effects  on 
target  organs.  Two  three-hour  lec- 
ture/laboratory periods  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Recent  samples  of  internships  in  the 
department  include  ones  with  the  Depart- 
ment of  Environmental  Resources, 
nuclear  medicine  or  rehabilitative 
therapies  at  the  local  hospital. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Departmental  studies  are  experimentally 
oriented  and  may  entail  either  lab  or  field 
work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 
Examples  of  recent  honors  projects  have 
involved    stream    analysis,    gypsy   moth 
research,  drug  synthesis  and  testing. 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 


Professor:  Hollenback 
Assistant  Professor:  E. 
Weaver  (Chairman) 
Instructor:  Gordon 
Lecturer:  Larrabee 


King, 


In  order  to  graduate  with  a  major 
in  business  administration,  a  student 
must  complete  one  of  the  following 
two  tracks: 

Track  I  —  Business  Management 

This  track  is  designed  to  train 
students  in  the  functions  of  today's 
profit  and  nonprofit  organizations. 
The  program  provides  a  well- 
balanced  preparation  for  a  wide 
variety  of  careers,  including  general 
administration,  personnel  ad- 
ministration, commercial  banking, 
investments  and  portfolio  manage- 
ment, security  analysis,  corporate 
financial  management,  general 
marketing,  sales,  product  manage- 
ment, advertising,  retail  merchandis- 
ing, and  production  and  manufactur- 
ing management. 

Required  courses  are  Business 
10-11,  23,  28-29,  38-39,  40,  and  41, 
and  Mathematics  13.  Business  32,  43, 
or  44  may  be  substituted  for  Business 
29,  and  Business  33  may  be 
substituted  for  Business  39.  Accoun- 
ting 10  may  be  substituted  for 
Business  10  if  the  student  is  transferr- 
ing into  the  Business  Administration 
major,  but  duplicate  credit  will  not  be 
granted. 

Majors  are  also  urged  to  enroll  in 
Economics  10  and  11,  Business  35 
and  36,  Mathematics  12,  and  Com- 
puter Science  15.  Majors  also  are  en- 
couraged to  take  a  foreign  language. 
The  additional  elective  offerings  are 
intended  to  add  depth  in  the  areas  of 
finance,  marketing,  and  manage- 
ment. 

Track  II  —  Management  Science 

This  track  is  designed  to  train 
students  in  the  quantitative  aspects  of 
business  administration.  It  provides 
excellent  undergraduate  preparation 


27 


for  graduate  study  in  management 
science,  operations  research,  and 
quantitative  business  administration. 
The  program  also  provides  a  solid 
preparation  for  careers  in  production 
control,  systems  analysis,  research, 
forecasting,  industrial  and  technical 
sales  as  well  as  any  of  the  functional 
areas  of  business  where  quantitative 
training  would  be  an  added  qualifica- 
tion. 

Required  courses  are  Business 
10-11,  23,  38-39,  46;  Economics  10, 
11,  41;  Mathematics  18-19,  12,  13, 
38,  and  Computer  Science  15.  Ac- 
counting 10  may  be  substituted  for 
Business  10  if  the  student  is  transferr- 
ing into  the  business  administration 
major. 

In  addition,  the  following  are 
strongly  recommended:  Business  41, 
and  Mathematics  14  and  37.  Also, 
depending  upon  the  interest  of  the 
students,  the  following  combinations 
of  courses  are  recommended:  either 
Mathematics  31  and  Computer 
Science  26,  or  Business  28  and 
Business  40,  or  Business  33  and 
Economics  30  and  31. 

10-11     MANAGERIAL  ACCOUNTING 

The  business  firm  is  a  decision-making  in- 
stitution adapting  to  a  constantly  chang- 
ing environment.  Future  administrators 
and  managers  are  introduced  to  their 
stewardship  responsibilities  by  use  of  ac- 
counting and  statistical  techniques  as 
tools  in  planning  and  controlling  the 
organization. 

23      QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS  ANALYSIS 
Techniques  of  quantitative  analysis  useful 
in  making  business  decisions.  Topics  in- 
clude: decision  theory,  inventory  models, 
network  models,  queuing,  forecasting, 
and  utility.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  13 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

28-29     MARKETING  MANAGEMENT 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of 
the  distribution  activities  of  the  firm,  and 
an  analysis  and  evaluation  of  the 
marketing  system,  its  institutions,  and 
processes.  Application  of  marketing  prin- 
ciples and  the  development  of  strategies 
for  specific  marketing  problems. 
Product,  channel  flow,  promotion,  and 
pricing  strategies  explored.  Readings, 
cases,  and  games. 

28 


32  ADVERTISING 

Nature,  scope,  methods,  and  effects  of 
promotion.  Techniques  of  analysis  and 
control  in  the  use  of  advertising  and 
publicity  as  tools  in  developing  business 
strategy. 

33  INVESTMENTS 

An  introduction  to  the  financial  sector  of 
the  economy  and  the  structure  and  func- 
tions of  financial  markets  and  the  agen- 
cies involved;  brokerage  houses  and  stock 
exchanges;  the  various  types  of  in- 
vestments available.  Techniques  used  to 
evaluate  financial  securities.  Also  covered 
are  recent  developments  in  investment 
theory. 

34  INSURANCE 

Analysis  of  the  major  insurance  methods 
of  overcoming  risk,  including  life,  acci- 
dent, health,  marine,  and  social  in- 
surance. Fidelity  and  surety  bonds.  Com- 
mercial and  government  plans. 

35  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  I 

Lectures  and  analysis  of  cases  on  the 
nature,  sources,  and  fundamentals  of  the 
law  in  general,  and  particularly  as  relating 
to  contracts,  agency,  and  negotiable  in- 
struments. Open  only  to  juniors  and 
seniors. 

36  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  II 

Lectures  on  the  fundamentals  and  history 
of  the  law  relating  to  legal  association, 
real  property,  wills,  and  estates.  Open  on- 
ly to  juniors  and  seniors. 

38-39     FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT 

Financial  planning,  analysis,  and  control 
in  corporations.  Development  and  ap- 
plication of  financial  principles.  Financial 
market,  profit  planning,  ratio  analysis, 
working  capital  management,  interest 
rates  and  capital  budgeting,  financial  and 
operating  leverage,  cost  of  capital,  valua- 
tion, dividend  policy,  long-and  short-term 
financing,  leases,  mergers,  and  acquisi- 
tions. Prerequisite:  Business  II  or  Ac- 
counting 20,  and  Business  23. 

40  MANAGEMENT  CONCEPTS 
Structural  characteristics  and  functional 
relationships  of  a  business  organization  as 
well  as  the  problems  encountered  in  coor- 
dinating the  internal  resources  of  a  firm. 
Emphasis  on  administrative  efficiency 
and  procedures. 

41  BUSINESS  POLICIES 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of 
business  operations;  setting  of  goals; 
coordination  of  resources,  development 
of  policies.  Analysis  of  strategic  decisions 
encompassing  all  areas  of  a  business,  and 


the  use  and  analysis  of  control  measures. 
Emphasis  on  both  the  internal  relation- 
ship of  various  elements  of  production, 
finance,  marketing,  and  personnel,  and 
the  relationship  of  the  business  entity  to 
external  stimuli.  Readings,  cases,  and 
games.  Prerequisites:  Business  23,  28-29, 
28-39,  and  40,  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Seniors  only. 

42  PERSONNEL  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  managerial 
problems  of  recruiting,  selecting,  train- 
ing, and  retraining  the  human  resources 
of  the  firm.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  in- 
terrelationship of  personnel  policies  with 
management  objectives  and  philosophies 
in  such  areas  as  fringe  benefits,  wage  and 
salary  policies,  union  activities,  and 
health  and  safety. 

43  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  I 
Planning,  organization,  and  control  of 
the  retailing  firm.  Competitive  strategy 
development  through  store  location, 
layout,  administration  organization,  buy- 
ing, and  pricing.  Cases,  reading,  and 
papers.  Alternate  years. 

44  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  II 

Inventory  control,  retail  sales,  promo- 
tion, and  financial  analysis  of  the  enter- 
prise. Survey  of  current  issues  and 
government,  social  and  economic  forces 
of  concern  to  the  retailer.  Retailing  prin- 
ciples applied  to  specific  management 
situations  through  cases,  games,  and 
reading.  Prerequisite:  Business  43  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  A  Iternate  years. 

45  MARKETING  RESEARCH 

This  is  a  study  of  the  principles  and  prac- 
tices of  Marketing  Research.  The  focus  is 
on  the  development  and  application  of 
Marketing  Research  Studies.  Topics 
covered  include  selection  of  a  research 
design,  project  planning  and  scheduling, 
data  specification  and  gathering,  quan- 
titative methods  to  analyze  data,  inter- 
pretation of  data,  and  research  report 
writing.  Readings,  cases,  and  research 
project.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  13, 
Business  28,  or  consent  of  instructor. 

46  PRODUCTION  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  planning,  organiz- 
ing, and  controlling  of  operations  in  a 
productive  facility.  The  course  also  incor- 
porates quantitative  techniques  used  in 
production-  and  operations-management 
applications.  Topics  include:  capacity  and 
layout  planning,  facility  locations,  job 
design  and  work  measurement,  produc- 
tion planning  and  scheduling,  inventory 
and  quality  control. 


47  CREATIVE  ADVERTISING 

A  workshop  concerned  with  theme,  copy, 
and  effective  presentation  of  adver- 
tisements for  print  media,  radio,  and 
direct  mail.  Primarily  an  exploration  of 
creativity  through  analysis  of  works  of  ar- 
tists and  writers  with  application  to  prac- 
tical advertising,  and  tailored  to  the  in- 
terests of  individual  students.  May  term. 

48  SALES  SEMINAR 

The  role  of  selling  in  the  economy.  The 
art  of  creative  selling;  application  of 
theories  from  the  behavioral  sciences  to 
selling  through  the  analysis  of  sales  situa- 
tions and  techniques.  Alternate  years. 

49  MANAGING  THE  SMALL  BUSINESS 
How  the  potential  businessman  proceeds 
in  establishing,  operating,  and  profiting 
from  a  small  business  operation.  Con- 
sidered and  analyzed  are  such  aspects  as 
marketing,  managing,  financing,  pro- 
moting, insuring,  establishing,  develop- 
ing, and  staffing  the  small  retail, 
wholesale  service,  and  manufacturing 
firm.  May  term. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typical  examples  are  marketing  analysis 
for  a  paper  products  firm,  planning  a 
branch  store,  hotel  and  real  estate 
management,  banking  and  insurance. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Examples  of  recent  studies  are:  the 
economic  impact  of  a  college  on  a  com- 
munity; a  marketing  strategy  for  a  local 
firm  entering  the  consumer  market. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 
A  recent  project  was  a  study  of  the  evolu- 
tion of  anti-trust  legislation  in  the  United 
States. 


CHEMISTRY 

Professors:  Hummer,  Radspinner 

Associate  Professor:  Franz 

(Chairman) 

Part-time  Instructor:  Baggett 

A  major  in  chemistry  consists  of 
Chemistry  10-11,  20-21 ,  30-3 1 ,  32  and 
33;  Astronomy/Physics  25-26; 
Mathematics  18,  19  and  one  of  the 
following  courses:  Mathematics  13, 
20,  21,  32,  or  Computer  Science  15. 
Mathematics  20  and  21  and  French  or 
German  are  strongly  recommended 


for  students  planning  on  graduate 
study  in  chemistry.  To  be  certified  in 
secondary  education,  chemistry  ma- 
jors must  also  pass  two  biology 
courses  numbered  10  or  higher. 

8        CHEMICAL  PRINCIPLES 

An  introduction  to  the  principles  of  in- 
organic chemistry.  Topics  include  atomic 
and  molecular  structure,  nomenclature, 
gases,  solution,  acids  and  bases,  kinetics, 
equilibrium,  oxidation-reduction,  and 
stoichiometry.  The  approach  is  primarily 
descriptive,  with  illustrations  drawn  most- 
ly from  the  health  sciences.  Along  with 
Chemistry  15,  this  course  is  designed  for 
those  students  who  require  only  two 
semesters  of  chemistry,  and  is  not  intend- 
ed for  students  planning  to  enroll  in 
Chemistry  courses  numbered  20  or  above. 
Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour  discussion, 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  period 
each  week.  Prerequisite:  high  school 
algebra  or  Math  5.  Not  open  for  credit  lo 
students  who  have  received  credit  for 
Chemistry  10. 

10  GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  I 

A  quantitative  introduction  to  the  con- 
cepts and  models  of  chemistry.  Topics  in- 
clude stoichiometry,  atomic  and 
molecular  structure,  nomenclature,  bon- 
ding, thermochemistry,  gases,  solutions, 
and  chemical  reactions.  The  laboratory 
introduces  the  student  to  methods  of 
separation,  purification  and  identification 
of  compounds  according  to  their  physical 
properties.  This  course  is  designed  for 
students  who  plan  to  major  in  one  of  the 
sciences.  Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour 
discussion  and  one  three- hour  laboratory 
period  each  week.  Prerequisite:  placement 
in  Chemistry  10  is  determined  in  part  by  a 
student's  score  on  the  mathematics  place- 
men! examination.  Not  open  for  credit  to 
students  who  have  received  credit  for 
Chemistry  8,  except  by  permission  of  the 
Chemistry  Department. 

1 1  GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  II 

A  continuation  of  Chemistry  10,  with  em- 
phasis placed  on  the  foundations  of 
analytical,  inorganic  and  physical 
chemistry.  Topics  include  kinetics, 
general  and  ionic  equilibria,  acid-base 
theory,  electrochemistry,  ther- 
modynamics, nuclear  chemistry,  coor- 
dination chemistry,  and  descriptive  in- 
organic chemistry  of  selected  elements. 
The  laboratory  treats  aspects  of  quan- 
titative and  qualitative  inorganic  analysis. 
Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour  discussion, 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  period 
each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10,  or 
consent  of  the  Chemistry  Department. 


15      BRIEF  ORGANIC 
CHEMISTRY 

A  descriptive  study  of  the  compounds  of 
carbon.  This  course  will  illustrate  the 
principles  of  organic  chemistry  with 
material  relevant  to  students  in  medical 
technology,  biology,  nursing,  forestry, 
education  and  the  humanities.  Topics  in- 
clude nomenclature,  alkanes,  arenes, 
functional  derivatives,  amino  acids  and 
proteins,  carbohydrates  and  other 
naturally  occurring  compounds.  This 
course  is  designed  for  students  who  re- 
quire only  one  semester  of  organic 
chemistry.  Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour 
discussion,  and  one  four-hour  laboratory 
period  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  8  or  10.  Not  open  for  credit  to 
students  who  have  received  credit  for 
Chemistry  20. 

20-21     ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  systematic  study  of  the  compounds  of 
carbon,  including  both  aliphatic  and 
aromatic  series.  The  laboratory  work  in- 
troduces the  student  to  simple  fundamen- 
tal methods  of  organic  synthesis,  isola- 
tion, and  analysis.  Three  hours  lecture 
and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each 
week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  11. 

26      CLINICAL  ANALYSIS 

A  presentation  of  selected  wet-chemical 
and  instrumental  methods  of  quantitative 
analysis  with  an  orientation  toward 
clinical  applicatons  in  medical 
technology.  Topics  include:  general 
methods  and  calculations;  solutions;  titra- 
tions; photometric  analyses  (colorimetric, 
atomic  absorption,  flame  emission);  elec- 
trochemical methods  (ion-selective  elec- 
trodes, coulometry),  automation.  Lec- 
ture, recitation,  and  laboratory  daily. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10-11  or  consent 
of  instructor.  May  not  be  taken  for  credit 
following  Chemistry  32.  May  term  only. 

30-31     PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  principles  of 
theoretical  chemistry  and  their  applica- 
tions. The  laboratory  work  includes 
techniques  in  physiochemical 
measurements.  Three  hours  lecture  and 
one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each 
week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  11, 
Mathematics  19,  and  one  year  of  physics 
or-consent  of  instructor. 

32      ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  methods  of 
gravimetric,  volumetric,  and  elementary 
instrumental  analysis  together  with  prac- 
tice in  laboratory  techniques  and  calcula- 
tions of  these  methods.  Two  hours  lecture 
and  two  three-hour  laboratory  periods 
each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  1 1  or 
consent  of  instructor. 


29 


33      ADVANCED  INORGANIC 
CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  modern  theories  of  atomic  and 
molecular  structure  and  their  relationship 
to  the  chemistry  of  selected  elements  and 
their  compounds.  Three  hours  lecture  and 
one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each 
week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  30, 
Mathematics  19,  and  one  year  of  physics 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

39  INTRODUCTION  TO  QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

After  presenting  the  origin,  basic  con- 
cepts, and  formulation  of  quantum 
mechanics  with  emphasis  on  its  physical 
meaning,  the  free  particle,  simple  har- 
monic oscillator,  and  central-force 
problems  will  be  investigated.  Both  time- 
independent  and  time-dependent  pertur- 
bation theory  will  be  covered.  The  elegant 
operator  formalism  of  quantum 
mechanics  will  conclude  the  course.  Four 
hours  of  lecture  and  recitation.  Prere- 
quisites: Mathematics  21,  either 
Chemistry  31  or  Astronomy  and  Physics 
26,  and  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed 
as  Astronomy  and  Physics  48. 

40  ADVANCED  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 
Selected  topics,  which  may  include 
mechanisms  of  organic  reactions,  syn- 
thesis, detailed  structure  and  chemistry  of 
natural  products,  polynuclear  hydrocar- 
bons, and  aromatic  heterocyclics.  Three 
hours  lecture.  Prerequisite:  Chemist  r\  2 1 

41  QUALITATIVE  ORGANIC  ANALYSIS 
Theory  and  application  of  the  systematic 
identification  of  pure  organic  compounds 
and  mixtures.  Two  hours  lecture  and  two 
three-hour  laboratory  periods  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  21. 

43  ADVANCED  ANALYTICAL 
CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  advanced  analytical  methods 
with  emphasis  on  chromatographic,  elec- 
trochemical, and  spectroscopic  methods 
of  instrumental  analysis.  Three  hours  lec- 
ture and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period 
each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  31 
and  32  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of 
carbohydrates,  lipids,  amino  acids,  pro- 
teins, and  nucleic  acids;  integration  of 
metabolism;  and  biochemical  control 
mechanisms,  including  allosteric  control, 
induction,  repression,  as  well  as  the 
various  types  of  inhibitive  control 
mechanisms.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  21 
or  15  or  consent  of  instructor.  Cross- 
listed  as  Biology  44. 


45  SPECTROSCOPY  AND  MOLECULAR 
STRUCTURE 

Theory  and  practice  of  molecular  struc- 
ture determination  by  spectroscopic 
methods.  Three  hours  lecture.  Pre-  or  co- 
requisites:  Chemistry  31,  33,  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

48      CHEMISTRY  COLLOQUIUM 

A  seminar  in  which  faculty,  students,  and 
invited  professional  chemists  discuss  their 
own  research  activities  or  those  of  others 
which  have  appeared  in  recent  chemical 
literature.  Prerequisite:  Three  semesters 
of  non-credit  Chemistry  Colloquium 
taken  during  the  junior  and  senior  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  under 
supervision  in  an  industrial  laboratory 
and  submit  a  written  report  on  his  pro- 
ject. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a 
laboratory  research  project  and  will  write 
a  thesis  on  his  work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 
The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on 
laboratory  research  project  with  emphasis 
being  on  the  student's  showing  initiative 
and  making  a  scholarly  contribution.  A 
thesis  will  be  written. 


CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 


Assistant  Professor:  Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This  major  is  designed  to  acquaint 
students  with  the  American  criminal- 
justice  system  and  to  provide  an 
understanding  of  the  social 
psychological,  philosophical,  and 
political  contexts  within  which  the 
system  of  criminal  justice  functions. 
Its  aim  is  to  develop  students'  in- 
tellectual and  scientific  skills  in  rais- 
ing and  attempting  to  answer  impor- 
tant questions  about  the  system  of 
justice  and  its  place  in  society.  The 
program  offers  opportunity  for  in- 


tern experience  in  the  field,  and 
prepares  for  careers  in  the  areas  of 
law  enforcement,  probation  and 
parole,  prisons,  and  treatment  ser- 
vices. 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I 
prepares  for  careers  in  law  enforce- 
ment. Track  II  prepares  for  careers  in 
corrections. 


Track  I  -  Law  Enforcement.  The 

major     consists     of     10    courses, 
distributed  as  follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal 
justice  [three  courses] 
Introduction  to  the  Criminal 
Justice  System  [Sociology  and 
Anthropology  15] 
Introduction  to  Law  Enforce- 
ment [Sociology  and  Anthro- 
pology 23] 

The  American  Prison  System 
[Sociology  and  Anthropology  39] 

B.  Courses  in  the  social, 
psychological,  philosophical,  and 
political  context  of  the  justice 
system  [seven  courses] 
Criminology  [Sociology  and  An- 
thropology 30]  and  either 
Juvenile  Delinquency  (Sociology 
and  Anthropology  21)  or  Racial 
and  Cultural  Minorities  (Soci- 
ology and  Anthropology  34)  (two 
courses) 

Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychol- 
ogy 16)  (one  course) 
America  as  a  Civilization 
(American  Studies  10).  Afro- 
American  History  (History  28)  or 
United  States  Social  and  Intellec- 
tual History  Since  1877  (History 
43)  (one  course) 

Law  and  Society  (Political 
Science  35)  and  Civil  Rights  and 
Liberties  (Political  Science  31) 
(two  courses) 

Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal 
Justice  (Philosophy  18)  (one 
course) 

C.  Internship  or  practicum  in  law 
enforcement.  (Recommended  but 
not  required  for  the  major) 


30 


Track  II  -  Corrections.  The  major 
consists  of  10  courses,  distributed  as 
follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal 
justice  (three  courses) 
Introduction     to     the    Criminal 
Justice    System    (Sociology    and 
Anthropology  15) 

The  American  Prison  System 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 
Introduction  to  Social  Work 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  42) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social, 
psychological,  philosophical,  and 
political  context  of  the  justice 
system  (seven  courses) 
Criminology  (Sociology  and  An- 
thropology 30)  and  either 
Juvenile  Delinquency  (Sociology 
and  Anthropology  21)  or  Racial 
and  Cultural  Minorities  (Soci- 
ology and  Anthropology  34  (two 
courses) 

Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychol- 
ogy 16)  (one  course) 
America  as  a  Civilization 
(American  Studies  10.  Afro- 
American  History  (History  28)  or 
United  States  Social  and  Intellec- 
tual History  Since  1877  (History 
43)  (one  course) 

Law  and  Society  (Political 
Science  35)  and  Civil  Rights  and 
Liberties  (Political  Science  31) 
(two  courses) 

Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal 
Justice  (Philosophy  18)  (one 
course) 

C.  Internship  or  practicum  in  cor- 
rections. (Recommended  but  not 
required  for  the  major.  Prere- 
quisites: Mathematics  13, 
Psychology  31,  and  Psychology 
39.  These  prerequisites  may  be 
waived  in  certain  cases  by  the 
coordination  committee. 

Majors  should  seek  advice  concern- 
ing course  selection  from  members  of 
the  coordinating  committee  and 
should  note  course  prerequisites  in 
planning  their  programs. 


ECONOMICS 


Professors:  Opdahl, 
Rabold  (Chairman) 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  is 
designed  for  the  student  whose 
primary  interest  lies  in  business 
management;  Track  II  is  designed  for 
students  with  an  interest  in  graduate 
work,  teaching,  government  or  non- 
business careers,  and  for  those  with 
less  well-defined  interests. 

Track  I  -  Managerial  Economics  re- 
quires: Economics  10,  11,  32,  and  41; 
Business  10-11  or  Accounting  10  and 
20;  Business  38  and  39,  plus  two  elec- 
tives  from  Economics  20,  31,  35,  37, 
43,  and  Business  40.  Business  33,  In- 
vestments, may  be  substituted  for 
Business  39,  Financial  Management 
II. 

Track  II  —  Political  Economy  re- 
quires: Economics  10,  11,  30,  31,  40, 
and  five  electives  of  which  three  must 
be  in  economics  and  two  in  political 
science,  all  selected  with  the  advice 
and  consent  of  the  student's  adviser 
or  department  chairman.  Economics 
41,  Managerial  Economics,  may  be 
substituted  for  Economics  30,  In- 
termediate Microeconomics. 

In  addition,  the  following  courses 
are  recommended:  all  majors  — 
Math  13  and  Business  23;  majors 
planning  graduate  work  —  Math 
12-18;  Track  II  majors  —  Business 
10-11. 

2        CONSUMER  ECONOMICS 

A  course  in  "family"  or  "practical" 
economics,  designed  to  teach  students 
how  they  and  their  families  can  be  in- 
telligent consumers:  that  is,  how  they  can 
spend,  save,  and  borrow  so  as  to  max- 
imize the  value  they  receive  for  the  income 
they  have.  Treats  subjects  such  as  in- 
telligent shopping;  the  uses  and  abuses  of 
credit;  investing  savings;  buying  in- 
surance, automobiles,  and  houses; 
medical  care  costs;  estates  and  wills,  etc. 
A  Iternale  years. 

10      PRINCIPLES  OF  POLITICAL 
ECONOMY  I 

Macroeconomics.  Deals  with  problems  of 
the  economic  system  as  a  whole.  What  in- 


fluences the  level  of  national  income  and 
employment?  What  is  inflation  and  why 
do  we  have  it?  What  is  the  role  of  govern- 
ment in  a  modern  capitalistic  system? 
How  does  business  organize  to  produce 
the  goods  and  services  we  demand?  How 
are  the  American  financial  and  banking 
system  organized?  What  is  the  nature  of 
American  unionism?  What  are  the 
elements  of  government  finance  and  fiscal 
policy? 

1 1      PRINCIPLES  OF  POLITICAL 
ECONOMY  II 

This  course  focuses  upon  microeconomics 
and  selected  current  economic  problems. 
It  deals  with  the  relatively  small  units  of 
the  economy  such  as  the  firm  and  the 
family.  Analyzes  demand  and  supply. 
Discusses  how  business  firms  decide  what 
and  how  much  to  produce  and  how  goods 
and  services  are  priced  in  different  types 
of  markets.  Also  considers  such  problems 
as  economic  growth,  international  trade, 
poverty,  discrimination,  ecology,  and 
alternative  economic  systems. 

20      MONEY  AND  BANKING 

Covers  business  fluctuations  and 
monetary  and  fiscal  policy;  the  financial 
organization  of  society;  the  banking 
system;  credit  institutions;  capital 
markets,  and  international  financial  rela- 
tions. Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  II. 
A  Iternale  years. 

22  ECONOMIC  SYSTEMS  OF  THE  WEST 
(CAPITALISM  AND  SOCIALISM) 

A  comparative  analysis  of  the  underlying 
ideologies,  the  basic  institutions,  and  the 
performance  of  selected  economic 
systems  extrant  in  the  West.  Alternate 
years. 

23  SOVIET-TYPE  ECONOMICS 

An  analysis  of  the  ideologies,  institutions, 
and  performance  of  Soviet-type 
economies,  with  emphasis  upon  Marxian 
theory  and  the  economy  of  the  U.S.S.R.; 
comparison  of  selected  Eastern  European 
and  Chinese  approaches  to  communism. 
A  Iternale  years. 

24  URBAN  PROBLEMS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  to  the 
study  of  significant  social,  political,  and 
economic  problems  associated  with  ur- 
banization, including  poverty,  employ- 
ment, education,  crime,  health,  housing, 
land  use  and  the  environment,  transporta- 
tion, and  public  finance.  Analysis  of  solu- 
tions offered.  Alternate  years. 

25  ENVIRONMENTAL  ECONOMICS 

A  study  of  the  relationship  between  en- 
vironmental decay  and  economic  growth, 


31 


with  particular  reference  to  failures  of  the 
price  and  property-rights  systems;  ap- 
plication of  cost/benefit  analysis, 
measures  aimed  at  the  creation  of  an 
ecologically  viable  economy.  Alternate 
years. 

30  INTERMEDIATE 
MICROECONOMICS 

An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary 
theory  regarding  consumer  demand,  pro- 
duction costs  and  theory,  profit  max- 
imization, market  structures,  and  the 
determinants  of  returns  to  the  factors  of 
production.  Prerequisite:  Economies  10 
and  II. 

31  INTERMEDIATE 
MACROECONOMICS 

An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary 
theory  and  practice  with  regard  to 
business  fluctuations,  national  income  ac- 
counting, the  determination  of  income 
and  employment  levels,  and  the  use  of 
monetary  and  fiscal  policy.  Prerequisite: 
Economics  10  and  II. 

32  GOVERNMENT  AND  THE 
ECONOMY 

An  analytical  survey  of  government's  ef- 
forts to  maintain  competition  through  an- 
titrust legislation;  to  supervise  acceptable 
cases  of  private  monopoly  through 
public-utility  regulation  and  via  means  of 
regulatory  commissions,  and  to  en- 
courage or  restrain  various  types  of 
private  economic  activities.  Alternate 
years.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  1 1 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

35      LABOR  PROBLEMS 

The  history  of  organized  labor  in  the 
United  States,  including  the  structure  of 
unions,  employers'  opposition  to  unions, 
the  role  of  government  in  labor- 
management  relations,  the  economic  im- 
pact of  unions.  Alternate  years. 

37      PUBLIC  FINANCE 

An  analysis  of  the  fiscal  economics  of  the 
public  sector,  including  the  development, 
concepts,  and  theories  of  public  expen- 
ditures, taxation,  and  debt  at  all  levels  of 
American  government.  Includes  also  the 
use  of  fiscal  policy  as  an  economic  control 
device.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  1 1 
or  consent  of  instructor. 


4(1 


HISTORY  OF  ECONOMIC  THOUGHT 
A  discussion  of  the  origins,  development, 
and  significance  of  the  economic  ideas 
embodied  in  the  works  of  Smith,  Marx, 
Schumpeter,  Keynes,  and  others.  Prere- 
quisite: Economics  10  and  1 1  or  consent 
of  instructor. 


41      MANAGERIAL  ECONOMICS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  and 
methodology  to  the  solution  of  business 
problems.  Subjects  include:  optimizing 
techniques,  risk  analysis,  demand  theory, 
production  theory,  cost  theory,  linear 
programming,  capital  budgeting,  market 
structures,  and  the  theory  of  pricing. 
Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  II. 

43      INTERNATIONAL  TRADE 

A  study  of  the  principles,  theories, 
development,  and  policies  concerning  in- 
ternational economic  relations,  with  par- 
ticular reference  to  the  United  States. 
Subjects  covered  include:  U.S.  commer- 
cial policy  and  its  development,  interna- 
tional trade  theory,  tariffs  and  other  pro- 
tectionist devices,  international  monetary 
system  and  its  problems,  balance  of 
payments  issues.  Alternate  years.  Prere- 
quisite: Economics  10  and  II. 

45      DEVELOPMENT  OF 

UNDERDEVELOPED  NATIONS 
A  study  of  the  theories  and  problems  of 
capital  accumulation,  allocation  of 
resources,  technological  development, 
growth,  planning  techniques,  and  institu- 
tions and  international  relations  en- 
countered by  the  developing  nations. 
Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typically  off  campus  in  business,  bank- 
ing, or  government,  supervised  by  assign- 
ed employee  of  sponsoring  organization. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Superior  students  may  select  independent 
study  in  various  courses,  particularly  in 
preparation  for  graduate  school. 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 


EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Keesbury 

(Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Conrad 

Lycoming  believes  that  the  liberal  arts 
provide  the  best  preparation  for 
future  teachers,  thus  all  education 
students  complete  a  liberal-arts  major 
in   addition   to  the  certification   re- 


quirements. Students  can  be  certified 
in  elementary  education  or  one  or 
more  of  the  following  secondary 
areas:  biology,  chemistry,  English, 
French,  general  science  (with  biology 
or  astronomy/physics  tracks),  Ger- 
man, mathematics,  physics,  social 
studies,  and  Spanish.  All  teacher- 
education  programs  are  approved  by 
the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education,  and  Pennsylvania  cer- 
fificates  are  recognized  in  most  other 
states  whether  through  reciprocal 
agreements  or  by  transcript  evalua- 
tion. 

Education  20  and  Psychology  38 
are  prerequisites  to  all  other  offerings 
in  the  Department  of  Education. 
Education  20  should  be  taken  at  least 
two  semesters  before  the  professional 
semester. 

Students  seeking  elementary  cer- 
tification must  complete  Mathematics 
7,  Education  40,  41,  42,  and  43  as 
prerequisites  to  the  professional 
semester  (Education  45,  47,  and  48). 
Students  interested  in  the  teacher- 
education  program  should  consult 
with  a  member  of  the  department  no 
later  than  the  first  semester  of  the 
sophomore  year.  Application  for  the 
professional  semester  must  be  made 
before  October  1  of  the  junior  year. 
The  Department  of  Education  will 
admit  to  the  professional  semester 
those  applicants  who  have  a 
minimum  cumulative  grade  point 
average  of  2.00,  are  in  good  academic 
standing,  have  satisfactorily  com- 
pleted the  junior  year  participation 
requirements  (secondary  students  on- 
ly), have  paid  the  student  teaching 
fee,  and  have  received  a  positive 
recommendation.  The  recommenda- 
tion will  be  based  upon:  (a)  recom- 
mendations from  each  student's  ma- 
jor department;  (b)  recommendations 
from  two  additional  faculty  outside 
the  Department  of  Education;  (c)  a 
screening  interview  conducted  by  the 
department,  and  (d)  a  writing  sample 
from  each  student  applicant.  Major 
departments  have  different  criteria 
for  their  recommendations. 
Therefore,    students   should   consult 


32 


with  the  chairman  of  their  major 
department  about  those  requirements 
as  soon  as  they  begin  to  study  for  cer- 
tification. 


20      INTRODUCTION  TO  THE 
STUDY  OF  EDUCATION 

A  study  of  teaching  as  a  profession  with 
emphasis  on  the  economic,  social, 
political,  and  religious  conditions  which 
influence  American  schools  and  teachers. 
Consideration  is  given  to  the  school  en- 
vironment, the  curriculum,  and  the 
children  with  the  intention  that  the 
students  will  examine  more  rationally 
their  "own  motives  for  entering  the  profes- 
sion. Prerequisite:  Sophomore  standing 
or  consent  of  the  instructor. 


32  INSTRUCTIONAL  MEDIA 
AND  COMMUNICATIONS 
A  study  of  the  value,  design,  construc- 
tion, and  application  of  the  visual  and 
auditory  aids  to  learning.  Practical  ex- 
perience in  the  handling  of  audio-visual 
equipment  and  materials  is  provided.  Ap- 
plication of  audio-visual  techniques.  Ap- 
plication of  the  visual  and  auditory  aids  to 
learning.  Students  will  plan  and  carry  out 
actual  teaching  assignments  utilizing 
various  A-V  devices. 


39      PUBLIC  SCHOOL  CURRICULUM 

An  examination  of  the  various  curricula 
of  the  public  schools  and  their  relation- 
ships to  current  practices.  Special  atten- 
tion will  be  given  to  the  meaning  and 
nature  of  the  curriculum,  the  desirable 
outcomes  of  the  curriculum,  conflicting 
and  variant  conceptions  of  curricular  con- 
tent, modern  techniques  of  curricular 
construction,  criteria  for  the  evaluation  of 
curricula,  the  curriculum  as  a  teaching  in- 
strument. Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon 
the  curriculum  work  within  the  teaching 
field  of  each  individual. 


40  TEACHING  LANGUAGE  ARTS  AND 
CHILDREN'S  LITERATURE  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
A  course  designed  to  consider  the  prin- 
cipal means  of  communication,  oral  and 
written,  including  both  practical  and 
creative  uses.  Attention  will  be  given  to 
listening,  speaking,  written  expression, 
linguistics  and  grammer,  spelling,  and 
handwriting.  Stress  will  be  placed  upon 
the  interrelatedness  of  the  language  arts. 
Children's  literature  will  be  explored  as  a 
vehicle  for  developing  creative 
characteristics  in  children  and  for  ensur- 


ing an  appreciation  of  the  creative  writing 
of  others.  Observation  and  participation 
in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary 
schools.  Prerequisites:  Education  20  and 
Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instruc- 
tor. 

41  TEACHING  THE  SOCIAL  STUDIES 
IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
Studies  and  experiences  to  develop  a  basic 
understanding  of  the  structure,  concepts, 
and  processes  of  anthropology, 
economics,  geography,  history,  political 
science,  and  sociology  as  they  relate  to  the 
elementary  school  social-science  cur- 
riculum. Practical  applications, 
demonstrations  of  methods,  and  the 
development  of  integrated  teaching  units 
using  tests,  reference  books,  films,  and 
other  teaching  materials.  Observation  and 
participation  in  Greater  Williamsport 
elementary  shcools.  Prerequisites:  Educa- 
tion 20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of 
the  instructor. 

42  TEACHING  SCIENCE  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

Science  methods  and  materials  inter- 
preting children's  science  experiences  and 
guiding  the  development  of  their  scientific 
concepts.  A  study  of  the  science  content 
of  the  curriculum,  its  material,  and  use. 
Observation  and  participation  in  Greater 
Williamsport  elementary  schools.  Prere- 
quisites: Education  20  and  Psychology  38 
or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

43  TEACHING  READING  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  basic  course  in  the  philosophy  and  ra- 
tionale for  the  implementation  of  an 
elementary  developmental-reading  pro- 
gram from  kindergarten  through  sixth 
grade.  Emphasis  is  upon  designing  a 
reading  instructional  program  which 
reflects  the  nature  of  the  learning  process 
and  recognizes  principles  of  child 
development  through  examination  of  the 
principles,  problems,  methods,  and 
materials  used  in  elementary  reading  pro- 
grams. Observation  and  participation  in 
Greater  Williamsport  elementary  schools. 
Prerequisites:  Psychology  38,  Education 
20,  40,  41,  and  42,  or  consent  of  the  in- 
structor. 

45      METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 
The  course  emphasizes  the  relationship 
between     the    theoretical    studies     of 
physical,  social,  and  cognitive  develop- 
ment and  the  elementary  classroom  en- 
vironment. Particular  consideration  will 
be   given    to    the   appropriate   age   and 
developmental  level  of  the  students  with 


an  emphasis  upon  selection  and  utiliza- 
tion of  methods  in  all  the  elementary  sub- 
ject areas,  including  art  and  music. 
Specific  attention  will  be  given  to  the 
development  of  strategies  for  structuring 
lesson  plans,  for  maintaining  classroom 
control,  and  for  overall  classroom 
management.  Direct  application  will  be 
made  to  the  individual  student-teaching 
experience.  Prerequisites:  Math  7,  Educa- 
tion 40,  41,  42,  and  43,  or  consent  of  the 
instructor. 


46  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE 
SECONDARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

A  study  of  materials,  methods,  and 
techniques  of  teaching  with  emphasis  on 
the  student's  major.  Stress  is  placed  on 
the  selection  and  utilization  of  visual  and 
auditory  aids  to  learning.  Students  will 
teach  demonstration  lessons  in  the 
presence  of  the  instructor  and  the 
members  of  the  class  and  will  observe 
superior  teachers  in  Greater  Williamsport 
secondary  schools.  Prerequisites:  Educa- 
tion 20,  Psychology  38,  and  the  participa- 
tion experience. 

47  PROBLEMS  IN  CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN  EDUCATION  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 
Seminar  in  the  issues,  problems,  and 
challenges  encountered  by  teachers  in  the 
American  public  schools,  especially  those 
related  to  the  student-teaching  experience. 

48  STUDENT  TEACHING  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 
Two    units.     Exceeds    state-mandated 
minimum    requirements.    Professional 
laboratory  experience  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  a  selected  cooperating  teacher  in  a 
public    elementary    school    in    Greater 
Williamsport.     Organizes     learning     ex- 
periences. Actual  classroom  experience.* 

49  STUDENT  TEACHING  IN  THE 
SECONDARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 
Two    units.     Exceeds    state-mandated 
minimum    requirements.    Professional 
laboratory  experience  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  a  selected  cooperating  teacher  in  a 
public    secondary    school    in    Greater 
Williamsport.     Organized     learning    ex- 
perience. Emphasis  on  actual  classroom 
experience,  responsibility  in  the  guidance 
program,  and  out-of-class  activities.* 

•Student  teachers  are  required  to  follow 
the  calendar  of  the  school  district  to 
which  they  are  assigned. 


33 


ENGLISH 


Professor:  Van  Marter 

Associate  Professors:  Ford,  Jensen 

(Chairman),  Madden,  Rife 
Assistant  Professors:  Moses,  F.  Wild 

A  major  consists  of  nine  courses  not 
including  English  1  or  English  2. 
These  nine  courses  must  include 
English  17,  20,  21,  22,  23;  and  one 
from  English  35  and  36. 

The  remaining  electives  may  in- 
clude any  course  from  English  12  and 
above  not  already  taken  to  satisfy  the 
preceding  requirements.  With  the 
consent  of  the  Department  of 
English,  an  appropriate  course  from 
the  offerings  of  other  departments 
may  be  substituted  for  an  English 
elective. 

Majors  seeking  secondary  certifica- 
tion in  English  are  required  to  take 
English  35  and  English  38. 

The  Department  of  English  par- 
ticipates with  seven  others  in  the 
American  Studies  interdisciplinary 
major,  in  which  American  literature 
courses  constitute  an  important  part 
of  the  American-arts  concentration 
area. 

Because  of  its  emphasis  on  com- 
munication skills,  a  major  or  a  minor 
in  English  is  excellent  preparation  for 
a  wide  range  of  professions.  In  addi- 
tion to  preparing  students  for 
graduate  work  or  for  teaching,  a  ma- 
jor or  a  minor  in  English  can  be 
valuable  for  those  interested  in  a 
career  in  law,  ministry,  publishing, 
editing  or  writing,  and  business,  to 
name  a  few. 

I        WORKSHOP  IN  DEVELOPMENTAL 
WRITING 

Classroom  and  laboratory  instruction  in 
organizing  and  writing  the  detailed 
paragraph  and  illustrative  expository 
theme,  with  major  emphasis  on  spelling, 
grammar,  and  sentence  structure.  Writing 
assignments  and  classroom  exercises 
designed  to  ensure  mastery  of  the 
student's  special  problems  in  basic 
writing. 

One-half  unit  grade  of  "S"  will  be 
assigned  when  the  student  has  successfully 
completed  all  of  the  work  in  the  course. 
Required  of,  and  limited  to,  those  who 
have  not  been  exempted  from  English  1. 


2        COMPOSITION 

Extensive  practice  in  either  report  and 
evaluative  writing  or  in  analytical  and 
argumentative  writing.  This  may  be  ac- 
complished by  taking  one  of  the  following 
options: 

Writing  for  the  Sciences  and  Business: 
Extensive  practice  in  report  and 
evaluative  writing,  with  particular 
reference  to  business  and  technology  as 
human  concerns. 

Writing  for  the  Liberal  Arts:  Extensive 
practive  in  analytic  and  argumentative 
writing  with  particular  reference  to  the 
humanities  and  social  sciences. 

NOTE:  Although  either  of  these  op- 
tions will  satisfy  the  composition  require- 
ment, Writing  for  the  Sciences  and 
Business  would  be  more  suitable  for  the 
student  interested  in  business,  in  the 
natural  and  physical  sciences,  and  in 
related  professions;  whereas  Writing  for 
the  Liberal  Arts  would  be  more  suitable 
for  the  student  interested  in  humanities, 
in  law,  and  in  the  social  sciences. 

12      INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERATURE 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  literature 
designed  for  the  general  student  and 
utilizing  one  of  the  following  approaches: 
major  literary  genres,  selected  literary 
masterpieces,  or  traditional  themes  in 
literature. 

16  WRITING  FOR  SPECIAL 
AUDIENCES 

Intensive  practice  in  writing  and  presen- 
ting information  to  various  audiences 
within  the  student's  own  discipline.  In- 
cludes training  in  the  use  of  graphics  and 
in  basic  library  research  methods.  Prere- 
quisite: A  grade  of  Cor  better  in  English  2 
or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

17  CRITICAL  WRITING 

Designed  to  provide  intermediate  students 
of  literature  with  the  critical  skills 
necessary  for  an  understanding  of  poetry, 
fiction,  drama,  and  film.  Intensive 
reading  and  extensive  practice  in  writing 
the  critical  essay.  Required  of  English  ma- 
jors. 

18  NEWSWRITING  FOR  THE 
PRINT  MEDIA 

Analysis  of  and  practice  in  the  basic 
forms  of  newswriting:  the  elements  of 
news,  lead,  style,  and  structure.  Frequent 
workshop  sessions  for  detailed  critiques 
and  discussion  of  student  writing.  Alter- 
nate years. 

19  NEWSWRITING  FOR  THE 
BROADCAST  MEDIA 

Analysis  of  and  practice  in  newswriting 
for     broadcast:     the     news     story,     the 


newscast,  and  the  interview.  Frequent 
workshop  sessions  for  critiques  of  student 
writing  and  oral  presentations.  Alternate 
years. 

20  BRITISH  LITERATURE  I 

Literary  forms,  themes,  and  authors  from 
the  Anglo-Saxon  through  the  Neo- 
classical periods.  Such  writers  as 
Chaucer,  Spenser,  Shakespeare,  Milton, 
Swift,  Pope,  and  Johnson;  representative 
works  from  Beowulf  to  Sterne's  Sen- 
timental Journey. 

21  BRITISH  LITERATURE  II 

Literary  movements  and  authors  from  the 
Romantic  Period  to  the  present.  Par- 
ticular emphasis  on  such  writers  as  Blake, 
Wordsworth,  Shelley,  Keats,  Tennyson, 
Browning,  Arnold,  Hardy,  Yeats,  Eliot. 

22  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  I 

Brief  survey  of  American  literature  and 
thought  before  1800,  followed  by  more 
intensive  study  of  the  literature  and 
thought  of  the  period  1800-1900.  Major 
focus  on  the  works  of  Emerson,  Thoreau, 
Poe,  Hawthorne,  Melville,  Whitman, 
Dickinson,  and  Howells. 

23  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  II 

Major  writers,  movements,  and  tenden- 
cies in  American  literature  during  the  pre- 
sent century.  Such  forces  as  naturalism, 
realism,  and  modernism;  such  writers  as 
James,  Dreiser,  Hemingway,  Faulkner, 
Frost,  Eliot,  and  Stevens. 

24  THE  SHORT  STORY 

Historical  and  critical  study  of  the  short 
story.  Consideration  of  representative  ex- 
amples of  the  form  with  emphasis  on 
American  and  European  writers  of  the 
19th  and  20th  centuries. 

25  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  NOVEL 

Historical  study  of  the  development  of  the 
novel  from  the  18th  through  the  20th  cen- 
turies. Novels  analyzed  both  as  works  of 
prose  art  and  as  turning  points  in  the 
development  of  the  novel.  Alternate 
years. 

26  LITERATURE  AND  FILM 

The  relationship  between  the  conventions 
of  literature  and  film  with  emphasis  on 
examination  of  representative  literary  and 
film  works.  Media  comparison  to  reveal 
the  problems  of  adaptation. 

28      CREATIVE  WRITING  WORKSHOP: 
FICTION  AND  POETRY 
A  beginning  course   in   the  theory  and 
practice  of  writing   fiction  and  poetry. 
Students  may  concentrate  in  either  genre 
or  both.  Alternate  years. 


34 


30  ROMANTIC  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  the  major  poetry  and  fiction, 
plus  some  non-fiction  prose,  written  dur- 
ing the  years,  1789-1832.  Emphasis  on  the 
work  of  at  least  three  poets,  two  novelists, 
and  assorted  prose  writers.  Alternate 
years. 

31  MODERN  FICTION 

Study  of  the  novels  and  short  fiction  of 
such  major  British  and  American  figures 
as  Conrad,  Forster,  Woolf,  Lawrence, 
Joyce,  Hemingway,  Faulkner,  Nabokov, 
and  Bellow. 

32  MODERN  POETRY 

A  study  of  the  poetry  written  in  this  cen- 
tury, beginning  with  Yeats  and  Eliot  and 
continuing  through  such  writers  as  Frost, 
Williams,  Moore,  Stevens,  Auden, 
Lowell,  Roethke,  Thomas,  Ginsberg,  and 
Rich.  Alternate  years. 

33  COMEDY,  TRAGEDY, 

AND  THE  MODERN  THEATRE 

Introduction  to  the  theories  of  comedy 
and  tragedy  as  those  theories  help  us  to 
deepen  our  response  to  the  theatre.  Major 
focus  on  plays,  including  musicals,  from 
Ibsen  and  Shaw  to  the  present.  Alternate 
years. 

34  WOMEN  AND  LITERATURE 
Through  an  examination-literary,  social, 
and  historical-of  selected  British  and 
American  literature  by  women,  this 
course  will  seek  to  identify  those  elements 
which  distinguish  women's  particular 
contribution  to  the  literary  canon.  Alter- 
nate years. 

35  CHAUCER 

A  study  of  the  major  works  with  emphasis 
on  The  Canterbury  Tales  and  Troilus  and 
Criseyde.  Some  attention  to  the  traditions 
out  of  which  these  works  arose.  Required 
of  majors  seeking  secondary  certification 
in  English.  Alternate  years. 

36  SHAKESPEARE 
A  study  of  representative  plays:  comedies, 
tragedies,  histories,  romances.  Attention 
given   to  Shakespeare's  life  and  times. 
A  Iternate  years. 

PUBLIC  RELATIONS 
AND  PUBLICITY  WRITING 

Communication  and  publicity  techniques 
in  the  field  of  public  relations  focused  on 
writing  for  the  media.  The  news  and 
feature  release,  newsletter,  and  house 
organ.  Prerequisite:  English  18  or  consent 
of  instructor.  A  Iternate  years. 


38  LINGUISTICS  AND  THE  ANALYSIS 
OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 
Introduction  to  methods  of  analyzing 
spoken  and  written  English.  Classroom 
work  supported  by  weekly  tutorials,  in 
which  the  student  gains  practical  ex- 
perience in  identifying,  diagnosing,  and 
correcting  basic  communications  pro- 
blems. Required  of  majors  seeking  secon- 
dary certification  in  English.  Alternate 
years. 

40  SELECTED  WRITERS 

An  intensive  study  of  no  more  than  three 
writers,  selected  on  the  basis  of  student 
and  faculty  interest.  Possible  combina- 
tions include:  Frost,  Hemingway,  and 
Faulkner;  O'Connor,  Welty,  and  Porter; 
Spenser  and  Milton;  Hawthorne, 
Melville,  and  Dickens;  Woolfe,  Forster, 
and  Lawrence;  Joyce  and  Yeats.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit  if  the  writers  are  dif- 
ferent. Alternate  years. 

41  TOPICS  IN  LITERATURE 

Examination  of  a  literary  theme,  idea,  or 
movement  as  it  appears  in  one  or  more 
types  of  literature  and  as  it  cuts  across 
various  epochs.  Possible  topics  include: 
American  Novelists  and  Poets  of  the  Jazz 
Age  and  Depression;  Religion  and 
Literature;  Gothic  Tradition  in  American 
Literature;  Realism  in  the  Novel;  Literary 
Modernism;  Literature  and  Mythology; 
The  Hero  in  Literature.  May  be  repeated 
for  credit  if  the  topic  is  different.  A  Iter- 
nate years. 

77-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  typically  work  off  campus  in  a 
profession  related  to  their  career  interest 
such  as  law,  public  relations,  journalism, 
and  others. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Recent  studies  include  The  Arthurian 
Legend,  Shakespeare's  Women,  D.  H. 
Lawrence,  and  T.  S.  Eliot:  The  Social  Vi- 
sion. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 
Recent  projects  include  The  Creative  Pro- 
cess in  Literature  and  Art  and  Images  of 
Women  in  the  1890's. 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

AND  LITERATURES 

Associate  Professors:  Flam,  Maples, 

MacKenzie  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Barker 

Study    of    foreign    languages    and 


literatures  offers  opportunity  to  ex- 
plore broadly  the  varieties  of  human 
experience  and  thought.  It  con- 
tributes both  to  personal  and  to  inter- 
national understanding  by  providing 
competence  in  a  foreign  language  and 
a  critical  acquaintance  with  the 
literature  and  culture  of  foreign 
peoples.  A  major  can  serve  as  entree 
to  careers  in  business,  industry, 
government,  publishing,  education, 
journalism,  social  agencies, 
translating,  and  writing.  It  prepares 
for  graduate  work  in  literature  or 
linguistics  and  the  international  fields 
of  politics,  commerce,  law,  health, 
and  area  studies. 

French,  German,  and  Spanish  are 
offered  as  major  fields  of  study.  The 
major  consists  of  at  least  eight 
courses  numbered  10  or  above.  Ma- 
jors seeking  teacher  certification  and 
students  planning  to  enter  graduate 
school  are  advised  to  begin  study  of  a 
second  foreign  language.  The  depart- 
ment encourages  the  development  in 
breadth  of  programs,  including  allied 
courses  from  related  fields  or  a  se- 
cond major,  and  also  individual  or 
established  interdisciplinary  majors 
combining  interest  in  several 
literatures  or  area  or  cross-cultural 
studies.  For  example:  International 
Studies,  20th  Century  Studies,  the 
Major  in  Literature.  Majors,  teacher 
certification  candidates,  and  all 
students  are  encouraged  to  spend  at 
least  a  semster  of  study  abroad  by  ap- 
plying to  one  of  the  many  programs 
available.  The  department  maintains 
a  file  of  such  programs. 

Courses  taught  in  English:  Foreign 
Languages  and  Literature  25,  French 
28,  and  Spanish  28. 

Foreign  Language  and  Literatures 

25   CONTINENTAL  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  such  major  continental 
authors  as  Cervantes,  Dostoevsky, 
Chekhov,  Dante,  Ibsen,  Proust,  Gide, 
Kafka,  Hesse,  Goethe,  Sartre,  Camus, 
Brecht,  and  Ionesco.  Works  read  in 
English  translation  will  vary  and  be 
organized  around  a  different  theme  or 
topic;  recent  topics  have  been  existen- 
tialism, modernism,  and  drama.  Prere- 
quisite: None.  May  be  repeated  for  credit 


35 


with  consent  of  instructor.  May  be  ac- 
cepted toward  the  English  major  with 
consent  of  the  Department  of  English. 

38  FOREIGN  LANGUAGE: 
SYSTEMS  AND  PROCESS 
Study  of  basic  linguistic  concepts  as  a  tool 
for  language  learning  and  teaching. 
Discussion  and  application  of  language 
teaching  techniques,  including  work  in  the 
language  laboratory.  Designed  for  future 
teachers,  of  one  or  more  languages  and 
normally  taken  in  the  junior  year. 
Students  should  arrange  through  the 
Department  of  Education  to  fulfill  in  the 
same  semester  the  requirements  of  a  par- 
ticipation experience  in  area  schools. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 


French 

A  major  consists  of  at  least  eight 
courses  numbered  10  or  above,  in- 
cluding at  least  one  numbered  40  or 
above.  Foreign  Languages  and 
Literatures  25  and  38  may  be  included 
in  the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified 
for  teaching  must  pass  courses  23,  31, 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 
38,  and  at  least  two  courses  numbered 
40  or  above. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  acquire  the 
fundamentals  of  the  language  with  a  view 
to  using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speak- 
ing, understanding,  and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  the  fun- 
damentals of  the  language  for  immediate 
use  in  speaking,  understanding,  and 
reading  with  a  view  to  building  confidence 
in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  French  2 
or  equivalent. 

20      CONVERSATION 

Designed  to  develop  conversational  fluen- 
cy and  comprehension  through  small 
discussions  focusing  on  topics  from 
readings  in  modern  French  culture,  such 
as  French  social  attitudes  and  French- 
American  cultural  differences.  Some  at- 
tention to  grammar  and  writing.  Prere- 
quisite: French  II  or  equivalent. 


23 


INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERARY 

STUDIES 

Studies  in  French  literature  with  emphasis 

on   critical    reading   and    interpretation. 

Discussions,     lectures,     oral    exposes, 

papers.     Prerequisite:     French    20    or 

equivalent. 


28      MODERN  FRANCE 

A  course  designed  to  familiarize  students 
with  political  and  social  structures  and 
cultural  attitudes  in  contemporary  French 
society.  Materials  studied  may  include 
such  documents  as  newspaper  articles,  in- 
terviews and  sociological  surveys,  and 
readings  in  history,  religion,  an- 
thropology, and  the  arts.  Some  attention 
to  the  changing  education  system  and  the 
family  and  to  events  and  ideas  which  have 
shaped  French  society.  May  include  some 
comparative  study  of  France  and  the 
United  States. 

English  Section:  Not  applicable  toward 
satisfying  the  foreign  language  distribu- 
tion requirement.  Prerequisite:  none. 

French  Section:  Offers  readings, 
papers,  and  interviews  in  French  for 
students  with  sufficient  language  skill. 
Can  be  applied  toward  the  foreign 
language  distribution  requirement.  Prere- 
quisite: French  10  or  equivalent  com- 
petency as  determined  by  the  department. 

31      FRENCH  GRAMMATICAL 
STRUCTURE 

Study  of  phonetics  and  grammatical  rules 
and  their  practical  application  in  speaking 
and  writing.  Recommended  for  all  ma- 
jors. 

41      FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE 
MIDDLE  AGES  AND  THE 
RENAISSANCE 

A  study  of  selected  works  from  La  Chan- 
son de  Roland  to  Montaigne.  Prere- 
quisite: French  23  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Alternate  years. 

43      FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE 
17TH  CENTURY 

A  study  of  major  texts  of  the  period: 
preciosity,  the  origins  and  theories  of 
French  classicism,  Corneille,  Pascal, 
Descartes,  Classical  tragedy,  and  comedy: 
Racine,  Moliere,  LaFontaine,  Mme.  de 
La  Fayette,  La  Bruyere.  Prerequisite: 
French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

45      FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE 
I8TH  CENTURY 

The  literary  expression  of  ideas:  Montes- 
quieu, Voltaire,  Rousseau,  and  the  En- 
cyclopedists. Prerequisite:  French  23  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

47     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE 
I9TH  CENTURY 

The  dimensions  of  the  Romantic  sensibili- 
ty: Musset,  Hugo,  Vigny,  Balzac,  Sten- 
dhal. Realism  and  Naturalism  in  the 
novels  of  Flaubert  and  Zola.  Reaction  in 
the  poetry  of  Baudelaire,  Rimbaud, 
Verlaine,    and    Mallarme.    Prerequisite: 


French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

48  MODERN  FRENCH  THEATRE 

Major  trends  in  French  drama  from  the 
turn  of  the  century  to  Existentialism  and 
the  Theatre  of  the  Absurd,  Giraudoux, 
Anouilh,  Sartre,  Camus,  Beckett, 
Ionesco,  Genet,  Adamov,  and  others. 
Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. A  Iternate  years. 

49  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE 
20TH  CENTURY 

Representative  poets  and  novelists  of 
modern  France.  Readings  selected  from 
the  works  of  authors  such  as  Proust, 
Gide,  Aragon,  Giono,  Mauriac,  Celine, 
Malraux,  Saint-Exupery,  Camus,  the 
"new  novelists"  (Robbe-Grillet,  Butor, 
Sarraute,  Le  Clezio),  and  the  poetry  of 
Apollinaire,  Val6ry,  the  Surrealists 
(Breton,  Reverdy,  Eluard,  Char),  Saint- 
John  Perse,  Supervielle,  Prevert,  and 
others.  Some  attention  to  works  of 
French-speaking  African  writers.  Prere- 
quisite: French  23  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. A  Iternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Examples  of  recent  studies  in  French  in- 
clude translation,  existentialism,  the 
classical  period,  enlightenment  literature, 
and  Saint-Exupery. 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 


German 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses 
numbered  10  or  above.  Foreign 
Languages  and  Literatures  38  and 
one  unit  of  Foreign  Languages  and 
Literatures  25  may  be  included  in  the 
major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified 
for  teaching  must  pass  courses  3 1 ,  33, 
34,  and  Foreign  Languages  and 
Literatures  38. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamen- 
tals of  the  language  with  a  view  to  using 
them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking, 
understanding,  and  reading. 

10-il     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals 
of  the  language  for  immediate  use  in 
speaking,    understanding,    and    reading 


36 


with  a  view  to  building  confidence  in  self- 
expression.  Prerequisite:  German  2  or 
equivalent. 

20      CONVERSATION 

Designed  to  develop  aural  comprehension 
and  conversational  fluency.  Readings  and 
discussions  on  topics  of  contemporary 
society  in  Germany,  Switzerland,  and 
Austria.  Some  attention  to  grammar  and 
writing.  Prerequisite:  German  11  or 
equivalent. 

31      GERMAN  GRAMMATICAL 
STRUCTURE 

Study  of  intonation,  complex  gram- 
matical rules  and  their  practical  applica- 
tion, stylistics,  and  a  brief  survey  of  the 
development  of  the  language.  Recom- 
mended for  all  majors. 

33  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE 
AND  CIVILIZATION  I 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  im- 
portant periods  of  German  literature, 
representative  authors,  and  major 
cultural  developments  in  Germany, 
Austria,  and  Switzerland.  The  course 
deals  with  literature  from  the  Early  Mid- 
dle Ages  through  the  18th  century.  Prere- 
quisite: German  20  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

34  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE 
AND  CIVILIZATION  II 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  im- 
portant periods  of  German  literature, 
representative  authors,  and  major 
cultural  developments  in  Germany, 
Austria,  and  Switzerland.  The  course 
deals  with  the  literature  from  the  19th 
century  to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  Ger- 
man 20  or  consent  of  instructor. 

40  GOETHE 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Goethe. 
Goethe's  significance  in  the  Classical 
period  and  later.  Readings  in  the  major 
works.  Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

41  CLASSICAL  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  development  of  das  ktassische  Drama 
with  emphasis  on  works  of  Lessing, 
Goethe,  and  Schiller.  Prerequisite:  Ger- 
man 20. 

42  MODERN  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  emergency  of  modern  drama  com- 
mencing with  Buchner  and  leading  to 
Brecht.  Prerequisite:  German  20. 

43  THE  NOVELLE 

The  German  Novelle  as  a  genre  relating  to 
various  literary  periods.  Prerequisite: 
German  20. 


45      GERMAN  POETRY 

A  study  of  selected  poets  or  the  poetry  of 
various  literary  periods.  Prerequisite: 
German  33  or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

47  MODERN  GERMAN  LITERATURE 
A  study  of  the  major  movements  and 
writers  from  Naturalism,  Expressionism, 
and  the  postwar  period.  Hauptmann, 
Rilke,  Mann,  Hesse,  Kaiser,  Boll,  Grass, 
Handke,  and  others.  Prerequisite:  Ger- 
man 33  or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Examples  of  recent  studies  in  German  in- 
clude Callicism,  Germanic  Mythology, 
Hermann  Hesse,  the  dramas  of  Frisch, 
and  Durrenmatt. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 

Greek 

Greek  is  not  offered  as  a  major. 

1-2  NEW  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR  AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  New  Testament  Greek 
grammar  and  readings  of  selected 
passages  of  the  Greek  text.  Alternate 
years. 

1 1  READINGS  IN  THE  SYNOPTIC 
GOSPELS 

A  comparative  study  of  the  Synoptic 
tradition  in  Greek.  Prerequisite:  Greek  2 
or  equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

12  READINGS  IN  THE  PAULINE 
EPISTLES 

Selected  readings  from  the  letters  of  Paul 
in  Greek.  Prerequisite:  Greek  11  or 
equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew  is  not  offered  as  a  major. 

1-2  OLD  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR  AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  Old  Testament  Hebrew 
grammar  and  readings  of  selected 
passages  of  the  Hebrew  text.  Alternate 
years. 

11-12  INTERMEDIATE  OLD 
TESTAMENT  HEBREW 
A  critical  reading  of  the  Hebrew  text  with 
special  attention  being  given  to  exegetical 
questions.  The  text  read  varies  from  year 
to  year.  Prerequisite:  Hebrew  2  or 
equivalent.  Alternate  years. 


Spanish 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses 
numbered  10  or  above,  including  at 
least  two  numbered  33  or  above. 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38 
may  be  included.  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures  25  does  not  count 
toward  the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified 
for  teaching  in  secondary  school  must 
pass  Foreign  Language  and 
Literatures  38,  Spanish  31,  and  one 
from  33,  34,  or  35. 

The  specific  courses  from  those 
numbered  31  or  above  which  are  of- 
fered in  a  given  year  are  selected  in 
consideration  of  the  curriculum  re- 
quirements and  career  needs  of  ad- 
vanced students. 

1-2    ELEMENTARY 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamen- 
tals of  the  language  with  a  view  to  using 
them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking, 
understanding,  and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals 
of  the  language  for  immediate  use  in 
speaking,  understanding,  and  reading 
with  a  view  to  building  confidence  in  self- 
expression.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  2  or 
equivalent. 

20      CONVERSATION 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  improve 
the  student's  ability  in  spontaneous  con- 
versations, focusing  on  everyday  activities 
and  matters  of  current  concern  as  sug- 
gested in  readings  from  Latin  American 
and  peninsular  sources.  Vocabulary 
building  is  stressed.  Prerequisite:  Spanish 
1 1  or  equivalent. 

28  SPAIN 

To  introduce  students  to  the  Spanish  peo- 
ple —  their  values,  customs,  and  institu- 
tions, with  reference  to  the  major  socio- 
economic, political,  and  artistic  forces 
governing  present-day  Spain.  Prere- 
quisite: Spanish  20  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. Alternates  with  Spanish  29. 

29  MEXICO 

To  introduce  students  to  our  most  impor- 
tant Latin-American  neighbor.  History, 
literature,  art,  and  music,  principally 
covering  the  period  from  the  Spanish  con- 
quest. Prerequisite:  Spanish  20  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Alternates  with  Spanish 
28. 


37 


31      SPANISH  GRAMMATICAL  HISTORY 

STRUCTURE 

Study  of  intonation,  complex  gram- 
matical rules  and  their  practical  applica- 
tion, and  a  brief  survey  of  the  develop- 
ment of  the  language.  Recommended  for 
all  majors. 

33  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  LITERATURE 
AND  CIVILIZATION  I 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  im- 
portant periods  of  Spanish  literature, 
representative  authors,  and  major  socio- 
economic developments.  The  course  deals 
with  the  literature  from  the  beginning 
through  the  17th  century.  Prerequisite: 
Spanish  20  or  consent  of  instructor. 

34  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  LITERATURE 
AND  CIVILIZATION  II 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  im- 
portant periods  of  Spanish  literature, 
representative  authors,  and  major  socio- 
economic developments.  The  course  deals 
with  the  literature  from  the  18th  century 
to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  33  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

35  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  AMERICAN 
LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  im- 
portant periods  of  Spanish-American 
literature,  representative  authors,  and 
major  socio-economic  developments.  The 
course  deals  with  the  literature,  expecially 
the  essay  and  poetry,  from  the  16th  cen- 
tury to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  Spanish 
20  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

44      SPANISH  LITERATURE  OF  THE 
GOLDEN  AGE 

A  study  of  representative  works  and  prin- 
cipal literary  figures  in  the  poetry,  prose, 
and  drama  of  the  16th  and  17th  centuries. 
Prerequisite:  Spanish  33  or  consent  of  the 
instructor. 


Associate  Professors:  Larson,  Piper 

(Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Morris 

A  major  consists  of  10  courses,  in- 
cluding 10,  11,  and  45.  At  least  seven 
courses  must  be  taken  in  the  depart- 
ment. The  following  courses  may  be 
counted  toward  fulfilling  the  major 
requirements:  American  Studies  10, 
Political  Science  39,  Religion  28  and 
46.  Other  appropriate  courses  outside 
the  department  may  be  counted  upon 
departmental  approval.  For  history 
majors  who  student  teach  in  history, 
the  major  consists  of  nine  courses.  In 
addition  to  the  courses  listed  below, 
special  courses,  independent  study, 
and  honors  are  available.  Special 
courses  recently  taught  and  an- 
ticipated include  a  biographical  study 
of  European  Monarchs,  the  Euro- 
pean Left,  the  Industrialization  and 
Urbanization  of  Modern  Europe, 
Utopian  Movements  in  America,  the 
Peace  Movement  in  America,  The 
Vietnam  War,  and  American  Legal 
History.  History  majors  are  en- 
couraged to  participate  in  the  intern- 
ship program. 


45  MODERN  HISPANIC  LITERATURE 
Readings  of  important  works  of  drama, 
poetry,  and  prose  from  the  major  periods  \2 
of  19th  and  20th  century  Spanish  and 
I  atin- American  literature.  Prerequisite: 
Spanish  34,  35.  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  include  literary,  linguistic,       '3 
and  cultural  topics  and  themes  such  as  ur- 
ban problems  as  reflected  in  the  modern 
novel. 


10  EUROPE  1500-1815 
An  examination  of  the  political,  social, 
cultural,     and    intellectual     history    of 
Europe  and  its  relations  with  other  areas 
of  the  world  from  1500  to  1815. 

11  EUROPE  1815-Present 
An  examination  of  the  political,  social, 
cultural,     and    intellectual     history    of 
Europe  and  its  relations  with  other  areas 
of  the  world  from  1815  to  the  present. 


90-99 


INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 


UNITED  STATES  HISTORY  1603-1877 
A  study  of  the  men,  measures,  and 
movements  which  have  been  significant  in 
the  development  of  the  United  States  be- 
tween 1603  and  1877.  Attention  is  paid  to 
t  he  problems  of  minority  groups  as  well  as 
to  majority  and  national  influences. 

UNITED  STATES  HISTORY 

1877-Present 

A  study  of  the  men,  measures,  and 
movements  which  have  been  significant  in 
l he  development  of  the  United  States 
since  1877.  Attention  is  paid  to  the  prob- 
lems of  minority  groups  as  well  as  to  ma- 
jority and  national  influences. 


20      ANCIENT  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  ancient  western  world,  in- 
cluding the  foundations  of  the  western 
tradition  in  Greece,  the  emergence  and  ex- 
pansion of  the  Roman  state,  its  experience 
as  a  republic,  and  its  transformation  into 
the  Empire.  The  course  will  focus  on  the 
social  and  intellectual  life  of  Greece  and 
Rome  as  well  as  political  and  economic 
changes.  Alternate  years. 

22  MEDIEVAL  EUROPE  AND  ITS 
NEIGHBORS 

The  history  of  Europe  from  the  dissolu- 
tion of  the  Roman  Empire  to  the  mid- 1 5th 
century.  The  course  will  deal  with  the 
growing  estrangement  of  western  Catholic 
Europe  from  the  Byzantium  and  Islam, 
culminating  in  the  Crusades;  the  rise  of 
the  Islamic  Empire  and  its  later  fragmen- 
tation; the  development  and  growth  of 
feudalism;  the  conflict  of  empire  and  pap- 
cy,  and  the  rise  of  towns.  Alternate  years. 

23  EUROPE  IN  THE  ERA  OF  THE 
WORLD  WARS 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political, 
economic,  social,  and  cultural  history  of 
Europe  from  1900-1945.  Topics  include 
the  rise  of  irrationalism,  the  origins  of  the 
First  World  War,  the  Communist  and 
Fascist  Revolutions,  and  the  attempts  to 
preserve  peace  before  1939.  Prerequisite: 
History  1 1  or  consent  of  instructor. 

24  CONTEMPORARY  EUROPE 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political, 
economic,  social,  and  cultural  history  of 
Europe  since  1945.  Topics  include  the 
post-war  economic  recovery  of  Europe, 
the  Sovietization  of  Eastern  Europe,  the 
origins  of  the  Cold  War,  decolonization, 
and  the  flowering  of  the  welfare  state. 
Prerequisite:  History  1 1  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

25  FRENCH  REVOLUTION  AND 
NAPOLEON 

An  analysis  of  the  political,  social,  and  in- 
tellectual background  of  the  French 
Revolution,  a  survey  of  the  course  of 
revolutionary  development,  and  an 
estimate  of  the  results  of  the  Napoleonic 
conquests  and  administration.  Prere- 
quisite: History  10  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. A  llernale  years. 

26  COLONIAL  AMERICA  AND  THE 
REVOLUTIONARY  ERA 

The  establishment  of  British  settlements 
on  the  American  continent,  their  history 
as  colonies,  the  causes  and  events  of  the 
American  Revolution,  the  critical  period 
following  independence,  and  proposal 
and  adoption  of  the  United  States  Con- 
stitution. Alternate  years. 


38 


27  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES 
This  course  begins  with  the  Progressive 
Era  and  includes  the  political,  economic, 
and  social  developments  in  the  20th  cen- 
tury. Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the 
domestic  and  international  demands 
which  have  faced  the  United  States  in  the 
period  following  World  War  II. 

28  AFRO-AMERICAN  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  experiences  and  participa- 
tion of  Afro-Americans  in  the  United 
States.  The  course  includes  historical  ex- 
periences such  as  slavery,  abolition, 
reconstruction,  and  urbanization.  It  also 
raises  the  issue  of  the  development  and 
growth  of  white  racism,  and  the  effect  of 
this  racism  on  contemporary  Afro- 
American  social,  intellectual,  and 
political  life.  Alternate  years. 

29  LATIN  AMERICAN  HISTORY 

An  examination  of  the  native  civilization, 
the  age  of  discovery  and  conquest, 
Spanish  colonial  policy,  the  independence 
movements,  and  the  development  of 
modern  institutions  and  governments  in 
Latin  America.  Alternate  years. 

33  CONFLICT  IN  WESTERN 
CIVILIZATION 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  changing  nature 
of  war  and  its  relationship  to  the  develop- 
ment of  Western  Civilization  since  the  end 
of  the  Middle  Ages.  Particular  emphasis 
will  be  placed  on  the  role  of  war  in  the 
development  of  the  modern  nation  state 
and  the  origins  and  nature  of  total  war. 
A  Iternate  years. 

34  DIPLOMATIC  HISTORY  OF  EUROPE 
SINCE  1789 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the 
European-states  system  and  the  relations 
between  the  European  states  since  the 
beginning  of  the  French  Revolution. 
Prerequisite:  History  1 1  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. A  Iternate  years. 

35  THE  CRISIS  OF  LIBERALISM  AND 
NATIONALISM,  EUROPE  1848-1870 
An  in-depth  investigation  of  the  crucial 
"Middle  Years"  of  19th  century  Europe 
from  the  revolutions  of  1848  through  the 
unification  of  Germany.  The  course 
centers  on  the  struggles  for  power  within 
the  major  states  of  Europe  at  this  time, 
and  how  the  vehicle  of  nationalism  was 
used  to  bring  about  one  type  of  solution. 
A  Iternate  years. 

37  AGE  OF  JEFFERSON  AND  JACKSON 
The  theme  of  the  course  is  the  emergence 
of  the  political  and  social  characteristics 


that  shaped  modern  America.  The  per- 
sonalities of  Thomas  Jefferson,  John 
Marshall,  John  Randolph,  Aaron  Burr, 
and  Andrew  Jackson  receive  special  atten- 
tion. Special  consideration  is  given  to  the 
first  and  second  party  systems,  the  decline 
in  community  cohesiveness,  the  westward 
movement,  and  the  growing  importance 
of  the  family  as  a  unit  of  social  organiza- 
tion. Alternate  years. 

38  CIVIL  WAR  AND 
RECONSTRUCTION 

The  problems  and  events  leading  to  war, 
the  political  and  military  history  of  the 
war,  and  the  bitter  aftermath  to  the  Com- 
promise of  1877. 

39  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES 
RELIGION 

The  study  of  historical  and  cultural 
developments  in  American  society  which 
relates  to  religion  or  what  is  commonly 
called  religion.  This  involves  considera- 
tion of  the  institutional  and  intellectual 
development  of  several  faith  groups  as 
well  as  discussion  of  certain  problems, 
such  as  the  persistence  of  religious  bigotry 
and  the  changing  modes  of  church-state 
relationships.  Alternate  years. 

40  HISTORY  OF  RENAISSANCE 
THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  classical,  humanist,  and 
scholastic  elements  involved  in  the 
development  of  the  Renaissance  outlook 
on  views  and  values,  both  in  Italy  and  in 
Northern  Europe.  The  various  combina- 
tions of  social  and  political  circumstances 
which  constitute  the  historical  context  of 
these  intellectual  developments  will  be 
noted.  Alternate  years. 

41  HISTORY  OF  REFORMATION 
THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  ideas  and  systems  of  ideas 
propounded  prior  to  the  Reformation, 
but  which  are  historically  related  to  its  in- 
ception, and  of  the  ideas  and  systems  of 
ideas  involved  in  the  formulation  of  the 
major  Reformation,  Protestant  tradi- 
tions, and  in  the  Catholic  Reformation. 
Included  are  the  ideas  of  the  humanists  of 
the  Reformation  Era.  Alternate  years. 

42  UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND 
INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  TO  1877 

A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  ex- 
perience of  the  United  States  from  its  col- 
onial antecedents  through  reconstruction. 
Among  the  topics  considered  are 
Puritanism,  transcendentalism,  com- 
munity life  and  organization,  education, 
and  social-reform  movements.  Prere- 
quisites: two  courses  from  History  12.  13. 
28,  or  consent  of  instructor. 


43      UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND 
INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY 

SINCE  1877 

A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  ex- 
perience of  the  United  States  from 
reconstruction  to  the  present  day.  Among 
the  topics  considered  are  social  Dar- 
winism, pragmatism,  community  life  and 
organization,  education  and  social  reform 
movements.  Prerequisites:  two  courses 
from  History  12,  13,  28  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

45      HISTORICAL  METHODS 

This  course  focuses  on  the  nature  and 
meaning  of  history.  It  will  open  to  the  stu- 
dent different  historical  approaches  and 
will  provide  the  opportunity  to  explore 
these  approaches  in  terms  of  particular 
topics  and  periods.  Majors  are  required  to 
enroll  in  this  course  in  either  their  junior 
or  senior  year.  The  course  is  open  to  other 
students  who  have  two  courses  in  history 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typically,  history  interns  work  for  local 
government  agencies  engaged  in  historical 
projects  or  for  the  Lycoming  County 
Historical  Museum. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Recent  topics  include  studies  of  the  im- 
migration of  American  blacks,  political 
dissension  in  the  Weimer  Republic,  In- 
dian relations  before  the  American 
Revolution,  and  the  history  of  Lycoming 
County. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See 
Index) 
Two  recent  projects  were  the  Germans  in 
Pennsylvania  Politics,  1878-1938,  and  the 
Reign    of  Tiglath    Pileser    I    (1116-1075 
B.C.). 


INTERNATIONAL  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The  major  is  designed  to  integrate  an 
understanding  of  the  changing  social, 
political,  and  historical  environment 
of  Europe  today  with  study  of 
Europe  in  its  relations  to  the  rest  of 
the  world,  particularly  the  United 
States.  It  stresses  the  international 
relations  of  the  North  Atlantic  com- 
munity and  offers  the  student  oppor- 
tunity to  emphasize  either  European 
studies  or  international  relations.  The 


39 


program  provides  multiple  perspec- 
tives on  the  cultural  traits  that  shape 
popular  attitudes  and  institutions. 
Study  of  a  single  country  is  included 
as  a  data-base  for  comparisons,  and 
study  of  its  language  as  a  basis  for 
direct  communication  with  its  people. 
The  program  is  intended  to  prepare 
a  student  either  for  graduate  study  or 
for  careers  which  have  an  interna- 
tional component.  International 
obligations  are  increasingly  assumed 
by  government  agencies  and  a  wide 
range  of  business,  social,  religious, 
and  educational  organizations.  Op- 
portunities are  found  in  the  fields  of 
journalism,  publishing,  communica- 
tions, trade,  banking,  advertising, 
management,  and  tourism.  The  pro- 
gram also  offers  flexible  career 
preparation  in  a  variety  of  essential 
skills,  such  as  research,  data  analysis, 
report  writing,  language  skills,  and 
the  awareness  necessary  for  dealing 
with  people  and  institutions  of 
another  culture.  Preparation  for 
related  careers  can  be  obtained 
through  the  guided  selection  of 
courses  outside  the  major  in  the  areas 
of  business,  economics,  foreign 
languages  and  literatures,  govern- 
ment, history,  and  international  rela- 
tions or  through  a  second  major. 
Students  should  design  their  pro- 
grams in  consultation  with  members 
of  the  Committee  on  International 
Studies. 

By  completing  six  to  eight  addi- 
tional courses  in  the  social  sciences 
(which  include  those  courses  needed 
to  complete  a  major  in  economics, 
history,  political  science,  or 
sociology/anthropology)  and  the  re- 
quired program  in  education, 
students  can  be  certified  for  the 
teacher  education  program  in  social 
studies.  By  completing  a  major  in  the 
foreign  language  (five  or  more 
courses)  and  the  education  program, 
students  can  be  certified  to  teach  that 
language.  The  International  Studies 
program  also  encourages  participa- 
tion in  study-abroad  programs,  as 
well  as  the  Washington  and  United 
Nations  semesters. 

40~ 


The    major    includes 
selected  as  follows: 


1 1    courses 


International    Relations    Courses   — 

Four  or  two  courses  (if  two,  then  four 
must  be  taken  from  Area  Courses). 
Courses  within  this  group  are  design- 
ed to  provide  a  basic  understanding 
of  the  international  system  and  of 
Europe's  relations  with  the  rest  of  the 
world.  Political  Science  25  is  re- 
quired. 

Political  Science  25:  World  Politics 
Economics  43:  International  Trade 
History  34:  European  Diplomatic  History 
Political  Science  39:  American  Foreign 
Policy 

Area  Courses  —  Four  or  two  courses 
(if  two,  then  four  must  be  taken  from 
International  Relations  Courses). 
Courses  within  this  group  are  design- 
ed to  provide  a  basic  understanding 
of  the  European  political,  social,  and 
economic  environment.  History  11 
and  Economics  22  are  required. 

History  11:  Europe  1815-Present 
Economics  22:  Economic  Systems  of  the 

West 
Political  Science  20:  European  Politics 
History  23:  Europe  in  the  Era  of  the 

World  Wars 
History  24:  Contemporary  Europe 


National  Courses 

Language 
language. 


Two  courses  in  one 


French  20,  plus  one  course  numbered 

23  or  above  (except  28) 
German  20,  plus  one  course  numbered 

3 1  or  above 
Spanish  20,  plus  one  course  numbered 

31  or  above 

Country  —  One  course.  The  stu- 
dent must  select,  according  to  his 
or  her  language  preparation,  one 
European  country  which  will 
serve  as  a  special  interest  area 
throughout  the  program.  The 
country  selected  will  serve  as  the 
base  for  individual  projects  in  the 
major  courses  wherever  possible. 

France  —  French  28:  Modern  France 
Germany  —  History  80:  Topics  in 

German  History 
Spain  —  Spanish  28:  Contemporary 

Hispanic  Life 


Elective  Course  —  One  course  which 
should  involve  further  study  of  some 
aspect  of  the  program.  Appropriate 
courses  are  any  area  or  international 
relations  courses  not  yet  taken, 
History  10,  32,  33;  Economics  23,  45; 
Political  Science  26,  27,  38,  46; 
related  foreign-literature  courses 
counting  toward  the  fine-arts  require- 
ment and  internships. 

49      SENIOR  SEMINAR 

A  one-semester  seminar,  taken  in  the 
senior  year,  in  which  students  and  several 
faculty  members  will  pursue  an  in- 
tegrative topic  in  the  field  of  international 
studies.  Students  will  work  to  some  extent 
independently.  Guest  speakers  will  be  in- 
vited. The  seminar  will  be  open  to 
qualified  persons  from  outside  the  major 
and  the  College.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
instructor. 


LITERATURE 

Associate  Professor:  Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This  major  recognizes  literature  as  a 
distinct  discipline  beyond  national 
boundaries  and  combines  the  study  of 
any  two  literatures  in  the  areas  of 
English,  French,  German,  and 
Spanish.  Students  can  thus  explore 
two  literatures  widely  and  intensively 
at  the  upper  levels  of  course  offerings 
within  each  of  the  respective  depart- 
ments while  developing  and  applying 
skills  in  foreign  languages.  The  major 
prepares  students  for  graduate  study 
in  either  of  the  two  literatures  studies 
or  in  comparative  literature. 

The  major  requires  at  least  six 
literature  courses,  equally  divided 
between  the  two  literatures  concern- 
ed. The  six  must  be  at  the  advanced 
level  as  determined  in  consultation 
with  advisers  (normally  courses 
numbered  20  and  above  in  English 
and  40  and  above  in  foreign 
languages).  In  general,  two  of  the  ad- 
vanced courses  in  each  literature 
should  be  period  courses.  The  third 
course,  taken  either  as  a  regular 
course  or  an  independent  study,  may 
have  as  its  subject  another  period,  a 


particular  author,  genre,  or  literary 
theme,  or  some  other  unifying  ap- 
proach or  idea.  Beyond  these  six,  the 
major  must  include  at  least  two  addi- 
tional courses  from  among  those 
counting  toward  a  major  in  the 
departments  involved.  Any  prere- 
quisite courses  in  the  respective 
departments  (for  example:  English 
20,  21,  22,  23,  French  23,  German  33, 
34)  should  be  taken  during  the 
freshman  and  sophomore  years. 
Students  should  design  their  pro- 
grams in  consultation  with  a  faculty 
member  from  each  of  the  literatures 
concerned.  Programs  for  the  major 
must  be  approved  by  the  departments 
involved. 

MASS  COMMUNICATION 

Professor:  Anapol  (Chairman) 

The  major  in  mass  communication 
combines  a  liberal  arts  foundation 
with  a  professional  sequence  through 
a  selection  of  courses  from  the 
Departments  of  Art,  Business  Ad- 
ministration, English,  Political 
Science,  Psychology,  Sociology  and 
Anthropology,  and  Mass  Com- 
munication. It  also  draws  upon 
specialized  courses  from  the  Graphic 
Arts  Department  of  the  Williamsport 
Area  Community  College.  Students 
completing  the  program  are  qualified 
to  pursue  either  career  options  or 
graduate  study  in  mass  communica- 
tion, advertising,  broadcasting,  jour- 
nalism, or  public  relations. 

Students  majoring  in  the  Mass  Com- 
munication Department  must  com- 
plete the  Core  Curriculum  and  one  se- 
quence, as  well  as  the  College 
distribution  requirements. 

I.       THE  CORE  CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED  OF  ALL  STUDENTS 

Two  Theory  Courses 

MassCommlO      Introduction  to  Mass 

Communication 
MassComm30  Theories  of  Mass 

Communication 

A  Media  Regulation  Course 

MassComm31      Mass  Media  Law  and 
Regulation 


A  Production  Course  (Choice  of  one. 
Certain  of  these  courses  are  required  in 
specific  sequences.) 

CG0  511  Layout  and  Design 

CGO  5 1 2  Typographic  Composition 
Mass  Comm  24    Television  Production 

A  Writing  Course  (Choice  of  one.  Certain 
of  these  courses  are  required  in  specific 
sequences.) 

Eng  16  Writing  for  Special  Audiences 
Eng  18  Newswriting  for  the  Print  Media 
Eng  19     Newswriting  for  the  Broadcast 

Media 

PolSci34  Political  Newswriting 

Mass  Comm  27  Scriptwriting  for 

Radio  and  Television 

A  Research  Course  (Choice  of  one. 
Certain  of  these  courses  are  required  in 
specific  sequences.) 

PolSci48  Public  Opinion 

and  Polling 

Soc  47  Research  Methods 

in  Sociology 

Psy  32  or  Sensory  Experimental 

Psychology  or 

Psy  24  Social  Psychology 

Bus  45  Marketing  Research 

An    applied    Media  Experience    Course 

(Choice  of  one.) 

Mass  Comm  48-49  Practicum 

Mass  Comm  70-79  Internship 

Mass  Comm  80-89  Independent  Study 

NOTE:  Mass  Communication  core 
courses  may  be  utilized  both  to  meet  the 
core  requirements  and  to  complete  Se- 
quence requirements.  Since  some  core 
courses  must  be  used  to  meet  sequence  re- 
quirements, students  should  review 
carefully  sequence  requirements  in  selec- 
ting courses. 

II.     SEQUENCE  REQUIREMENTS 

Mass  Communication  majors  must  com- 
plete at  least  one  sequence.  All  sequence 
requirements  are  in  addition  to  the  core 
curriculum  but  the  same  course  may  be 
used  to  meet  the  core  requirements  as  well 
as  the  requirements  of  sequences. 

Advertising  Sequence: 

Bus  28-29  Marketing  Management 

Bus  32  Advertising 

PolSci48  Public  Opinion  and 

Polling  or 
Soc  47  Research  Methods  in 

Sociology 
GC0  511  Layout  and  Design 

GC0  512  Typographic  Composition 
Mass  Comm  1 1  Oral  Communication 
Art  27  Photography  I  or 

Art  15  Two-dimensional  Design 

Bus  47  Creative  Advertising  is 

strongly  recommended,  though  not 
required,  for  this  sequence. 


Broadcasting  Sequence: 

Eng  19  Newswriting  for  Broadcast 

Media 

Pol  Sci  34  Political  Newswriting 

Mass  Comm  1 1      Oral  Communication 

Mass  Comm  31  Mass  Media  Law 

and  Regulation 

Mass  Comm  28       Radio  Programming 

and  Production 

Mass  Comm  24    Television  Production 

Mass  Comm  27  Scriptwriting  for 

Radio  and  Television 

Eng  26  Film  and  Literature  or 

Thea  1 1  Introduction  to  Film 

Journalism  Sequence: 

Eng  16  Writing  for  Special 

Audiences 

Eng  17  Critical  Writing 

Eng  18        Newswriting  for  Print  Media 

Pol  Sci  34  Political  Newswriting 

Pol  Sci  1 1  State  and  Local 

Government 

Pol  Sci  32  Politics  of  Cities  and 

Suburbs  or 

Soc  34     Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 

Pol  Sci  48     Public  Opinion  and  Polling 

Art  27  Photography  ! 

CGO  5 1 1       Typographic  Composition 

Public  Relations  Sequence: 

Eng  16      Writing  for  Special  Audiences 

Eng  18        Newswriting  for  Print  Media 

Eng  37  Public  Relations  and 

Publicity 

Bus  28-29  Marketing  Management 

Pol  Sci  48  Public  Opinion  and 

Polling  or 

Soc  47  Research  Methods  in 

Sociology 

Art  27  Photography  I 

Mass  Comm  24    Television  Production 

Mass  Comm  1 1      Oral  Communication 


10  INTRODUCTION  TO  MASS 
COMMUNICATION 
Theories  of  the  process  of  mass  com- 
munication and  introduction  to  the  mass 
media;  attention  will  be  given  to  problems 
of  censorship  and  media  ethics.  Analysis 
of  the  mass  media's  impact  on  society; 
emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  social, 
psychological,  and  political  implications 
of  the  media's  shaping  influence  on  man 
and  institutions. 


1 1  FUNDAMENTALS  OF  ORAL 
COMMUNICATION 
The  dynamics  of  oral  communication. 
The  development  of  elementary  principles 
of  simple  oral  communication  through 
lectures,  prepared  assignments  in  speak- 
ing, and  informal  class  exercises.  Utilizes 
videotape  sequences  for  feedback  to 
students. 


41 


24      TELEVISION  PRODUCTION 

Technical,  aesthetic,  organizatonal,  and 
business  aspects  of  video  programs.  Study 
and  use  of  basic  equipment  to  produce 
standard  formats  on  videotape. 

27  SCRIPTWRITING  FOR 
RADIO  AND  TELEVISION 
Analysis  of  differences  between  radio  and 
television  writing  requirements,  station 
formats,  standard  program  forms,  script 
standards,  writing  and  criticism.  Alter- 
nate years. 

28  RADIO  PROGRAMMING 
AND  PRODUCTION 
Contemporary  broadcast  programming 
techniques  including  station  scheduling, 
program  development  and  analysis,  and 
implementation  in  real  and  hypothetical 
situations.  Emphasis  on  management 
functions.  Alternate  years. 

iO      THEORIES  OF 

MASS  COMMUNICATION 
An  examination  and  analysis  of  current 
theories  dealing  with  the  sources, 
receivers,  and  systems  of  mass  com- 
munication and  the  nature  and  function 
of  the  media  audience,  its  attitudes  and 
behaviors. 

31      MASS  MEDIA  LAW 

AND  REGULATION 
An  examination  of  the  legal  structure  and 
the  system  by  which  mass  communication 
is  controlled  in  this  society.  The  forces 
which  shape,  influence,  and  make  policy 
will  be  considered.  Cross-listed  as 
Political  Science  36. 

48-49  PRACTICUM  IN  MASS 
COMMUNICATION 
Utilization  of  mass  communication  prin- 
ciples, techniques,  and  skills  in  an  applied 
setting  through  work  experience  in  a  com- 
munication agency  or  organization.  This 
experience  is  coordinated  with  regular 
class  meetings  to  analyze  and  evaluate 
relationships  between  theory  and  practice. 
Prerequisite:  upper  division  status  and 
consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  usually  work  off  campus  in  a  field 
related  to  their  communications  sequence; 
some  may  work  with  the  student 
newspaper  or  radio  station. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Studies  involve  research  related  to  the 
communications  sequence  of  the  student. 


90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 
Through  special  arrangement,  the  follow- 
ing courses  offered  at  the  Williamsport 
Area  Community  College  are  available  to 
students  in  the  mass  communication  ma- 
jor only.  The  WACC  courses  are  taken  as 
part  of  the  student's  semester  schedule 
and  are  listed  with  Lycoming  offerings 
during  registration  periods. 

Graphic  Arts 

5 1 1  LAYOUT  AND  DESIGN 

Analysis  of  materials,  tools,  and  techni- 
ques used  in  preparation  of  copy  for 
reproduction;  paste-up  and  color  separa- 
tion overlays.  4  cr. 

512  TYPOGRAPHIC  COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals  of  typesetting.  Theory  and 
practice  in  the  care  and  use  of  composing 
machines,  both  hot  (mechanical)  and  cold 
(photo).  4  cr. 

521    PROCESS  CAMERA 

Concepts  and  techniques  of  darkroom 
procedure  for  reproduction  of  line  and 
halftone  copy  on  process  camera.  4  cr. 


MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 

Associate  Professors:  Getchell, 
Haley  (Chairman),  Hubbard 
Assistant  Professor:  Sprechini 
Instructors:  Murphy,  Troxel 
Part-time  Instructor:  Dotzel 

The  Department  of  Mathematical 
Sciences  offers  major  programs  in 
computer  science  and  mathematics. 

Computer  Science 

A  major  in  computer  science  consists 
of  11  courses:  Mathematics  18,  19, 
either  21  or  24,  and  Computer 
Science  15,  26,  27,  31,  37,  44,  45,  and 
46.  It  is  recommended  that  majors  in 
computer  science  take  Computer 
Science  15  in  the  freshman  year.  In 
addition,  the  following  cognate 
courses  are  recommended: 
Mathematics  13,  14,  20,  38,  Physics 
27,  Philosophy  19,  20,  and 
Psychology  37. 


2        COMPUTERS  IN  SOCIETY 

A  study  of  the  role  of  digital  computers  in 
society  today  with  primary  emphasis  on 
what  can  be  done,  rather  than  how  to  do 
it.  The  main  goal  of  the  course  is  to  make 
the  student  aware  of  the  growing  in- 
fluence which  computers  are  likely  to 
have  on  society  in  the  near  future. 
Students  with  credit  for  Mathematics  15 
may  not  receive  credit  for  this  course. 
One-half  unit  of  credit. 

15      INTRODUCTION  TO  COMPUTER 
SCIENCE 

Introduction  to  programming,  utilizing 
BASIC  and  FORTRAN  IV.  Topics  in- 
clude program  structure,  computer  con- 
figuration, memory  allocation, 
algorithms,  and  applications.  Includes 
laboratory  experience  on  the  PDP 11/70 
computer.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  ex- 
emption from  Mathematics  5. 

26  PRINCIPLES  OF  ADVANCED 
PROGRAMMING 

Principles  of  effective  programming  using 
PASCAL,  including  structured  program- 
ming, stepwise  refinement,  assertion  pro- 
ving, style,  debugging,  control  structure, 
decision  tables,  finite  state  machines, 
recursion,  and  encoding.  Prerequisite: 
Computer  Science  15. 

27  DATA  STRUCTURES 
Representation  of  data  and  algorithms 
associated  with  data  structures.  Topics  in- 
clude representation  of  lists,  trees,  graphs 
and  strings,  algorithms  for  searching  and 
sorting.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science 
26. 

31       INTRODUCTION  TO  NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data 
leading  to  interpolation,  numerical  in- 
tegration, numerical  solutions  of  differen- 
tial equations,  and  systems  of  equations. 
Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  15  and 
Mathematics  19.  Alternate  years.  Cross- 
listed  as  Mathematics  31. 

37      COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX 
ALGEBRA 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the 
algorithms  which  have  been  developed  for 
producing  numerical  solutions  to  such 
linear  algebraic  problems  as  solving 
systems  of  linear  equations,  inverting 
matrices,  computing  the  eigenvalues  of  a 
matrix,  and  solving  the  linear  least- 
squares  problem.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  15  and  Mathematics  19  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Alternate  years.  Cross- 
listed  as  Mathematics  3  7. 


42 


44  MACHINE  LANGUAGE 

Principles  of  machine  language  program- 
ming; computer  organization  and 
representation  of  numbers,  strings,  ar- 
rays, and  list  structures  at  the  machine 
level;  interrupt  programming,  relocatable 
code,  linking  loaders;  interfacing  with 
operating  systems.  Prerequisite:  Com- 
puter Science  26.  A  Iternate  years. 

45  SYSTEMS  PROGRAMMING 

The  emphasis  in  this  course  is  on  the 
algorithms  used  in  programming  the 
various  parts  of  a  computer  system.  These 
parts  include  assemblers,  loaders,  editors, 
interrupt  processors,  input/output 
schedulers,  processor  and  job  schedulers, 
and  memory  managers.  Prerequisite: 
Computer  Science  27  and  44.  Alternate 
years. 

46  COMPILER  CONSTRUCTION 

The  emphasis  in  this  course  is  on  the  con- 
struction of  translators  for  programming 
languages.  Topics  include  lexical  analysis, 
block  structure,  grammars,  parsing,  pro- 
gram representation,  and  run-time 
organization.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  27.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 

Mathematics 

A  major  in  mathematics  consists  of 
10  units  of  courses  in  the 
mathematical  sciences:  Computer 
Science  15,  Mathematics  18,  19,  20, 
24,  34,  42,  and  three  other 
mathematics  courses  numbered  above 
20.  Students  seeking  secondary  cer- 
tification in  mathematics  are  required 
to  complete  Mathematics  30  and  36 
and  are  advised  to  enroll  in 
Philosophy  17.  In  addition,  all  ma- 
jors are  advised  to  elect  Computer 
Science  15,  Philosophy  20  and  33, 
and  Astronomy/Physics  25  and  26. 

In  addition  to  the  regular  courses 
listed  below,  special  courses  are  occa- 
sionally available  on  an  independent- 
study  basis.  Recent  topics  include 
graph  theory,  discrete  probability,  ac- 
tuarial mathematics,  theory  of  games 
of  chance,  and  mathematics  physics. 


1        CONTINUOUS  MODELS 

A  survey  of  the  central  ideas  of  the  in- 
finitesimal calculus,  its  historical  develop- 
ment, and  some  of  its  modern  applica- 
tions. Students  with  credit  for 
Mathematics  9  or  18  may  not  receive 
credit  for  this  course.  One-half  unit  of 
credit. 

5  INDIVIDUALIZED  LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION  IN  BASIC  ALGEBRA 
A  self-paced  study  of  arithmetic  and 
decimal  numerals,  fractions,  the  real 
number  line,  factoring,  solutions  to  linear 
and  quadratic  equations,  graphs  of  linear 
and  quadratic  functions,  expressions  with 
rational  exponents,  algebraic  functions, 
exponential  functions,  and  inequalities. 
THIS  COURSE  IS  LIMITED  TO 
STUDENTS  PLACED  THEREIN  BY 
THE  MATHEMATICS  DEPART- 
MENT. One-half  unit  of  credit. 

7        MATHEMATICS  IN  ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION 

This  course  is  intended  for  prospective 
elementary-school  teachers  and  is  re- 
quired of  all  those  seeking  elementary  cer- 
tification. Topics  include  systems  of 
numbers  and  of  numeration,  computa- 
tional algorithms,  environmental  and 
transformation  geometry  measurement, 
and  mathematical  concept  formation. 
Observation  and  participation  in  Greater 
Williamsport  elementary  schools.  Core- 
quisite:  any  education  course  numbered 
40  or  above  which  is  specifically  required 
for  elementary  certification  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

9        INTRODUCTION  TO  CALCULUS 

An  intuitive  approach  to  the  calculus  con- 
cepts with  applications  to  business, 
biology,  and  social-science  problems.  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  completed 
Mathematics  18.  Prerequisite:  credit  for 
or  exemption  from  Mathematics  5.  Alter- 
nate years. 

12  FINITE  MATHEMATICS  FOR 
DECISION  MAKING 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  principal 
mathematical  models,  not  involving 
calculus,  which  are  used  in  business  ad- 
ministration, social  sciences,  and  opera- 
tions research.  The  course  will  include 
both  deterministic  models  such  as  graphs, 
networks,  linear  programming  and  voting 
models,  and  probabilistic  models  such  as 
Markov  chains  and  games.  Prerequisite: 
credit  for  or  exemption  from 
Mathematics  5. 

13  INTRODUCTION  TO  STATISTICS 
Empirical  distributions  of  measurements, 
probability     and     random     variables. 


discrete  and  continuous  probability 
distributions,  statistical  inference  from 
small  samples,  linear  regression  and  cor- 
relation, analysis  of  enumerative  data. 
Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  exemption  from 
Mathematics  5. 

14      MULTIVARIATE  STATISTICS 

The  study  of  statistical  techniques  used  in 
experimental  designs  involving  more  than 
two  random  variables.  Techniques  in- 
clude analysis  of  variance,  analysis  of 
covariance,  multiple  regression  and  cor- 
relation, introduction  to  factor  analysis, 
and  discriminative  analysis.  Extensive  use 
of  the  PDP1 1/70  computer  as  a  problem- 
solving  tool  will  be  included.  Prerequisite- 
Mathematics  13.  Alternate  years.  One- 
half  unit  of  credit. 

17  PRECALCULUS  MATHEMATICS 
The  study  of  logarithmic,  exponential, 
trigonometric,  polynomial,  and  rational 
functions,  their  graphs,  and  elementary 
properties.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  ex- 
emption from  Mathematics  5. 

18  CALCULUS  WITH  ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY  I 

Differentiation  of  algebraic  functions, 
graphing  plane  curves,  applications  to 
related  rate  and  extremal  problems,  in- 
tegration of  algebraic  functions,  areas  of 
plane  regions,  volumes  of  solids  or 
revolution,  and  other  applications.  Prere- 
quisite: a  grade  of  C  or  belter  in 
Mathematics  17  or  its  equivalent  or  con- 
sent of  instructor. 

19  CALCULUS  WITH  ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY  II 

Differentiation  and  integration  of 
transcendental  functions,  parametric 
equations,  polar  coordinates,  the  conic 
sections  and  their  applications,  infinite  se- 
quences, and  series  expansions.  Prere- 
quisite: a  grade  of  C  or  better  in 
Mathematics  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

20  MULTIVARIATE  CALCULUS  WITH 
MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

Vectors,  linear  transformations  and  their 
matrix  representations,  determinants, 
matrix  inversion,  solutions  to  systems  of 
linear  equations,  differentiation  and  in- 
tegration of  multivariate  functions,  vector 
field  theory  and  applications.  Prere- 
quisite: a  grade  of  C  or  better  in 
Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor. 

21  DIFFERENTIAL  EQUATIONS 

A  study  of  ordinary  differential  equations 
and  their  applications:  first-order  linear 
differential  equations,  the  Picard  Ex- 
istence Theorem,  solution  by  separation 
of    variables,     solution     by     numerical 


43 


methods;  second-order  linear  differential 
equations,  solution  by  variation  of 
parameters,  solution  by  power  series, 
solution  by  Laplace  transforms;  system  of 
first-order  equation,  solutions  by  eigen- 
values; qualitative  theory,  stability  theory 
asymptotic  behavior,  and  the  Poincare- 
Bendixon  theorem.  Besides  the  usual  ap- 
plications in  physics  and  engineering,  con- 
siderable attention  will  be  given  tc 
modern  applications  in  the  social  and  life 
sciences.  Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or  bel- 
ter in  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. A  llernate  years. 

23  COMPLEX  VARIABLES 

Complex  numbers,  analytic  functions, 
complex  integration,  Cauchy's  theorems 
and  their  applications.  Corequisite: 
Mathematics  20.  Alternate  years. 

24  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MATHEMATICS 
Topics  regularly  included  are  the  nature 
of  mathematical  systems,  essentials  of 
logical  reasoning,  and  axiomatic  founda- 
tions of  set  theory.  Other  topics  frequent- 
ly included  are  approaches  to  the  concepts 
of  infinity  and  continuity,  and  the  con- 
struction of  the  real  number  system.  The 
course  serves  as  a  bridge  from  the  elemen- 
tary calculus  to  advanced  courses  in 
algebra  and  analysis.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor. 

30  TOPICS  OF  GEOMETRY 

An  axiomatic  treatment  of  Euclidean 
geometry,  and  an  introduction  to  related 
geometries.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  18. 
A  Iternale  years. 

31  INTRODUCTION  TO  NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data 
leading  to  interpolation,  numerical  in- 
tegration, numerical  solutions  of  differen- 
tial equations,  and  systems  of  equations. 
Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  IS  and 
Mathematics  19.  Alternate  years.  Cross- 
listed  as  Computer  Science  31. 

32-33  MATHEMATICAL  STATISTICS  I-II 
A  study  of  probability,  discrete  and  con- 
tinuous random  variables,  expected 
values  and  moments,  sampling,  point 
estimation,  sampling  distributions,  inter- 
val estimation,  test  of  hypotheses,  regres- 
sion and  linear  hypotheses,  experimental 
design  models.  Corequisite:  Mathematics 
20.  A  llernate  years. 

34      MODERN  ALGEBRA 

An  integrated  approach  to  groups,  rings. 
fields,  and  vector  spaces  and  functions 
which  preserve  their  structure.  Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics  24. 


36  CONCEPTS  OF  MATHEMATICS  IN 
SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

A  course  designed  for  mathematics  ma- 
jors who  are  planning  to  teach  at  the 
secondary  level.  Emphasis  will  be  placed 
on  the  mathematics  that  form  the  founda- 
tion of  secondary  mathematics.  Ideas  will 
be  presented  to  familiarize  the  student 
with  various  curriculum  proposals,  to 
provide  for  innovation  within  the  existing 
curriculum,  and  to  expand  the  boundaries 
of  the  existing  curriculum.  Open  only  to 
junior  and  senior  mathematics  majors 
enrolled  in  the  secondary-education  pro- 
gram. Alternate  years. 

37  COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX 
ALGEBRA 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the 
algorithms  which  have  been  developed  for 
producing  numerical  solutions  to  such 
linear  algebraic  problems  as  solving 
systems  of  linear  equations,  inverting 
matrices,  computing  the  eigenvalues  of  a 
matrix,  and  solving  the  linear  least 
squares  problem.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  15  and  Mathematics  19  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Alternate  years.  Cross- 
listed  as  Computer  Science  3  7. 

38  OPERATIONS  RESEARCH 
Queuing  theory,  including  simulation 
techniques;  optimization  theory,  in- 
cluding linear  programming,  integer  pro- 
gramming, and  dynamic  programming; 
game  theory,  including  two-person  zero- 
sum  games,  cooperative  games,  and 
multiperson  games.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  12  or  Mathematics  20. 
A  llernate  years. 

42      REAL  ANALYSIS 

A  rigorous  analysis  of  the  basic  concepts 
of  real  variable  calculus;  the  real  number 
system  as  a  complete,  ordered  field;  the 
topology  of  Euclidean  space,  compact 
sets,  the  Heine-Borel  Theorem;  continui- 
ty; the  Intermediate  Value  Theorem; 
derivatives,  the  Mean  Value  Theorem; 
Riemann  integrals,  the  Fundamental 
Theorem  of  Calculus;  infinite  series,  and 
Taylor's  theorem.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  24. 

48      SEMINAR 

Topics  in  modern  mathematics  of  current 
interest  to  the  instructor.  A  different  topic 
is  selected  each  semester.  This  semester  is 
designed  to  provide  junior  and  senior 
mathematics  majors  and  other  qualified 
students  with  more  than  the  usual  oppor- 
tunity for  concentrated  and  cooperative 
inquiry.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One-half  unit  of  credit.  This  course 
may  he  repeated  for  credit. 


70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 


MUSIC 

Assistant  Professors:  Boerckel,  Jex, 
Thayer  (Chairman) 
Part-time  Instructors:  Gallup,  Lakey, 
Nacinovich,  Russell,  Serang 

The  music  major  is  required  to  take  a 
balanced  program  of  theory,  applied 
music,  music  history,  and  music 
ensemble.  A  minimum  of  eight 
courses  (exclusive  of  applied  music 
and  ensemble)  is  required,  and  these 
must  include  Music  10,  11,  17,  22, 
and  any  two  from  35,  36,  37,  38. 
Music  17  is  not  required  of  the  music 
major  who  completes  Music  35,  36, 
37,  and  38.  Each  major  must  par- 
ticipate in  an  ensemble  (Music  68 
and/or  69)  and  take  one  hour  of  ap- 
plied music  per  week  for  a  minimum 
of  four  semesters.  (See  Music  60-66). 
The  major  must  include  at  least  one- 
half  hour  of  piano  in  the  applied  pro- 
gram unless  a  piano  proficiency  test  is 
requested  and  passed.  Anyone  declar- 
ing music  as  a  second  major  must  do 
so  by  the  beginning  of  the  junior 
year. 


10-11     MUSIC  THEORY  I  AND  II 

A  two-semester  course  open  to  all 
students.  An  examination  of  the  fun- 
damental components  and  theoretical 
concepts  of  music.  The  student  will 
develop  musicianship  through  application 
of  applied  skills.  (Music  10  is  prerequi\itc 
to  Music  III. 

16  INTRODUCTION  TO  MUSIC 

A  basic  course  in  the  materials  and  techni- 
ques of  music.  Examples  drawn  from 
various  periods  and  styles  are  designed  to 
enhance  perception  and  appreciation 
through  careful  and  informed  listening. 

17  SURVEY  OF  WESTERN  MUSIC 

A  chronological  survey  of  Western  music 
from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the  present  for 
the  major  or  non-major. 


44 


18  AMERICAN  MUSIC  I 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in 
studying  all  types  of  American  music, 
from  pre-Revolutionary  days  through 
World  War  I.  Areas  explored  will  include 
Indian,  African,  and  European  roots  in- 
fluencing the  serious  music  for  small  and 
large  ensembles,  the  development  of  show 
music  from  minstrels  to  Broadway 
musicals,  the  evolution  of  "Tin  Pan 
Alley,"  and  the  beginnings  of  jazz.  Alter- 
nate years. 

19  AMERICAN  MUSIC  II 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in 
studying  all  types  of  American  music. 
American  Music  II  will  cover  post- World 
War  I  days  to  the  present.  Areas  explored 
will  include  indigenous  serious  music  for 
small  and  large  ensembles,  the  mature 
Broadway  musical,  the  evolution  of  jazz, 
the  development  of  rock,  and  the  fusion 
of  musical  styles  in  the  1970's.  Alternate 
years. 

20-21     MUSIC  THEORY  III  AND  IV 

A  continuation  of  the  integrated  theory 
course  moving  toward  newer  uses  of 
music  materials.  Prerequisite:  Music  11. 
Alternate  years. 

22     ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  I 

Largely  a  non-technical  introduction  to 
electronic  music  designed  for  the  major 
and  non-major.  The  course  traces  the 
development  of  electronic  music,  in- 
troduces the  student  to  simple  tape- 
splicing  and  recorder  manipulation,  and 
progresses  to  the  present-day  synthesizer 
and  multitrack  techniques.  Students  will 
work  collectively  and  individually  in  the 
electronic  studios.  Alternate  years. 

30  COMPOSITION 

Creative  writing  in  smaller  vocal  and  in- 
strumental forms.  The  beginning  of  the 
course  requires  students  to  indentify  and 
use  the  techniques  developed  by  major 
composers  of  the  20th  century.  Students 
begin  developing  a  personal  style  of  com- 
position in  the  remainder  of  the  semester. 
One  composition  by  each  class  member 
will  be  presented  in  a  New  Works  recital 
toward  the  end  of  the  semester.  Prere- 
quisite: Music  10-11  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. A  Iternate  years. 

31  CONDUCTING 

A  study  of  the  fundamentals  of  conduc- 
ting with  frequent  opportunity  for  prac- 
tical experience.  The  College  music 
organizations  serve  to  make  performance 
experience  possible.  Prerequisite:  Music 
10-11  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 


33     ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  II 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  Moog  syn- 
thesizer, including  alternating  and  direct 
current,  signal  generators  and  the 
characteristics  of  their  waveforms,  con- 
trol voltage  and  its  sources,  the  transient 
and  periodic  modulations.  Basic  mixing 
and  filtering  techniques  will  be  examined. 
Students  will  be  assigned  studio  hours  to 
complete  the  recording  assignments. 
Prerequisite:  Music  22.  Alternate  years. 

35  MUSIC  HISTORY  TO  J.S.  BACH 

A  survey  of  Western  music  from 
Gregorian  chant  to  the  masterworks  of 
Handel  and  Bach.  Church  music  of  the 
Middle  Ages,  Renaissance,  and  Baroque 
periods  is  of  primary  importance  with  the 
origins  of  instrumental  music  and  opera 
receiving  secondary  consideration.  Prere- 
quisite: Music  17  or  consent  of  instructor. 
A  Iternate  years. 

36  MUSIC  HISTORY  OF  THE 
18TH  CENTURY 

The  symphonies,  operas,  chamber  music, 
and  piano  works  of  Haydn,  Mozart,  and 
Beethoven  are  studied  within  the  social 
and  cultural  climate  of  late  18th  century 
Europe.  Rococo  music  in  France  and  Italy 
will  be  considered  with  the  expressive  style 
of  Germany  and  Austria.  Prerequisite: 
Music  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

37  MUSIC  OF  THE  19TH  CENTURY 

A  study  of  the  music  of  the  Romantic 
period  with  emphasis  on  Beethoven, 
Schubert,  Chopin,  Berlioz,  Liszt, 
Schumann,  Brahms,  Wagner,  Verdi, 
Tchaikovsky,  and  others.  Close  examina- 
tion of  short  lyric  forms,  program  music, 
opera,  and  the  sonata  genre.  Prerequisite: 
Music  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  A  Iter- 
nate years. 

38  MUSIC  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 
Beginning  with  Debussy,  Strauss,  Mahler, 
and  Sibelius,  the  course  traces  some  of  the 
main  currents  in  the  music  of  our  time. 
Emphasis  given  to  such  composers  as 
Stravinsky,  Bartok,  Ives,  Shostakovich, 
Berg,  Gershwin,  and  others.  Prerequisite: 
Music  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

39  ORCHESTRATION 

A  study  of  modern  orchestral  instruments 
and  examination  of  their  use  by  the  great 
masters  with  practical  problems  in  in- 
strumentation. The  College  music 
organizations  serve  to  make  performance 
experience  possible.  Prerequisite:  Music 
10-11  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 


40     COUNTERPOINT 

A  study  of  the  five  species  in  two-,  three- 
and  four-part  writing.  Emphasis  is  placed 
upon  the  16th  century  writing  style.  Prere- 
quisite: Music  10-11  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Alternate  years. 

42  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  III 

An  introduction  to  acoustic  theory,  echo 
technique,  location  modulation,  applica- 
tion of  equalization,  phasing,  and 
microphones.  The  student  will  write  and 
perform  an  electronic  composition  utiliz- 
ing real-time  networks.  Prerequisite: 
Music  33.  Alternate  years. 

43  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  IV 

A  study  of  major  compositions  and 
genres  of  electronic  music.  The  student 
will  complete  an  original  composition 
based  upon  a  study  of  these  techniques 
and  forms.  Prerequisite:  Music  42.  Alter- 
nate years. 


Applied  Music  and  Ensemble 

The  study  of  performance  in  piano, 
voice,  organ,  strings,  woodwinds, 
and  percussion  is  designed  to  develop 
sound  technique  and  a  knowledge  of 
the  appropriate  literature  for  the  in- 
strument. Student  recitals  offer  op- 
portunities to  gain  experience  in 
public  performance.  Music  majors 
and  other  students  qualified  in  per- 
formance may  present  formal 
recitals. 

Credit  for  applied  music  courses 
(private  lessons)  and  ensemble  (choir 
and  band)  is  earned  on  a  fractional 
basis.  For  a  description  of  this,  see 
page  9.  An  applied  course  or  ensem- 
ble should  NOT  be  substituted  for  an 
academic  course,  but  should  in  every 
case  be  in  addition  to  the  normal  four 
academic  courses. 

Extra  fees  apply  for  private  lessons 
(Music  60-66)  as  follows: 
$90  per  semester  for  a  half-hour 
lesson  per  week.  Private  lessons  are 
given  for  13  weeks. 
60  Piano  61  Voice  62  Strings  63 
Organ  64  Brass  65  Woodwinds  66 
Percussion 

68      CHORAL  ENSEMBLE 
(CHOIR) 

Participation    in    the    College    choir    is 
designed  to  enable  any  student  possessing 

45 


at  least  average  talent  an  opportunity  to 
study  choral  technique.  Emphasis  is  plac- 
ed upon  acquaintance  with  choral 
literature,  tone  production,  diction,  and 
phrasing.  Students  desiring  credit  for 
choir  are  allowed  a  maximum  of  one  hour 
per  semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in 
choir  and  not  band  should  elect  Music 
68-B  (one  hour  credit).  Students  enrolled 
in  both  band  and  choir  should  elect  68-A 
and  69-A  (one-half  hour  in  each). 

69     INSTRUMENTAL  ENSEMBLE 
(BAND) 

The  College  band  allows  students  with 
some  instrumental  experience  to  become 
acquainted  with  good  band  literature  and 
develop  personal  musicianship  through 
participation  in  group  instrumental  activi- 
ty. Students  desiring  credit  for  ensemble 
are  allowed  a  maximum  of  one  hour  per 
semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in 
band,  but  not  choir,  should  elect  Music 
69-B  (one  hour  credit).  A  student  enrolled 
in  both  band  and  choir  should  elect  68-A 
and  69-A  (one-half  hour  in  each). 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  Index) 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
FOR  DEPARTMENTAL 
HONORS  (See  Index) 


NEAR  EAST  CULTURE  AND 
ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor:  Guerra  (Coordinator) 

The  Near  East  Culture  and  Ar- 
chaeology interdisciplinary  major  is 
designed  to  acquaint  students  with 
the  "cradle  of  Western  civilization," 
both  in  its  ancient  and  modern 
aspects.  Majors  will  complete  a 
minimum  of  eight  to  10  courses 
related  to  the  Near  East. 

Required  courses  are  described  in 
their  departmental  sections  and  in- 
clude: 

I.     Four    courses    (semesters)    in 
language  and  cultural  from: 
History  and  Culture  of  the  An- 
cient Near  East  (Religion  28) 
History  of  Art  (Art  22) 
Ancient  History  (History  20) 
Old  Testament  Faith  and  History 
(Religion  13) 

46 


Judaism  and  Islam  (Religion  24) 
Two  semesters  of  foreign 
language  (Hebrew  1,  2  or  Greek 
1,2) 

2.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  ar- 
chaeology from: 

Bible,  Archaeology  and  Faith 
(Religion  46) 

Special  Archaeology  courses, 
such  as  independent  studies  or  in 
May  term  or  summer  sessions  in 
the  Near  East. 

3.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  the 
cooperating  departments  (art, 
history,  political  science,  religion 
and  sociology-anthropology)  or 
related  departments.  These  two 
courses,  usually  taken  in  the 
junior  or  senior  years,  can  be  in- 
dependent study.  Topics  should 
be  related  either  to  the  ancient  or 
the  modern  Near  East  and  must 
be  approved  in  advance  by  the 
committee  supervising  the  inter- 
disciplinary program.  The  study 
of  modern  Arabic  or  Hebrew  is 
encouraged. 

Other  courses  may  be  suggested  by 
the  supervisory  committee  within  the 
limits  of  a  10-course  major.  The 
number  of  courses  taken  within  this 
program  applicable  toward  fulfilling 
the  College  distribution  requirements 
will  vary  according  to  the  selection  of 
courses. 


NURSING 

Professor:  Rodgers  (Chairman) 
Instructor:  Pagana 

Students  wishing  to  major  in  nursing 
will  be  admitted  to  the  College  under 
the  usual  admission  standards  and  be 
classified  as  "Pre-Nursing."  To  be 
considered  for  admission  to  the 
Department  of  Nursing,  freshmen 
should  follow  the  nursing  curriculum 
for  the  freshman  year  in  the  sequence 
designated.  A  supplementary  applica- 
tion must  be  submitted  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  Nursing  by  March  1  of  the 
freshman    year.     Students    will    be 


notified  by  letter  of  their  admission 
status  no  later  than  April  1 . 

The  major  in  nursing  consists  of: 
Nursing  20,  21,  30,  31,  32,  33,  34,  35, 
36,  40,  41,  42,  and  43  or  80-89.  In  ad- 
dition, the  following  are  required 
prerequisites  for  specific  nursing 
courses:  Chemistry  8,  15,  Biology 
13-14,  26,  Psychology  10,  17, 
Mathematics  13  and  Computer 
Science  15.  The  religion/philosophy 
distribution  requirement  is  met  by  the 
required  courses:  Philosophy  19  and 
Religion  20.  The  history/social 
science  distribution  requirement  is 
met  by  the  required  courses: 
Psychology  10  and  17.  In  addition, 
the  student  is  required  to  take  one 
course  from  among  Sociology/ An- 
thropology 10,  14,  16,  20,  or  28.  The 
fine  arts/foreign  language  distribu- 
tion requirement  can  be  met  by  two 
courses  in  one  department  from 
among  art,  literature,  music,  theatre, 
or  in  foreign  language  on  the  in- 
termediate or  higher  course  level. 

A  grade  of  C  or  better  is  required  in 
all  clinical  nursing  courses  in  order  to 
continue  in  the  nursing  program. 
These  courses  are  Nursing  21,  30,  31, 
32,  33,  36,  40  and  41. 

Unless  otherwise  indicated,  nursing 
courses  are  open  only  to  nursing  ma- 
jors. 


20  CONCEPTS  OF  NUTRITION  IN 
FAMILY  HEALTH 

Essentials  of  normal  nutrition  and  their 
relationship  to  the  health  of  individuals 
and  families.  These  concepts  serve  as  a 
basis  for  the  development  of  an 
understanding  of  therapeutic  application 
of  dietary  principles  and  the  health  pro- 
fessional's role  and  responsibility  in  this 
facet  of  client  care.  Three  hours  of  lec- 
ture. Three-quarter  unit.  Prerequisites: 
Chemistry  8.  15,  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Open  to  non-nursing  majors. 

21  FOUNDATIONS  OF  PROFESSIONAL 
NURSING  PRACTICE 
Introduction  of  major  theoretical 
elements  underlying  professional  nursing 
practice.  Focus  on  the  concept  of  health 
and  common  health  problems  recognizing 
the  multidirectional  influence  of  the  in- 
dividual, family,  and  environment.  In  this 
first  clinical  course  the  student  will  utilize 


the  nursing  process  in  assisting  clients  to 
attain  a  maximum  level  of  functioning. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  five  hours 
clinical  laboratory.  VA  units.  Prere- 
quisites: Chemistry  8,  15,  and  Biology  13. 

30-31     NURSING  CARE 

OF  THE  DEVELOPING  FAMILY 
Examination  of  health  and  nursing  needs 
of  beginning  and  developing  families. 
Emphasis  on  nursing  needs  of  mothers 
and  infants  within  the  family  unit  as  well 
as  the  common  health  problems  of 
children  through  adolescence.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  seven  and  one-half 
hours  clinical  laboratory,  VA  units. 
Prerequisite  for  Nursing  30:  Nursing  21, 
Biology  14  and  26.  Prerequisite  for  Nurs- 
ing 31:  Nursing  30. 

32-33  NURSING  CARE  OF  THE  ADULT 
Identification  of  adult  health  care  needs 
and  implementation  of  nursing  activities 
based  on  an  understanding  of  growth  and 
development,  pathophysiology,  com- 
munication skills,  interpersonal  dynamics 
and  psychosocial  interventions.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  7'A  hours  clinical 
laboratory.  VA  units.  Prerequisite  for 
Nursing  32:  Nursing  21,  Biology  14  and 
26.  Prerequisite  for  Nursing  33:  Nursing 
32. 

34  BASIC  CONCEPTS  OF 
PHARMACOLOGY  AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals  of  pharmacology  and 
therapeutics  are  presented  for  the  various 
classes  of  drugs.  Relationship  of  phar- 
macological mechanisms  to  the  affected 
biochemical  and  physiological  processes. 
Interactions  and  toxicologic  aspects  of 
drug  therapy  are  reviewed.  Four  hours  of 
lecture.  One  unit.  Corequisite:  Nursing 
30,  32,  or  permission  of  instructor.  Open 
to  non-nursing  majors. 

35  RESEARCH  IN  NURSING 
Expansion  of  theoretical  basis  of  research 
methodology  with  emphasis  on  analyzing, 
criticizing  and  interpreting  nursing 
research.  Development  of  a  research  pro- 
posal focusing  on  a  nursing  problem. 
Four  hours  of  lecture.  One  unit.  Prere- 
quisites: Mathematics  13,  Computer 
Science  15,  and  Nursing  30  and  32. 

36  THE  NURSE  IN  THE 
SOCIAL  SYSTEM 

Seminar  discussions  and  clinical 
laboratory  using  the  hospital  as  a  pro- 
totype. Theories  of  social  systems.  Ex- 
amination of  induction  into  the  hospital 
system.  Evaluation  of  standards  of  care. 
Focus  on  utilization  of  change  theory. 
Twelve  hours  of  lecture  and  96  hours 


clinical  laboratory.  One  unit.  Prere- 
quisites: Nursing  31,  33.  Required  for  the 
nursing  major  and  offered  only  in  May 
term. 

40  NURSING  CARE  OF  THE 
EMOTIONALLY  TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL  AND  FAMILY 
Examination  of  disturbed  human   rela- 
tionships with  focus  on  intrapsychic,  in- 
terpersonal and  physiologic  etiology.  Em- 
phasis  on   advanced   therapeutic   nurse- 
patient   relationships   within   context   of 
family,    community,    and    health    care 
systems.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  7 'A 
hours    clinical    laboratory.     l'A     units. 
Prerequisites:  Nursing  31,  33,  36. 

41  COMPREHENSIVE  NURSING  CARE 
Culminating  nursifig  course  with  focus  on 
utilizing  nursing  theory  in  a  choice  of 
clinical  settings.  Seminars  will  provide  op- 
portunities for  students  to  share  com- 
monalities and  unique  aspects  of  profes- 
sional practice.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and 
7 A  hours  clinical  laboratory.  l'A  units. 
Prerequisites:  Nursing  36,  40. 

42  PROFESSIONAL  ISSUES 

An  analysis  of  nursing  issues  in  the  con- 
text of  the  historical  background  of  the 
profession,  the  social  forces  which  in- 
fluence nursing,  and  nursing's  impact 
upon  society.  Two  hour  seminar.  One- 
half  unit.  Prerequisite:  Senior  standing. 

43  TOPICS  IN  NURSING 

Selected  topic  courses  in  nursing  designed 
to  permit  students  to  pursue  subjects 
which,  because  of  their  specialized  nature, 
may  not  be  offered  on  a  regular  basis. 
One-half  unit.  Prerequisite:  Senior  stan- 
ding. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
IN  NURSING 
An  opportunity  to  develop  and  implement 
an  individual  plan  of  study  under  faculty 
guidance.  One-half  unit.  Prerequisite: 
Senior  standing  or  permission  of  the 
chairman. 


PHILOSOPHY 

Associate  Professors:  Griffith 

(Chairman),  Whelan 
Assistant  Professor:  Herring 

The  study  of  philosophy  develops  a 
critical  understanding  of  the  basic 
concepts  and  presuppositions  around 
which  we  organize  our  thought  in 
science,  religion,  education,  morality, 


the  arts,  and  other  human  enter- 
prises. A  major  in  philosophy, 
together  with  appropriate  other 
courses,  can  provide  an  excellent 
preparation  for  policy-making  posi- 
tions of  many  kinds,  for  graduate 
study  in  several  fields,  and  for  careers 
in  education,  law,  and  the  ministry. 
The  major  in  philosophy  consists  of 
at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or 
above,  of  which  six  must  be 
numbered  20  or  above  and  must  in- 
clude 21  or  23,  22  or  24,  and  49.  In 
addition  to  the  courses  listed  below, 
special  courses  are  often  offered. 

5        PRACTICAL  REASONING 

A  general  introduction  to  topics  in  logic 
and  their  application  to  practical  reason- 
ing, with  primary  emphasis  on  detecting 
fallacies,  evaluating  inductive  reasoning, 
and  understanding  the  rudiments  of  scien- 
tific method. 

10      INTRODUCTION  TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL  PROBLEMS 

An  introductory  course  designed  to  show 
the  nature  of  philosophy  by  examination 
of  several  examples  of  problems  which 
have  received  extended  attention  in 
philosophical  literature.  These  topics 
often  include  the  relation  of  the  mind  to 
the  body,  the  possibility  of  human 
freedom,  arguments  about  the  existence 
of  God,  the  conditions  of  knowledge,  and 
the  relation  of  language  to  thought.  Some 
attention  is  also  given  to  the  principles  of 
acceptable  reasoning. 

14  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PERSONAL 
CHOICE 

An  introductory  philosophical  examina- 
tion of  a  number  of  contemporary  moral 
issues  which  call  for  personal  decision. 
Topics  often  investigated  include:  the 
"good"  life,  obligation  to  others,  sexual 
ethics,  abortion,  suicide  and  death, 
violence  and  pacifism,  obedience  to  the 
law,  the  relevance  of  personal  beliefs  to 
morality.  Discussion  centers  on  some  of 
the  suggestions  philosophers  have  made 
about  how  to  make  such  decisions. 

15  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PUBLIC  POLICY 

An  introductory  philosophical  examina- 
tion of  the  moral  and  conceptual  dimen- 
sion of  various  contemporary  public 
issues,  such  as  the  relation  of  ethics  to 
politics  and  the  law,  the  enforcement  of 
morals,  the  problems  of  fair  distribution 
of  goods  and  opportunities,  the 
legitimacy  of  restricting  the  use  of  natural 
resources,  and  the  application  of  ethics  to 


47 


business  practice.  Discussion  centers  on 
some  of  the  suggestions  philosophers  have 
made  about  how  to  deal  with  these  issues. 

16     ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN  BUSINESS 

An  introductory  philosophical  examina- 
tion of  a  variety  of  moral  problems  that 
arise  concerning  the  American  business 
system.  Included  are  a  systematic  con- 
sideration of  typical  moral  problems  fac- 
ed by  individuals  and  an  examination  of 
common  moral  criticisms  of  the  business 
system  itself. 


17  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES 
IN  EDUCATION 

An  examination  of  the  basic  concepts  in- 
volved in  thought  about  education,  and  a 
consideration  of  the  various  methods  for 
justifying  educational  proposals.  Typical 
of  the  issues  discussed  are:  Are  education 
and  indoctrination  different?  What  is  a 
liberal  education?  Are  education  and 
schooling  compatible?  What  do  we  need 
to  learn?  Alternate  years. 

18  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN 
CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

An  introductory  examination  of  various 
philosophical  issues  and  concepts  which 
are  of  special  importance  in  legal  con- 
texts. Discussion  includes  both  general 
topics,  such  as  the  justification  of  punish- 
ment, and  more  specific  topics,  such  as 
the  insanity  defense  and  the  rights  of  the 
accused.  Readings  are  arranged  topically 
and  include  both  classical  and  contem- 
porary sources. 

19  ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN 
BIOLOGY  AND  MEDICINE 

A  philosophical  investigation  of  some  of 
the  ethical  issues  which  arise  as  a  result  of 
contemporary  medical  and  biological 
technology.  Typical  of  these  issues  are 
euthanasia,  behavior  control,  patient 
rights,  experimentation  on  humans,  fetal 
research,  abortion,  genetic  engineering, 
population  control,  and  distribution  of 
health  resources. 

20  SYMBOLIC  LOGIC 

A  study  of  modern  symbolic  logic  and  its 
application  to  the  analysis  of  arguments. 
Included  are  truth-functional  relations, 
the  logic  of  propositional  functions,  and 
deductive  systems.  Attention  is  also  given 
to  various  topics  in  the  philosophy  of 
logic. 

21  ANCIENT  GREEK  ETHICAL  AND 
POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 
An    examination    of    the    ethical    and 
political  views  of  Socrates,   Plato,   and 
Aristotle.  Considerable  attention  is  paid 
to  the  relationship  between  these  views 


and  the  social  and  intellectual  milieu  out 
of  which  they  developed.  However,  the 
primary  emphasis  is  on  understanding  the 
philosophical  issues  raised  in  selected 
Aristotelian  and  Platonic  texts.  Prere- 
quisite: freshmen  must  have  instructor's 
permission.  Alternate  years. 

22  HISTORY  OF  MODERN 
POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

An  historical  survey  of  the  most  impor- 
tant social  and  political  philosophers  of 
the  modern  period.  Particular  attention  is 
paid  to  the  social  contract  theories  of 
Hobbes,  Locke,  and  Rousseau,  and  some 
consideration  will  be  given  to  the  political 
philosophies  of  Hegel,  Marx,  and  Mill. 
Prerequisite:  freshmen  must  have  instruc- 
tor's permission.  Alternate  years. 

23  ANCIENT  GREEK  SCIENCE 
AND  METAPHYSICS 

An  historical  survey  of  the  first  attempt 
to  understand  the  physical  universe 
scientifically.  Particular  attention  is  paid 
to  the  common  origins  of  philosophy  and 
science  in  the  works  of  the  pre-Platonic 
philosophers,  to  the  question  of  how 
scientific  and  philosophical  thinking  is 
distinct  from  mythological  and 
technological  thinking,  and  to  the  interac- 
tion between  philosophy  and  science  in 
formulating  the  fundamental  problems 
about  the  physical  universe  and  in 
developing  and  criticizing  the  various  con- 
cepts introduced  in  attempts  to  solve 
those  problems.  Prerequisite:  freshmen 
must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alter- 
nate years. 

24  EARLY  MODERN  SCIENCE 
AND  METAPHYSICS 
An  historical  survey  of  the  early  modern 
attempt  to  understand  the  physical 
universe.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to 
the  continuities  and  discontinuities  bet- 
ween early  modern  science  and 
metaphysics  and  ancient  Greek  science 
and  metaphysics,  to  the  rationalism- 
empiricism  dispute  in  science  and 
metaphysics,  and  to  the  interaction  bet- 
ween philosophy  and  science  in  for- 
mulating fundamental  questions  about 
the  physical  universe  and  in  developing 
and  criticizing  concepts  designed  to 
answer  them.  Prerequisite:  freshmen  must 
have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate 
years. 

31      PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN 

CONTEMPORARY  PSYCHOLOGY 
Theories  in  psychology  which  attempt  to 
explain  human  behavior  seem  to  conflict 
in  various  ways  with  religion,  with  com- 
mon ideas  about  morality,  and  with  com- 
monsensical  ways  of  explaining  human 


behavior.  This  course  examines  some  of 
those  conflicts  philosophically.  Prere- 
quisite: students  without  previous  study  in 
philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permis- 
sion. Alternate  years. 

32  PHILOSOPHY  OF  RELIGION 

A  philosophical  examination  of  religion. 
Included  are  such  topics  as  the  nature  of 
religious  discourse,  arguments  for  and 
against  the  existence  of  God,  and  the  rela- 
tion between  religion  and  science. 
Readings  from  classical  and  contem- 
porary sources.  Prerequisite:  students 
without  previous  study  in  philosophy 
must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alter- 
nate years. 

33  PHILOSOPHY  OF  NATURAL 
SCIENCE 

A  consideration  of  philosophically  impor- 
tant conceptual  problems  arising  from 
reflection  about  natural  science,  including 
such  topics  as  the  nature  of  scientific  laws 
and  theories,  the  character  of  explana- 
tion, the  import  of  prediction,  the  ex- 
istence of  "non-observable"  theoretical 
entities  such  as  electrons  and  genes,  the 
problem  of  justifying  induction,  and 
various  puzzles  associated  with  probabili- 
ty. Prerequisite:  students  without 
previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have 
instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

34  SOCIAL  AND  POLITICAL 
PHILOSOPHY 

A  systematic  philosophical  investigation 
of  the  relation  between  human  nature  and 
the  proper  social  and  political  order. 
Topics  studied  include  the  purpose  of 
government,  the  nature  of  legitimate 
authority,  the  foundation  of  human 
rights,  and  the  limits  of  human  freedom. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  logic  of  social 
and  political  thought  and  on  the  analysis 
of  basic  principles  and  concepts.  Prere- 
quisite: students  without  previous 
philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permis- 
sion. 

35  ETHICAL  THEORY 

An  inquiry  concerning  the  grounds  which 
distinguish  morally  right  from  morally 
wrong  actions.  Central  to  the  course  is 
critical  consideration  of  the  proposals  and 
the  rationale  of  relativists,  egoists, 
utilitarians,  and  other  ethical  theorists. 
Various  topics  in  metaethics  are  also  in- 
cluded. Prerequisite:  students  without 
previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have 
instructor's  permission. 


48 


49      DEPARTMENTAL  SEMINAR 

An  investigation,  carried  on  by  discus- 
sions and  papers,  into  one  philosophical 
problem,  text,  philosopher,  or  movement. 


A  different  topic  is  selected  each  semester. 
Recent  topics  include  Sidgwick's  ethics, 
religious  language,  Kierkegaard,  legal 
punishment.  Wittgenstein,  personal  iden- 
tity and  human  rights.  This  seminar  is 
designed  to  provide  junior  and  senior 
philosophy  majors  and  other  qualified 
students  with  more  than  the  usual  oppor- 
tunity for  concentrated  and  cooperative 
inquiry.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. This  seminar  may  be  repeated  for 
credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80      INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

Recent  independent  studies  in  philosophy 
include  Nietzsche,  moral  education, 
Rawls'  theory  of  justice,  existentialism, 
euthanasia,  Plato's  ethics,  and 
philosophical  aesthetics. 

90     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Burch 

(Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Whitehill 

Instructors:  Hair,  Holmes 

1        PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Coeducational  physical  education  classes. 
Basic  instructions  in  fundamentals, 
knowledge,  and  appreciation  of  sports 
that  include  swimming,  tennis,  bowling, 
volleyball,  archery,  field  hockey,  soccer, 
golf,  badminton,  modern  dance,  skiing, 
elementary  games  (for  elementary 
teachers),  toneastics,  physical  fitness,  and 
other  activities.  Backpacking,  cross- 
country and  alpine  skiing,  jogging,  and 
cycling  are  offered  on  a  contract  basis. 
Beginning  swimming  is  required  for  all 
nonswimmers.  Students  may  select  any 
activity  offered.  A  reasonable  degree  of 
proficiency  is  required  in  the  activities. 
Emphasis  is  on  the  potential  use  of  ac- 
tivities as  recreational  and  leisure-time  in- 
terests. Two  semesters  of  physical  educa- 
tion (two  hours  per  week)  are  required. 
All  physical  education  classes  are  open  to 
men  and  women. 

Athletic  Training 

Lycoming  College  established  an  ap- 
prenticeship program  in  athletic 
training  in  1979  after  recognizing  two 
conditions:  the  importance  of  the 
care  and  prevention  of  athletic  in- 
juries by  trained  professionals  and 


the  career's  promising  growth  poten- 
tial. 

To  complete  this  non-credit  pro- 
gram students  participate  in  practical 
as  well  as  classroom  work  under  the 
supervision  of  Lycoming's  certified 
athletic  trainer.  Students  become 
eligible  to  participate  in  the  National 
Athletic  Trainers  Association 
(N.A.T.A.)  Certification  Examina- 
tion to  earn  the  status  of  an 
N.A.T.A.  certified  trainer. 

POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Professor:  Giglio  (Chairman) 
Associate  Professor:  Roskin 
Assistant  Professor:  Grogan 

The  major  is  designed  to  provide  a 
systematic  understanding  of  govern- 
ment and  politics  at  the  international, 
national,  state,  and  local  levels.  Ma- 
jors are  encouraged  to  develop  their 
faculties  to  make  independent,  objec- 
tive analyses  which  can  be  applied  to 
the  broad  spectrum  of  the  social 
sciences. 

Although  the  political  science  ma- 
jor is  not  designed  as  a  vocational 
major,  students  with  such  training 
may  go  directly  into  government  ser- 
vice, journalism,  teaching,  or  private 
administrative  agencies.  A  political 
science  major  can  provide  the  base 
for  the  study  of  law,  or  for  graduate 
studies  leading  to  administrative 
work  in  federal,  state,  or  local 
governments,  international  organiza- 
tions, or  college  teaching.  Students 
seeking  certification  to  teach  secon- 
dary school  social  studies  may  major 
in  political  science  but  should  consult 
their  advisers  and  the  education 
department. 

A  major  consists  of  eight  political 
science  courses.  Political  Science  15  is 
required  unless  exempted  by  the 
department.  Exemptions  will  be 
granted  only  if  they  strengthen  the 
student's  program.  In  addition, 
students  must  take  at  least  one  course 
in  each  of  the  five  areas  (A  to  E) 
below.  To  encourage  familiarity  with 
other  social  sciences,  at  least  two 
courses  must  be  completed  from  the 


following:  American  Studies  10; 
Business  35  and  36  (recommended  for 
prelaw);  Economics  10,  11,  32,  45; 
History  24,  32,  33,  34;  Philosophy  21 , 
22;  Sociology  and  Anthropology  26, 
38. 

Students  also  may  take  a  minor  in 
political  science.  Three  minors  are  of- 
fered: 1)  a  minor  in  political  science 
consists  of  any  four  courses 
numbered  above  15  from  areas  A  to 
E,  including  Political  Science  15;  2)  a 
minor  in  foreign  affairs  consists  of 
four  courses  selected  from  the  follow- 
ing offerings:  Political  Science  20,  25, 
26,  27,  38  and  39;  and  3)  a  minor  in 
legal  studies  consists  of  the  following 
courses:  Political  Science  30,  31,  35, 
and  36. 

Students  are  encouraged  to  consult 
with  department  members  on  the 
selection  of  a  minor. 


15      INTRODUCTION  TO  POLITICS 

The  behavior  and  misbehavior  of  the 
political  animal,  man.  Why  he  forms 
political  communities;  how  he  may  im- 
prove and  destroy  them.  Required  of  all 
political  science  majors;  open  to  a  limited 
number  of  other  interested  students. 

A.  American  Government 

10  GOVERNMENT  AND  POLITICS 
IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 

An  introduction  to  American  national 
government  which  emphasizes  both 
structural-functional  analysis  and  policy- 
making processes.  In  addition  to  the 
legislative,  executive,  and  judicial  bran- 
ches of  government,  attention  will  be 
given  to  political  parties  and  interest 
groups,  elections  and  voting  behavior, 
and  constitutional  rights.  Recommended 
to  all  social  science  education  majors  and 
to  those  students  who  have  had  inade- 
quate or  insufficient  preparation  in 
American  government. 

1 1  STATE  AND  LOCAL  GOVERNMENT 
An  examination  of  the  general  principles, 
major  problems,  and  political  processes 
of  the  states  and  their  subdivisions, 
together  with  their  role  in  a  federal  type  of 
government. 

30  THE  AMERICAN  CONSTITUTIONAL 
SYSTEM 

An  analysis  of  the  Supreme  Court  in  the 
American  system  of  government  with 
some  attention  paid  to  judicial  decision 


49 


making.  Topics  include:  judicial  review, 
federalism,  constitutional  limits  on 
legislative  and  executive  powers,  elec- 
tions, and  representation.  Alternate 
years. 

31      CIVIL  RIGHTS  AND  LIBERTIES 

What  are  our  rights  and  liberties  as 
Americans?  What  should  they  be?  A 
frank  discussion  of  the  nature  and  scope 
of  the  constitutional  guarantees.  First 
Amendment  rights,  the  rights  of  criminal 
suspects  and  defendants,  racial  and  sexual 
equality,  and  equal  protection  of  the  laws. 
Students  will  read  and  brief  the  more  im- 
portant Supreme  Court  decisions.  Prere- 
quisite: junior  or  senior  standing  or  con- 
sent of  instructor. 

33  BUREAUCRACY  AND  PUBLIC 
ADMINISTRATION 
What  is  bureaucracy?  Why  and  how  do 
bureaucracies  arise?  What  has  been  the 
political  impact  of  growth  of  bureaucracy 
in  government?  These  questions,  among 
other,  will  be  considered  in  this  examina- 
tion of  public  bureaucracies.  This  course 
is  highly  recommended  to  students  plann- 
ing to  take  an  internship  in  city  or  county 
government  through  the  political  science 
department. 

B.  American  Politics 


22 


23 


24 


28 


50 


POLITICAL  PARTIES  AND 
INTEREST  GROUPS 
An  examination  of  the  history,  organiza- 
tion, functions,  and  methods  of  American 
political  parties.  Special  attention  is 
devoted  to  the  role  of  organized  interest 
groups  in  the  political  process.  Alternate 
years. 

AMERICAN  PRESIDENCY 
A  study  of  the  office  and  powers  of  the 
president  with  analysis  of  his  major  roles 
as  chief  administrator,  legislator,  political 
leader,  foreign  policy  maker,  and 
commander-in-chief.  Special  attention  is 
given  to  those  presidents  who  led  the  na- 
tion boldly. 

THE  LEGISLATIVE  PROCESS 
A  study  of  the  role  of  the  legislature  in  the 
framework  of  the  national  and  state 
governments.  Consideration  of  the  in- 
fluence of  the  parties,  pressure  groups, 
public  opinion,  constituencies,  the  "com- 
mittee system,"  the  "administration," 
and  the  constitution  in  the  lawmaking 
process.  Alternate  years. 

CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN 
PUBLIC  POLICY  I 

Introduction  to  basic  principles  of  policy 
analysis,  including  identification  of  con- 


temporary public  policy  problems,  alter- 
native solutions,  formal  government  and 
other  participants  in  the  policy-making 
process,  and  evaluation  of  policy  impact. 
Includes  a  detailed  case-study  analysis  of 
one  major  policy  controversy.  This  is  a 
one-half  unit  course  (first  seven  weeks  of 
semester).  Students  wishing  to  register  in 
full  unit  course  should  register  for  both 
PS  28  and  PS  29;  those  wishing  to  register 
for  a  one-half  unit  course  only  should 
register  for  PS  28.  Alternate  years. 

29     CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN 
PUBLIC  POLICY  II 

A  continuation  of  PS  28  with  an  emphasis 
on  the  variety  of  major  issues  in  public 
policy  confronting  American  government 
and  society.  Includes  a  detailed  case-study 
analysis  of  one  major  public  policy  con- 
troversy (will  differ  from  that  analyzed  in 
PS  28).  This  is  a  one-half  unit  course  (se- 
cond seven  weeks  of  semester).  Prere- 
quisite: PS  28.  Students  wishing  to 
register  in  a  full-unit  course  should 
register  for  both  PS  28  and  PS  29.  Alter- 
nate years. 

32     THE  POLITICS  OF  CITIES 
AND  SUBURBS 

An  examination  of  the  history,  legal 
basis,  power,  forms,  services,  and  pro- 
blems of  the  cities  and  their  suburbs,  with 
special  reference  to  current  experiments  in 
the  solution  of  the  problems  of 
metropolitan  areas. 

C.  Political  Theory  and  Methodology 

35      LAW  AND  SOCIETY 

An  examination  into  the  nature,  sources, 
functions,  and  limits  of  law  as  an  instru- 
ment of  political  and  social  control.  In- 
cluded for  discussion  are  legal  problems 
pertaining  to  the  family,  crime,  deviant 
behavior,  poverty,  and  minority  groups. 
Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

46  CONTEMPORARY  POLITICAL 
IDEOLOGIES 

The  growth,  development,  and  current 
status  of  liberalism,  conservatism,  na- 
tionalism, socialism,  communism,  and 
fascism.  Alternate  years. 

47  THE  AMERICAN  POLITICAL 
TRADITION 

An  examination  of  the  significant  ideas 
which  have  shaped  the  American  political 
tradition  from  their  European  origins  to 
the  present,  with  emphasis  on  the  in- 
fluence of  these  ideas  in  the  development 
of  American  democracy.  Special  attention 
will  be  paid  to  an  analysis  of  contem- 
porary   ideological     movements:     Black 


power,  new  left,  and  radical  feminism. 
Alternate  years. 

48  PUBLIC  OPINION  AND  POLLING 
A  course  dealing  with  the  general  topic 
and  methodology  of  polling.  Content  in- 
cludes exploration  of  the  processes  by 
which  people's  political  opinions  are 
formed,  the  manipulation  of  public  opi- 
nion through  the  uses  of  propaganda,  and 
the  American  response  to  politics  and 
political  issues. 


D.  Comparative  Politics 

20     EUROPEAN  POLITICS 

A  study  of  the  political  systems  of  East 
and  Wast  Europe  with  emphasis  on  com- 
parison and  patterns  of  government.  The 
course  will  review  politics  in  Northern 
(Britain,  West  Germany,  Sweden),  Latin 
(France,  Italy,  Spain),  and  Eastern 
(Soviet  Union,  East  Germany, 
Yugoslavia)  Europe  and  attempt  to  find 
underlying  similarities  and  differences. 

26     POLITICAL  CULTURES 

An  exploration  of  the  "people"  aspects 
of  political  life  in  several  countries.  The 
way  people  interact  with  each  other  and 
with  government,  what  they  expect  from 
the  system,  how  they  acquire  their 
political  attitudes  and  styles,  and  how 
these  contribute  to  the  type  of  govern- 
ment. Alternate  years. 

38      POLITICS  OF  DEVELOPING  AREAS 

The  causes  and  possible  cures  for  socio- 
political backwardness  in  Asia,  Africa, 
and  Latin  America.  Alternate  years. 


E.  International  Relations 

25      WORLD  POLITICS 

Why  is  there  war?  An  introduction  to  in- 
ternational relations  with  emphasis  on  the 
varieties  of  conflicts  which  may  grow  into 
war. 

27  CRISIS  AREAS  IN  WORLD  POLITICS 
The  study  of  several  current  areas  of  in- 
ternational tension  and  conflict,  including 
relations  among  the  United  States,  Soviet 
Union,  and  China,  plus  the  Middle  East 
and  whatever  new  danger  spots  arise  over 
time.  Alternate  years. 

39      AMERICAN  FOREIGN  POLICY 

The  U.S.  role  in  the  world  in  geographic, 
strategic,  historical,  and  ideological 
perspectives,  plus  an  examination  of  the 
domestic  forces  shaping  U.S.  policy. 
A  Iternate  years. 


F.  Non-area  Electives 

34      POLITICAL  NEWSWRITING 

A  workshop  course  in  the  reporting  and 
rewriting  of  public  affairs  at  the  local,  na- 
tional, and  international  levels.  There  will 
be  neither  texts  nor  examinations,  but 
short  written  assignments  will  be  due 
every  class  meeting.  Prerequisite:  English 
18  or  19  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

36      MASS  MEDIA  LAW  AND 
REGULATION 

An  examination  of  the  legal  structure  and 
the  system  by  which  mass  communication 
is  controlled  in  this  society.  The  forces 
which  shape,  influence,  and  make  policy 
will  be  considered.  Cross-listed  as  Mass 
Communication  31. 

G.  Special  Programs 

70-79     INTERNSHIPS  (See  Index) 

Students  may  receive  academic  credit  for 
serving  as  interns  in  structured  learning 
situations  with  a  wide  variety  of  public 
and  private  agencies  and  organizations. 
Students  have  served  as  interns  with  the 
Public  Defender's  office,  the  Lycoming 
County  Court  Administrator,  and  the 
Williamsport  city  government. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Current  studies  relate  to  elections — local, 
-state,  and  federal— while  past  studies 
have  included  Soviet  and  world  politics. 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 


PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor:  Hancock 

Associate  Professor:  Berthold 

(Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Ryan 

Part-time  Instructor:  Vestermark 

The  major  provides  training  in  both 
theoretical  and  applied  psychology.  It 
is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of 
students  seeking  careers  in 
psychology  or  other  natural  or  social 
sciences.  It  also  meets  the  needs  of 
students  seeking  a  better  understan- 
ding of  human  behavior  as  a  means 
of  furthering  individual  and  career 
goals  in  other  areas.  Certain  courses 
are  particularly  appropriate  for  ma- 


jors in  other  areas.  Psychology  ma- 
jors and  others  are  urged  to  discuss 
course  selections  in  psychology  with 
members  of  the  department  to  help 
insure  appropriate  course  selection. 
A  major  consists  of  Psychology  10, 
31,  32,  36,  and  four  other  psychology 
courses.  Statistics  also  is  required. 

10     INTRODUCTORY  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of 
human  and  other  animal  behavior.  Areas 
considered  may  include:  learning,  per- 
sonality, social,  physiological,  sensory, 
cognition,  and  developmental. 

12     GROUP  PROCESSES 
AND  INTERPERSONAL 
COMMUNICATION 

The  introduction  to  the  research  and 
theory  from  social  psychology  related  to 
small-group  dynamics  and  interpersonal 
communication.  Topics  covered  will  in- 
clude communication  processes,  inter- 
pretation of  motivation,  conceptualiza- 
tion of  individual  personalities,  problem 
solving  and  leadership,  The  first  stage  of 
the  course  will  focus  on  research  and 
theory;  the  second  half  will  emphasize  the 
development  of  skills  and  techniques 
where  students  become  members  of  a  self- 
analytic  —  practicing  the  skills  and  mak- 
ing a  case  study  of  the  processes  involved. 
May  term  only. 

15  INDUSTRIAL 

AND  ORGANIZATIONAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The  application  of  the  principles  and 
methods  of  psychology  to  selected  in- 
dustrial and  organizational  situations. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

16  ABNORMAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  patterns  of  deviant 
behavior  with  emphasis  on  cause,  func- 
tion, and  treatment.  The  various  models 
for  the  conceptualization  of  abnormal 
behavior  are  critically  examined.  Prere- 
quisite: Psychology  10. 

17  DEVELOPMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 
A  study  of  the  basic  principles  of  early 
human  growth  and  development.  Prere- 
quisite: Psychology  10. 

18  ADOLESCENT  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  study  areas  will  include  theories  of 
adolescence;  current  issues  raised  by  as 
well  as  about  the  "generation  of  youth;" 
research  findings  bearing  on  theories  and 
issues  of  growth  beyond  childhood,  and 
self-exploration.  Prerequisite:  Psychology 
10. 


24      SOCIAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  examination  of  behavior  in  social  con- 
texts, including  motivation,  perception, 
group  processes  and  leadership,  attitudes, 
and  methods  of  research.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  10. 

31  LEARNING  EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning  processes.  The  examination  of 
the  basic  methods  and  principles  of 
animal  and  human  learning.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  10,  Statistics. 

32  SENSORY  EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The  examination  of  psychophysical 
methodology  and  basic  neurophysiologi- 
cal  methods  as  they  are  applied  to  the 
understanding  of  sensory  processes. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10,  Statistics. 

33  PHYSIOLOGICAL  PSYCHOLOGY 
An  introduction  to  the  physiological 
psychologist's  method  of  approach  to  the 
understanding  of  behavior  as  well  as  the 
set  of  principles  that  relate  the  function 
and  organization  of  the  nervous  system  to 
the  phenomena  of  behavior.  The  course 
emphasis  is  on  the  relationship  between 
brain  function  and  the  physiological  bases 
of  learning,  perception,  and  motivation. 
Laboratory  experience  includes  both 
behavioral  testing  and  basic  small-animal 
neurosurgical  technique  as  well  as 
histological  methodology.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

34  PRINCIPLES  OF  MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric  methods  and  theory,  in- 
cluding scale  transformation,  norms, 
standardization,  validation  procedures, 
and  estimation  of  reliability.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  10,  Statistics. 

35  HISTORY  AND  SYSTEMS 
OF  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  growth  of  scientific  psychology  and 
the  theories  and  systems  that  have  accom- 
panied its  development.  Prerequisite:  four 
courses  in  psychology. 

36  PERSONALITY  THEORY 

Theories  of  personality.  A  comparison  of 
different  theoretical  views  on  the  develop- 
ment and  functioning  of  personality.  Ex- 
amined in  detail  are  three  general  view- 
points of  personality:  psychoanalytic, 
stimulus-response  (behavioristic),  and 
phenomenological.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  10. 

37  COGNITION 

An  investigation  of  human  mental  pro- 
cesses along  the  two  major  dimensions  of 

51 


directed  and  undirected  thought.  Topic 
areas  include  recognition,  attention,  con- 
ceptualization, problem-solving,  fantasy, 
language,  dreaming,  and  creativity. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

38  EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of 
the  teaching-learning  process.  Areas  con- 
sidered may  include  educational  objec- 
tives, pupil  and  teacher  characteristics, 
concept  learning,  problem  solving  and 
creativity,  attitudes  and  values,  motiva- 
tion, retention  and  transfer,  evaluation 
and  measurement.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

39  BEHAVIOR  MODIFICATION 

A  detailed  examination  of  the  applied 
analysis  of  behavior.  Focus  will  be  on  the 
application  of  experimental  method  to  the 
individual  clinical  case.  The  course  will 
cover  targeting,  behavior,  base-rating,  in- 
tervention strategies,  and  outcome 
evaluation.  Learning-based  modification 
techniques  such  as  contingency  manage- 
ment, counter-conditioning,  extinction, 
discrimination  training,  aversive  condi- 
tioning, and  negative  practice  will  be  ex- 
amined. Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

41      PSYCHOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  review  of  contemporary  theory  and 
research  on  the  psychology  of  women. 
Topics  of  discussion  include  the  conflicts 
of  women  in  today's  society, 
psychological  sex  differences,  achieve- 
ment motivation,  the  behaviorial  effect  of 
hormones,  and  women  in  therapy.  Prere- 
quisite: Psychology  10. 

48-49  PRACTICUM  IN  PSYCHOLOGY 
An  off-campus  involvement  in  the  ap- 
plication of  psychological  skills  and  prin- 
ciples in  institutional  settings.  The  ex- 
perience includes  training  in  behavior 
modification  and  traditional  counseling 
techniques  as  applied  in  prisons,  mental 
health  centers,  and  schools  for  the  men- 
tally retarded.  Classroom  training  focuses 
on  various  therapeutic  techniques  and  on 
students'  understanding  of  themselves  in 
the  counselor  role.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Internships  give  students  an  opportunity 
to  relate  on-campus  academic  experiences 
to  society  in  general  and  to  their  post- 
baccalaureate  objectives  in  particular. 
Students  have,  for  example,  worked  in 
prisons,  public  and  private  schools,  coun- 
ty government,  and  for  the  American  Red 
Cross. 


80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Independent  Study  is  an  opportunity  for 
students  to  pursue  special  interests  in 
areas  for  which  courses  are  not  offered. 
In  addition,  students  have  an  opportunity 
to  study  a  topic  in  more  depth  than  is 
possible  in  the  regular  classroom  situa- 
tion. Studies  in  the  past  have  included 
child  abuse,  counseling  of  hospital  pa- 
tients, and  research  in  the  psychology  of 
natural  disasters. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 
Honors  in  psychology  requires  original 
contributions     to     the     literature     of 
psychology  through  independent  study. 
The  most  recent   honors  project  was  a 
study  of  the  relationship  between  socio- 
economic status  and  visual  vs.  auditory 
learning. 


RELIGION 

Professor:  Guerra  (Chairman) 
Associate  Professor:  Hughes 
Assistant  Professor:  Robinson 

A  major  consists  of  10  courses,  in- 
cluding Religion  13,  14,  and  20.  At 
least  seven  courses  must  be  taken  in 
the  department.  The  following 
courses  may  be  counted  toward 
fulfilling  the  major  requirements: 
Greek  11  and  12,  Hebrew  11  and  12, 
History  39  and  41,  Philosophy  32, 
and  Sociology  33. 

13  OLD  TESTAMENT 
FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature 
within  its  historical  setting  and  in  the  light 
of  archaeological  findings  to  show  the 
faith  and  religious  life  of  the  Hebrew- 
Jewish  community  in  the  biblical  period, 
and  an  introduction  to  the  history  of  in- 
terpretation with  an  emphasis  on  contem- 
porary Old  Testament  criticism  and 
theology. 

14  NEW  TESTAMENT 
FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature 
within  its  historical  setting  to  show  the 
faith  and  religious  life  of  the  Christian 
community  in  the  biblical  period,  and  an 
introduction  to  the  history  of  interpreta- 
tion with  an  emphasis  on  contemporary 
New  Testament  criticism  and  theology. 


20  DEATH  AND  DYING 

A  study  of  death  from  personal,  social, 
and  universal  standpoints  with  emphasis 
upon  what  the  dying  may  teach  the  living. 
Principal  issues  are  the  stages  of  dying, 
bereavement,  suicide,  funeral  conduct, 
and  the  religious  doctrines  of  death  and 
immortality.  Course  includes,  as  op- 
tional, practical  projects  with  terminal  pa- 
tients under  professional  supervision.  On- 
ly one  course  from  the  combination  20-21 
may  be  used  for  distribution. 

21  AFTER  DEATH  AND  DYING 

An  examination  of  the  question  of  life 
after  death  in  terms  of  contemporary 
clinical  studies,  the  New  Testament  resur- 
rection narratives,  the  Asian  doctrine  of 
reincarnation,  and  the  classical 
theological  beliefs  of  providence  and 
predestination.  Religion  20  is  recom- 
mended but  not  required.  Only  one  course 
from  the  combination  20-21  may  be  used 
for  distribution. 

22  PROTESTANTISM  IN  THE 
MODERN  WORLD 

An  examination  of  changing  Protestant 
thought  and  life  from  Luther  to  the  pre- 
sent against  the  backdrop  of  a  culture 
rapidly  changing  from  the  17th  century 
scientific  revolution  to  Marxism,  Dar- 
winism, and  depth  psychology.  Special  at- 
tention will  be  paid  to  the  constant  in- 
teraction between  Protestantism  and  the 
world  in  which  it  finds  itself. 

23  CHRISTIAN  ORIGINS 

A  study  of  the  historical,  cultural,  and 
religious  background  of  the  formation  of 
Christianity  and  the  antecedents  of  Chris- 
tian belief  and  practice  in  post-exilic 
Judaism  and  in  Hellenism. 

24  JUDAISM  AND  ISLAM 

An  examination  of  the  rise,  growth,  and 
expansion  of  Judaism  and  Islam  with 
special  attention  given  to  the  theological 
contents  of  the  literatures  of  these 
religions  as  far  as  they  are  normative  in 
matters  of  faith,  practice,  and  organiza- 
tion. Also,  a  review  of  their  contributions 
to  the  spiritual  heritage  of  mankind. 

25  ORIENTAL  RELIGION 

A  phenomenological  study  of  the  basic 
content  of  Hinduism,  Buddhism,  and 
Chinese  Taoism  with  special  attention  to 
social  and  political  relations,  mythical 
and  aesthetic  forms,  and  the  East-West 
dialogue. 

28      HISTORY  AND  CULTURE 

OF  THE  ANCIENT  NEAR  EAST 

A  study  of  the  history  and  culture  of 

Mesopotamia,  Anatolia,  Syria-Palestine, 


52 


and  Egypt  from  the  rise  of  the  Sumerian 
culture  to  Alexander  the  Great.  Careful 
attention  will  be  given  to  the  religious 
views  prevalent  in  the  ancient  Near  East 
as  far  as  these  views  interacted  with  the 
culture  and  faith  of  Biblical  man. 

30  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

A  study  into  the  broad  insights  of 
psychology  in  relation  to  the  phenomena 
of  religion  and  religious  behavior.  The 
course  concentrates  on  religious  ex- 
perience or  manifestations  rather  then 
concepts.  Tentative  solutions  will  be 
sought  to  questions  such  as:  What  does  it 
feel  like  to  be  religious  or  to  have  a 
religious  experience?  What  is  the  religious 
function  in  human  development?  How 
does  one  think  psychologically  about 
theological  problems? 

31  CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

A  study  of  Christian  ethics  as  a  normative 
perspective  for  contemporary  moral  prob- 
lems with  emphasis  upon  the  interaction 
of  law  and  religion,  decision  making  in 
the  field  of  biomedical  practice,  and  the 
reconstruction  of  society  in  a  planetary 
civilization. 

32  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  IN 
CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

An  examination  of  the  approach  of 
religion  and  other  disciplines  to  an  issue 
of  current  concern;  current  topics  include 
the  theological  significance  of  law,  the 
ethics  of  love,  and  the  Holocaust.  The 
course  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

33  ROMAN  CATHOLIC  THOUGHT 
The  development  of  Thomism,  Neo- 
Thomism,  and  Transcendental  Thomism; 
limited  attention  given  to  pastoral  and  ec- 
clesiological  issues  in  the  post-conciliar 
era  after  Vatican  II. 

37      BIBLICAL  TOPICS 

An  in-depth  study  of  Biblical  topics 
related  to  the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 
Topics  include  prophecy,  wisdom, 
literature,  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls,  the 
teachings  of  Jesus,  Pauline  theology, 
Judaism  and  Christian  origins,  reaction 
criticism  —  the  way  the  Synoptic  Gospels 
and  John  give  final  form  to  their  message. 
Course  will  vary  from  year  to  year  and 
may  be  taken  for  credit  a  second  time  if 
the  topic  is  different  from  one  previously 
studied. 

41      CONTEMPORARY  RELIGIOUS 

ISSUES 

A  study  of  the  theological  significance  of 
some  contemporary  intellectual 
developments  in  western  culture.  The  con- 
tent of  this  course  will  vary  from  year  to 


year.  Subjects  studied  in  recent  years  in- 
clude the  theological  significance  of 
Freud,  Marx,  and  Nietzsche;  Christianity 
and  existentialism;  theology  and  depth 
psychology,  the  religious  dimension  of 
contemporary  literature. 

42  THE  NATURE  AND  MISSION  OF  THE 
CHURCH 

A  study  of  the  nature  of  the  Church  as 
"The  People  of  God"  with  reference  to 
the  Biblical,  Protestant,  Orthodox,  and 
Roman  Catholic  traditions. 

43  THE  EDUCATIONAL  MINISTRY  OF 
THE  CHURCH 

A  study  of  religious  education  as  a  func- 
tion of  the  church  with  special  attention 
given  to  the  nature  and  objectives  of 
Christian  education,  methods  of  teaching 
religion,  and  the  relations  between  faith 
and  learning. 

46      BIBLE,  ARCHAEOLOGY,  AND 
FAITH 

A  study  of  the  role  of  archaeology  in 
reconstructing  the  world  in  which  the 
Biblical  literature  originated  with  special 
attention  given  to  archaeological  results 
that  throw  light  on  the  clarification  of  the 
Biblical  text.  Also,  an  introduction  to 
basic  archaeological  method  and  a  study 
in  depth  of  several  representative  excava- 
tions along  with  the  artifacts  and  material 
culture  recovered  from  different  historical 
periods. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  religion  usually  work  in  local 
churches  under  the  supervision  of  the 
pastor  and  a  member  of  the  faculty. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Current  study  areas  are  in  the  biblical 
languages,  New  Testament  theology, 
comparative  religions,  and  the  ethics  of 
technology. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 
A  recent  project  was  on  the  theology  of 
hope  with  reference  to  the  thought  of 
Ernst  Bloch  and  Alfred  North  Whitehead. 


SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor:  McCrary 

Associate  Professors:  Jo  (Chairman), 

Wilk 

Assistant  Professor:  Strauser 

A     major    consists    of    Sociology- 
Anthropology  10,  14,  16,  44,  47,  and 


three  other  courses  within  the  depart- 
ment with  the  exception  of  15,  23,  25, 
and  40.  Religion  46  may  also  be 
counted  toward  the  major. 
Sociology-anthropology  majors  are 
encouraged  to  participate  in  the  in- 
ternship program. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  problems,  con- 
cepts, and  methods  in  sociology  today,  in- 
cluding analysis  of  stratification, 
organization  of  groups  and  institutions, 
social  movements,  and  deviants  in  social 
structure. 


14  INTRODUCTION  TO 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  subfields  of  an- 
thropology; its  subject  matter, 
methodology,  and  goals.  Examination  of 
biological  and  cultural  evolution,  the 
fossil  evidence  for  human  evolution,  and 
questions  raised  in  relation  to  human 
evolution.  Other  topics  include  race, 
human  nature,  primate  behavior,  and 
prehistoric  cultural  development. 

15  INTRODUCTION  TO  AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL  JUSTICE  SYSTEM 

An  introduction  to  the  role  of  law  en- 
forcement, courts,  and  corrections  in  the 
administration  of  justice;  the  historical 
development  of  police,  courts,  and  cor- 
rections; jurisdiction  and  procedures  of 
courts;  an  introduction  to  the  studies, 
literature,  and  research  in  criminal 
justice,  careers  in  criminal  justice. 

16  CULTURAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  examination  of  cultural  and  social  an- 
thropology designed  to  familiarize  the 
student  with  the  analytical  approaches  to 
the  diverse  cultures  of  the  world.  The 
relevancy  of  cultural  anthropology  for  an 
understanding  of  the  human  condition 
will  be  stressed.  Topics  to  be  covered  in- 
clude the  nature  of  primitive  societies  in 
contrast  to  civilizations,  the  concept  of 
culture  and  cultural  relativism,  the  in- 
dividual and  culture,  the  social  patterning 
of  behavior  and  social  control,  an  an- 
thropological perspective  on  the  culture 
of  the  United  States. 

20      MARRIAGE  AND  THE  FAMILY 

The  history,  structure,  and  functions  of 
modern  American  family  life,  emphasiz- 
ing dating,  courtship,  factors  in  marital 
adjustment,  and  the  changing  status  of 
family  members.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 


53 


21  JUVENILE  DELINQUENCY 

A  multidisciplinary  approach  to  the  study 
of  the  constellation  of  factors  that  relate 
to  juvenile  delinquency  causation,  handl- 
ing the  juvenile  delinquent  in  the  criminal 
justice  system,  treatment  strategies, 
prevention,  and  community  responsibili- 
ty. Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology 
10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

22  PEOPLES  AND  CULTURES  OF 
MEXICO 

Examination  of  the  diverse  cultures  of 
Mesoamerica  from  preconquest  in- 
digenous peoples  to  modern  Mexican 
state,  including  the  rise  and  fall  of  Aztec 
and  Maya  civilization,  transformation 
from  primitive  agriculturalist  to  peasant, 
concepts  of  folk  society,  and  culture  of 
poverty;  an  analysis  of  contemporary 
problems  of  rural  Mexico,  and  the  role  of 
peasants  in  modern  revolutionary 
movements.  Offered  at  least  once  every 
three  years. 


23 


24 


25 


26 


INTRODUCTION  TO  LAW 
ENFORCEMENT 

Principles,  theories,  and  doctrines  of  the 
law  of  crimes,  elements  in  crime,  analysis 
of  criminal  investigation,  important  case 
law.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy IS  or  consent  of  instructor. 


RURAL  AND  URBAN  COMMUNITIES 
The  concept  of  community  is  treated  as  it 
operates  and  affects  individual  and  group 
behavior  in  rural,  suburban,  and  urban 
settings.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon 
characteristic  institutions  and  problems  of 
modern  city  life.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

INTRODUCTION  TO  CRIMINAL 
INVESTIGATION 

This  course  is  designed  for  advanced 
criminal  justice  majors.  Emphasis  is  plac- 
ed on  an  in-depth  study  of  detection  and 
investigation  of  major  crimes.  Particular 
attention  is  placed  on  the  use  of 
criminalistics,  legal  parameters  of 
evidence  and  interrogation,  and  pro- 
secutory  procedures.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  23  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Will  not  be  counted  toward  the 
sociology/anthropology  major. 

SOCIAL  MOVEMENTS 
An  analysis  of  the  dynamics,  structure, 
and  reactions  to  social  movements  with 
focus  on  contemporary  social 
movements.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 


27  SOCIALIZATION  THROUGH  THE 
LIFE  SPAN 

Examination  of  the  relationship  between 
the  individual  and  society  in  the  develop- 
ment of  behavior  potentials  of  groups  and 
cultures.  The  course  will  study  the  con- 
tinual process  of  learning  how  to  be 
"human,"  which  occurs  throughout  the 
life  span.  A  cross-cultural  approach  is 
utilized  to  examine  the  process  of  acquisi- 
tion of  skills,  motives,  and  attitudes 
necessary  for  role  performance  in 
childhood  and  adolescence  with  an  em- 
phasis on  young  adulthood,  adulthood, 
middle  age,  and  old  age.  Life  span 
developmental  theory  will  be  used  in  con- 
junction with  socialization  theory  and 
role  theory.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

28  AGING  AND  SOCIETY 

Analysis  of  cross-cultural  characteristics 
of  the  aged  as  individuals  and  as  members 
of  groups.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon 
variables:  health,  housing,  socio- 
economic status,  personal  adjustment, 
retirement,  and  social  participation. 
Sociological,  social  psychological,  and 
anthropological  frames  of  reference 
utilized  in  analysis  and  description  of  ag- 
ing and  its  relationship  to  society,  culture, 
and  personality. 

29  20TH  CENTURY  CHINESE  SOCIETY 
An  analysis  of  the  interaction  between  the 
individual  and  society  undergoing  rapid 
social  change  in  the  Chinese  cultural  con- 
text. Topics  include  Confucian  examina- 
tion system  and  social  mobility,  the  tradi- 
tional Chinese  village  and  family,  origins 
of  Chinese  Marxism  and  how  it  has  been 
implemented  in  social  institutions  of  The 
People's  Republic  of  China.  Alternate 
years. 

30  CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis  of  the  sociology  of  law,  condi- 
tions under  which  criminal  laws  develop, 
etiology  of  crime,  epidemiology  of  crime, 
including  explanation  of  statistical 
distribution  of  criminal  behavior  in  terms 
of  time,  space,  and  social  location.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

31  SOCIOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  sociological  examination  of  the  role  of 
women  in  American  society  through  an 
analysis  of  the  social  institutions  which 
affect  their  development.  Role-analysis 
theory  will  be  applied  to  the  past,  present, 
and  future  experience  of  women  as  it 
relates  to  the  role  options  of  society  as  a 
whole.  Students  will  do  an  original 
research  project  on  the  role  of  women. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10. 
Alternate  years. 


32      INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces  the  student  to  the  sociological 
concept  of  social  institution,  the  types  of 
social  institutions  to  be  found  in  all 
societies,  and  the  interrelationships  be- 
tween the  social  institutions  within  a 
society.  The  course  is  divided  into  two 
basic  parts:  1.  That  aspect  which  deals 
with  the  systematic  organization  of  socie- 
ty in  general,  and  2.  The  concentration  on 
a  particular  social  institution:  economic, 
political,  educational,  or  social  welfare. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10 
or  consent  of  instructor. 


33     SOCIOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

An  examination  of  the  major  theories  of 
the  relationship  of  religion  to  society  and 
a  survey  of  sociological  studies  of 
religious  behavior.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 


34      RACIAL  AND  CULTURAL 
MINORITIES 

Study  of  racial,  cultural,  and  national 
groups  within  the  framework  of 
American  cultural  values.  An  analysis  will 
include  historical,  cultural,  and  social  fac- 
tors underlying  ethnic  and  racial  conflict. 
Field  trips  and  individual  reports  are  part 
of  the  requirements  for  the  course.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 


35  CULTURE  AND  PERSONALITY 
Introduction  to  psychological  an- 
thropology, its  theories  and 
methodologies.  Emphasis  will  be  placed 
on  the  relationship  between  individual 
and  culture,  national  character,  cognition 
and  culture,  culture  and  mental  disorders, 
and  cross-cultural  considerations  of  the 
concept  of  self.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

36  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF 
PRIMITIVE  RELIGIONS 

The  course  will  familiarize  the  student 
with  the  wealth  of  anthropological  data 
on  the  religions  and  world  views 
developed  by  primitive  peoples.  The  func- 
tions of  primitive  religion  in  regard  to  the 
individual,  society,  and  various  cultural 
institutions  will  be  examined.  Subjects  to 
be  surveyed  include  myth,  witchcraft,  vi- 
sion quests,  spirit  possession,  the  cultural 
use  of  dreams,  and  revitalization 
movements.  Particular  emphasis  will  be 
given  to  shamanism,  transcultural 
religious  experience,  and  the  creation  of 
cultural  realities  through  religions.  Both  a 


54 


social  scientific  and  existentialist  perspec- 
tive will  be  employed.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  16  or  consent  of 
instructor.  A  Iternate  years. 

37  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF 
AMERICAN  INDIANS 

An  ethnographic  survey  of  native  North 
American  Indian  and  Eskimo  cultures, 
such  as  the  Iroquois,  Plains  Indians, 
Pueblos,  Kwakiutl,  and  Netsilik.  Changes 
in  native  lifeways  due  to  European  con- 
tacts and  United  States  expansion  will  be 
considered.  Recent  cultural  developments 
among  American  Indians  will  be  placed  in 
an  anthropological  perspective.  Offered 
at  least  once  every  three  years. 

38  LEGAL  AND  POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The  course  is  designed  to  familiarize  the 
student  with  the  techniques  of  conflict 
resolution  and  the  utilization  of  public 
power  in  primitive  society  as  well  as  the 
various  theories  of  primitive  law  and 
government.  The  rise  of  the  state  and  an 
anthropological  perspective  on  modern 
law  and  government  will  be  included.  The 
concepts  of  self-regulation  and  social  con- 
trol, legitimacy,  coercion,  and  exploita- 
tion will  be  the  organizing  focus.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology- Anthropology  16  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

39  THE  AMERICAN  PRISON  SYSTEM 
Nature  and  history  of  punishment,  evolu- 
tion of  the  prison  and  prison  methods 
with  emphasis  on  prison  community, 
prison  architecture,  institutional  pro- 
grams, inmate  rights,  and  sentences. 
Review  of  punishment  vs.  treatment, 
detention  facilities,  jails,  reformatories, 
prison  organization  and  administration, 
custody,  and  discipline.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology- Anthropology  15. 

40  PROBATION  AND  PAROLE 

A  course  designed  for  the  advanced 
criminal  justice  major.  While  the  course 
concerns  the  study  of  probation  and 
parole  as  parts  of  the  criminal  justice 
system  and  their  impact  on  the  system  as  a 
whole,  the  primary  emphasis  is  the  impact 
on  the  offender.  Particular  attention  is 
given  to  diagnostic  report  writing  on  of- 
fenders, pre-sentence  investigation,  of- 
fender classification,  and  parole  plann- 
ing. Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy 15  and  39.  Alternate  years. 

41  SOCIAL  STRATIFICATION 

An  analysis  of  stratification  systems  with 
specific  reference  to  American  society. 
The  course  will  include  an  analysis  of 
poverty,  wealth,  and  power  in  the  United 
States.  Particular  attention  will  be  given 


to  factors  which  generate  and  maintain  in- 
equality, along  with  the  impacts  of 
inequality  on  the  lives  of  Americans. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

42  INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIAL  WORK 
Consideration  of  basic  social-work  con- 
cepts, principles  and  techniques  of  inter- 
viewing, individual  case  work,  group 
work  and  community  organization, 
development  of  skills,  and  techniques  of 
social  work  applied  to  the  correctional 
setting.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43  ALTERNATIVE  LIFE  STYLES 
Analysis  of  new  life  styles  in  American 
society:  life  styles  of  minority  groups  and 
others  who  are  considered  by  society  to  be 
nonconforming.  Examination  of  the 
challenges  to  conformity  and  ramifica- 
tions of  nonconformity  in  American 
society.  Will  include  an  inquiry  into 
behavior  which  has  historically  been 
labeled  deviant,  covering  such  topics  as 
mental  illness,  addiction  to  alcohol  and 
narcotics,  homosexuality,  and  prostitu- 
tion. Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  SOCIAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of 
sociological  thought  from  its  earliest 
philosophical  beginnings  is  treated 
through  discussions  and  reports.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  upon  sociological  thought 
since  the  time  of  Comte.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

45  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  an- 
thropological thought  from  the  18th  cen- 
tury to  the  present.  Emphasis  is  placed 
upon  anthropological  thought  since  1850. 
Topics  include  evolutionism,  historical- 
particularism,  cultural  idealism,  cultural 
materialism,  functionalism,  struc- 
turalism, and  ethnoscence.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  16  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Offered  at  least  once  every 
three  years. 

46  PEOPLE  AND  CULTURES  OF  THE 
AMERICAN  SOUTHWEST 

Field  experience  in  the  analysis  of  tri- 
cultural  communities  of  Northern  New 
Mexico,  Southern  Colorado,  and  North- 
eastern Arizona,  including  the  eastern 
Pueblos  of  New  Mexico,  Zuni  Navajo  and 
Apache  reservations,  isolated  Spanish- 
American  mountain  villages  of  Northern 
New  Mexico,  religious  ashrams  and  com- 
munes, and  cities  of  the  Southwest  and 
Juarez,   Mexico.   Emphasis  upon  Taos, 


Rio  Arriba,  Santa  Fe,  and  Los  Alamos 
counties  of  New  Mexico.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 
May  or  summer  only. 

47      RESEARCH  METHODS  IN 

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 
Study  of  the  research  process  in 
sociology-anthropology.  Attention  is 
given  to  the  process  of  designing  and  ad- 
ministering research  and  the  application 
of  research.  Different  methodological 
skills  are  considered,  including  field 
work,  questionnaire  construction,  and 
other  methods  of  data  gathering  and  the 
analysis  of  data.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  and  Mathematics  13  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

48-49     PRACTICUM  IN  SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces  the  student  to  a  practical  work 
experience  involving  community  agencies 
in  order  to  effect  a  synthesis  of  the  stu- 
dent's academic  course  work  and  its  prac- 
tical applications  in  a  community  agency. 
Specifics  of  the  course  to  be  worked  out  in 
conjunction  with  department,  student, 
and  agency.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  sociology-anthropology  typical- 
ly work  off  campus  with  social  service 
agencies  under  the  supervision  of  ad- 
ministrators. However,  other  internship 
experiences,  such  as  with  the  Lycoming 
County  Historical  Museum,  are  available. 
Interns  in  criminal  justice  work  off  cam- 
pus in  criminal  justice  agencies,  such  as 
penal  institutions  and  probation  and 
parole  departments,  under  the  supervision 
of  administrative  personnel. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
An  opportunity  to  pursue  specific  in- 
terests and  topics  not  usually  covered  in 
regular  courses.  Through  a  program  of 
readings  and  tutorials,  the  student  will 
have  the  opportunity  to  pursue  these  in- 
terests and  topics  in  greater  depth  than  is 
usually  possible  in  a  regular  course. 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 


THEATRE 

Professor:  Falk  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Carlson 

The  major  consists  of  eight  courses: 
Theatre  10  and  seven  others;  a  con- 
centration  in   acting,    directing,    or 


55 


design  is  possible.  In  addition  to  the 
course  requirements,  majors  are  ex- 
pected to  participate  actively  in  Arena 
Theatre  productions.  Majors  are 
urged  to  include  courses  in  art,  music, 
psychology,  and  English,  or  other 
areas  of  special  interest. 

The  fine  arts  distribution  require- 
ment may  be  satisfied  by  selecting  any 
two  of  the  following  recommended 
courses:  Theatre  10,  11,  14,  18,  32,  33 
or  other  courses  with  the  consent  of 
the  instructor. 

10  INTRODUCTION  TO  THEATRE 
Designed  as  a  comprehensive  introduction 
to  the  aesthetics  of  theatre.  From  the 
spectator's  point  of  view,  the  nature  of 
theatre  will  be  explored,  including 
dramatic  literature  and  the  integrated 
functioning  of  acting,  directing,  and  all 
production  aspects. 

1 1  INTRODUCTION  TO  FILM 

A  basic  course  in  understanding  the  film 
medium.  The  class  will  investigate  film 
technique  through  lectures  and  by  viewing 
regular  weekly  films  chosen  from  classic, 
contemporary,  and  experimental  short 
films. 

14      INTRODUCTION  TO  ACTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  actor's 
preparation  with  emphasis  on  developing 
the  actor's  creative  imagination  through 
improvisations  and  scene  study. 

18      INTRODUCTION  TO  PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft  and  the  various  other  aspects 
of  play  production  are  introduced. 
Through  material  presented  in  the  course 
and  laboratory  work  on  the  Arena 
Theatre  stage,  the  student  will  acquire  ex- 
perience to  produce  theatrical  scenery. 

26      INTRODUCTION  TO  DIRECTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  function  of 
the  director  in  preparation,  rehearsal,  and 
performance.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
developing  the  student's  ability  to  analyze 
scripts,  and  on  the  development  of  the 
student's  imagination.  Prerequisite: 
Theatre  14. 


28' 


INTRODUCTION  TO  SCENE  DESIGN 
AND  STAGECRAFT 
An  introduction  to  the  theatre  with  an 
emphasis  on  stagecraft.  Productions  each 
semester  serve  as  the  laboratory  to  pro- 
vide the  practical  experience  necessary  to 
understand  the  material  presented  in  the 
classroom.  Prerequisite:  Theatre  18  or 
consent  of  instructor. 


31      ADVANCED  TECHNIQUES  OF  PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

A  detailed  consideration  of  the  inter- 
related problems  and  techniques  of  play 
analysis,  production  styles,  and  design. 
Offered  summer  only. 

34  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  ACTING 
Instruction    and    practice    in    character 
analysis  and  projection  with  emphasis  on 
vocal  and  body  techniques.  Prerequisite: 
Theatre  14. 

35  THEORIES  OF  THE  MODERN 
THEATRE 

An  advanced  course  exploring  the 
philosophical  roots  of  the  modern  theatre 
form  the  birth  of  realism  to  the  present 
and  the  influences  on  modern  theatre 
practice.  Selected  readings  from 
Nietzsche,  Marx,  Jung,  Freud, 
Whitehead,  Kierkegaard,  Sartre,  Camus, 
Antoine,  Copeau,  Stanislavski,  Shaw, 
Meyerhold,  Artaud,  Brecht,  Brook, 
Grotowski.  Alternate  years. 

36  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO: 
DIRECTING 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  student's  ability 
to  function  in  preparation  and  rehearsal. 
Practical  experience  involves  the  directing 
of  two  one-act  plays  from  the  contem- 
porary theatre.  Prerequisite:  Theatre  26. 

37  PLAYWRITING  AND  DRAMATIC 
CRITICISM 

An  investigation  of  the  techniques  of 
playwriting  with  an  emphasis  on  creative 
writing,  culminating  in  a  written  one-act 
play,  plus  an  historical  survey  of  dramatic 
criticism  from  Aristotle  to  the  present 
with  emphasis  upon  developing  the  stu- 
dent's ability  to  write  reviews  and 
criticism  of  theatrical  productions  and 
films.  Alternate  years. 

38  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO: 
LIGHTING  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  stage  and  lighting  design 
with  emphasis  on  their  practical  applica- 
tion to  the  theatre.  Prerequisite:  Theatre 
18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

40      MASTERS  OF  WORLD  DRAMA 

An  intensive  and  detailed  analysis  of  the 
plays  and  related  works,  including 
criticism  of  great  authors,  that  have 
shaped  world  theatre.  Authors  to  be 
selected  on  the  basis  of  interest  of 
students  and  faculty.  At  times,  more  than 
one  author  will  be  treated  in  a  term. 
Ibsen,  Brecht,  Moliere,  Williams,  Albee. 
Alternate  years.  May  be  accepted  toward 
English  major  with  consent  of  English 
department. 


42  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  COSTUME 
DESIGN 

The  theory  of  costuming  for  the  stage, 
elements  of  design,  planning,  production, 
and  construction  of  costumes  for  the 
theatre.  Students  will  participate  in  the 
design  of  a  production.  Prerequisite: 
Theatre  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  PROPERTIES 
DESIGN 

The  theory  of  properties  design  for  the 
stage,  including  the  production  of  specific 
properties  for  staging  use.  Elements  of 
design,  fabrication,  and  the  construction 
of  properties  employing  a  variety  of 
materials  and  the  application  of  new 
theatrical  technology.  Prerequisite: 
Theatre  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  ACTING 
Preparation  of  monologues  and  two- 
character  scenes,  contemporary  and 
classical.  The  student  will  appear  in  major 
campus  productions.  Prerequisite: 
Theatre  34. 

46      ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  student's 
ability  to  produce  a  major  three-act  play 
from  the  script  to  the  stage  for  public  per- 
formance. Prerequisite:  Theatre  36. 

48      ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DESIGN 

Independent  work  in  conceptual  and 
practical  design.  The  student  will  design 
one  full  production  as  his  major  project. 
Prerequisite:  Theatre  28  or  38  and  consent 
of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  theatre  work  off  campus  in 
theatres  such  as  the  Guthrie  Theatre,  Min- 
neapolis, and  at  the  New  Jersey 
Shakespeare  Festival. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 
Some  recent  independent  studies  have 
been  the  roles  of  women  as  characters  in 
drama,  scene  design,  and  lighting  design 
for  an  Arena  production. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  Index) 
A  typical  study  could  be  the  writing  and 
production  of  an  original  play. 


56 


Student  Services 


ADMINISTRATION 

The  program  of  student  services  at 
Lycoming  is  administered  by  the  Of- 
fice of  Student  Services.  It  is  designed 
to  respond  to  a  diversity  of  student 
needs.  The  six  staff  members,  five  of 
whom  live  on  campus,  are  assigned 
the  specific  responsibilities  of: 

— career  counseling  and  placement; 
— residence  life; 

— student  activities,  student  union, 
student  government,  Intrafraterni- 
ty  Council  and  Panhellenic  Ad- 
viser, retention  program; 
— religious  life,  health  services, 
study  skills  program,  reading  im- 
provement courses. 
All  members  of  the  staff  are 
available  to  counsel  and  advise  in- 
dividual students. 

PERSONAL  COUNSELING 

All  members  of  the  staff  of  the  Office 
of  Student  Services  are  qualified  and 
available  to  provide  non-therapeutic 
assistance  to  students  with  adjust- 
ment problems.  A  psychiatrist  serves 
as  a  consultant  to  the  staff  and  is 
available  for  evaluation  of  individual 
students  who  may  be  in  need  of  pro- 
fessional services.  Continuing 
therapy  is  available  through  referral 
to  public  agencies  and  private  clini- 
cians in  the  Williamsport  community. 
Financial  arrangements  for  these 
referral  services  are  made  directly  by 
the  student  with  the  agency  and/or 
individual  clinician  involved. 

HEALTH  SERVICES 

Normal  medical  treatment  by  the 
health  service  staff  at  the  College  is 
provided  without  cost  to  the  student. 
During  the  fall  and  spring  semesters, 
the  College  maintains  an  out-patient 
service  in  Rich  Hall.  It  is  staffed  with 
a  registered  nurse  five  days  a  week 
from  9  a.m.  to  5  p.m.  The  College 
physician  is  available  from  1 1  a.m.  to 
12  noon,  Monday  through  Friday.  At 
other  times,  emergency  care  is 
available  at  the  emergency  rooms  of 
Williamsport  and  Divine  Providence 
Hospitals,   located  a  short  distance 


from  the  campus.  The  College  pays 
the  emergency  room  charge  and  the 
emergency  room  physician's  fee  for 
illness  when  the  health  service  is  clos- 
ed. 

Medical-service  charges  paid  by  the 
student  are:  emergency  room  and 
emergency  room  physician's  charges 
(except  as  indicated  above),  special 
medications,  X-rays,  surgery,  care 
for  major  accidents,  immunizations, 
examinations  for  glasses,  physician's 
visits  other  than  in  the  health  service, 
referrals  for  treatment  by  specialists, 
special  nursing  services,  and  special 
services. 

Entering  students  must  provide 
basic  health  information  to  the  Col- 
lege between  the  time  of  admission 
and  the  beginning  of  classes  of  the 
term  to  which  they  are  admitted.  This 
information  is  secured  through  par- 
ticipation in  the  computerized  health- 
information  service  provided  by 
Medical  Datamation,  Inc.  New 
students  complete  the  DASH  Medical 
Information  Questionnaire  that  is 
mailed  to  students  shortly  after  they 
have  confirmed  their  admission  to 
Lycoming.  The  completed  form  is 
sent  by  the  student  to  Medical 
Datamation  together  with  a  check  for 
$10.  Both  the  student  and  the  College 
receive  reports  based  on  the  question- 
naire responses.  The  student  report 
consists  of  a  Medical  Database 
Report,  a  Health  Risk  Index,  and  as 
many  health  information  brochures 
as  requested.  Information  provided 
by  the  student  is  confidential  and  is 
available  only  to  qualified  health  ser- 
vice and  student-services  personnel. 

STUDY  IMPROVEMENT 
SERVICES 

Skills  Seminars — The  seminars, 
consisting  of  three  one-hour  sessions 
on  scheduling  of  time,  test-taking, 
and  study  methods,  are  scheduled  on 
demand  for  six  to  10  students. 

Reading  Course — Designed  to  im- 
prove reading  speed  and  comprehen- 
sion, this  three-week  course  is  offered 
at  various  times  during  the  academic 
year  for  a  fee  of  $15. 


CAREER  DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The  Career  Development  Center  pro- 
vides services  which  are  designed  to 
help  students  identify  their  abilities 
and  interest,  set  realistic  career  goals, 
and  plan  academic  programs  to  meet 
these  goals.  Counseling  for  Lycoming 
students  begins  in  the  freshman  year. 
In  addition  to  individual  guidance, 
the  center  maintains  a  library  on 
specific  careers,  employment 
outlooks,  and  career  trends.  Services 
offered  by  the  center  include: 

—  individual  counseling; 

—  career-planning  seminars  in 
values  clarification,  skill 
assessment,  and  decision  mak- 
ing; 

—  2500-volume  career  library; 

—  relaxation  workshops  and 
assertiveness  training; 

—  SHARE  (Students  Having  A 
Real  Experience),  a  program 
in  which  students  observe  and 
work  with  a  professional  in  the 
field; 

—  placement  services  to  aid 
seniors  in  implementing  their 
career  plans; 

—  assistance  to  students  in  secur- 
ing internships,  summer 
employment,  and  part-time 
employment; 

—  speaker's  program  which 
brings  professionals  from  a 
variety  of  careers  to  campus 
seminars; 

—  video-cassette  programs 
relating  to  job  skills  and  career 
information; 

—  microfiche  copies  of  graduate- 
and  professional-school 
catalogs  for  the  United  States 
and  abroad. 

RESIDENCE  AND  RESIDENCE 
HALLS 

Students  who  are  single  and  do  not 
live  at  home  are  required  to  live  in 
residence  halls  and  eat  in  the  dining 
room.  All  new  resident  students  are 
forwarded  a  room-agreement  form  to 


57 


sign  after  confirmation  of  their  ad- 
mission to  Lycoming.  This  agreement 
is  renewed  each  spring.  Exceptions  to 
the  residence  policy  may  be  granted 
to  those  students  who  wish  to  live 
with  relatives,  and  students  who  are 
23  years  of  age  or  older  and  have 
established  non-resident  status.  Re- 
quests for  such  exemptions  must  be 
submitted  to  the  Assistant  Dean  of 
Student  Services  for  Residence  Life 
before  the  first  day  of  the  term  to 
which  the  student  has  been  admitted. 

Resident  students  assume  respon- 
sibility for  their  rooms  and  fur- 
nishings. The  College  reserves  the 
right  to  enter  and  inspect  any  room 
for  reasons  of  damage,  health,  or 
safety,  and  to  search  any  room  when 
there  is  reason  to  believe  a  violation 
of  College  rules  or  the  law  is  occurr- 
ing or  has  occurred.  Charges  are 
assessed  for  damage  to  rooms,  doors, 
furniture,  and  common  areas. 
Wherever  possible,  damage  to  dor- 
mitory property  will  be  charged  to  the 
person  or  persons  directly  responsi- 
ble. Damage  and  breakage  occurring 
in  a  room  will  be  the  responsibility  of 
students  occupying  the  room.  Hall 
and  bathroom  damages  will  be  the 
responsibility  of  all  students  of  the 
section  where  damage  occurs.  Actual 
costs  of  repairs  will  be  charged. 

Residence  halls  are  not  available 
for  occupancy  during  the  vacation 
periods.  Quiet  hours  for  study  pur- 
poses, which  are  established  by 
residence  hall  councils  or  the  Office 
of  Student  Services,  are  published  in 
the  student  handbook  and  posted  on 
bulletin  boards. 

Room  visitation  by  members  of  the 
opposite  sex  is  permitted  in  the  halls 
under  conditions  established  by  the 
College  in  cooperation  with  the 
various  residence  hall  councils,  which 
share  responsibility  for  developing 
and  monitoring  regulations,  and 
which  are  organized  each  fall 
semester  before  visitation  schedules 
are  established. 


STANDARDS  OF  CONDUCT 

Lycoming  students  are  expected  to 
accept  responsibilities  required  of 
adults.  The  rights  of  every  member  of 
the  College  community  are  protected 
by  established  regulations.  Although 
the  acceptance  of  the  College's  stan- 
dards of  behavior  is  an  individual 
responsibility,  it  also  calls  for  group 
responsibility.  Students  should  in- 
fluence their  peers  to  conduct 
themselves  responsibly  for  the  collec- 
tive good. 

Students  who  are  unable  to 
demonstrate  that  they  have  accepted 
these  responsibilities  or  who  fail  to 
abide  by  established  policies  may  be 
dismissed  at  any  time  or  denied  read- 
mission  for  a  subsequent  term  or 
semester.  Further,  after  the  conclu- 
sion of  any  term  or  semester,  the  Col- 
lege may  deny  a  student  the  privilege 
of  attending  any  subsequent  term  or 
semester  when  the  administration 
deems  this  to  be  in  the  best  interest  of 
the  College. 

Lycoming  College  does  not  ap- 
prove of  the  use  or  misuse  of 
alcoholic  beverages  and  encourages 
students  to  abstain  from  their  use  and 
to  abide  by  the  legal  restrictions  on 
alcohol  use  established  by  the  Com- 
monwealth of  Pennsylvania.  Obser- 
vance of  the  law  is  the  individual 
responsibility  of  each  student,  and 
failure  to  obey  the  law  may  subject 
the  student  to  prosecution  by  civil 
authorities,  either  on  or  off  campus. 

Students  also  are  expected  to  be 
aware  of  the  College's  attitude 
toward  the  use  and  misuse  of  alcohol 
and  to  acknowledge  the  College's 
right  to  its  position.  The  College  will 
not  tolerate  any  public  use  of  alcohol. 
Officials  of  the  College  will  prescribe 
penalties  for  the  public  or  private 
misuse  of  alcohol.  These  penalties 
will  be  applied  in  a  consistent  man- 
ner. 

Lycoming  recognizes  its  respon- 
sibility,    however,     for     providing 


students  with  reliable  information 
about  the  social  and  medical  implica- 
tions of  the  use  of  alcohol.  Lycoming 
makes  every  effort  to  create  and 
maintain  a  community  in  which  in- 
dividual choice  is  coupled  with 
responsible  behavior  and  respect  for 
the  rights  of  others. 

Upon  enrolling,  students  are  given 
a  handbook  which  contains  the  Col- 
lege's official  policies,  rules,  and 
regulations.  These  policies,  rules,  and 
regulations  are  part  of  the  contractual 
agreement  students  enter  into  when 
they  register  at  Lycoming. 


58 


Admission  to  Lycoming 


POLICY  AND  STANDARDS 

Lycoming  College  welcomes  applica- 
tions from  prospective  students 
regardless  of  age,  sex,  race,  religion, 
financial  resources,  color,  national  or 
ethnic  origin,  or  handicap.  Admis- 
sion is  based  on  the  following  stan- 
dards: 

—  graduation  from  an  accredited 
secondary  school; 

—  completion  of  a  college 
preparatory  program  that  in- 
cludes English  and 
mathematics  plus  units  in 
foreign  language,  natural 
science  and  social  science; 

—  satisfactory  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  Scholastic 
Aptitude  Test  (SAT)  or 
American  College  Test  (ACT) 
scores. 

A  secondary-school  student  of  ex- 
ceptional maturity  and  with  signifi- 
cant academic  preparation  may  apply 
to  Lycoming  as  a  candidate  for  early 
admission.  If  admitted,  the  student 
enters  the  College  after  completing 
the  junior  year  in  school.  Students 
who  are  not  enrolled  in  a  degree  pro- 
gram and  who  wish  to  enroll  in  one  or 
more  courses  in  any  semester  are 
welcome  to  apply. 

Lycoming  is  fully  approved  for  the 
educational  program  for  veterans. 


APPLICATION  AND  SELECTION 
PROCESS 

For  students  considering  a  fall 
semester  admission,  applications 
should  be  filed  by  April  1.  The  ap- 
plication should  be  accompanied  by  a 
$20  application  fee,  an  official  secon- 
dard  school  transcript  forwarded  by 
the  school  guidance  office,  and  the 
results  of  either  the  Scholastic  Ap- 
titude Test  (SAT)  or  the  American 
College  Test  (ACT).  Applications  are 
considered  after  April  1  on  a  space- 
available  basis. 

The  completed  application  is 
evaulated  individually  by  identifying 
each   applicant's   academic   achieve- 


ment, talents,  qualities,  and  interests. 
Lycoming  notifies  applicants  of  their 
acceptance  as  soon  as  possible  after 
all  credentials  have  been  received  and 
evaluated.  In  some  instances,  addi- 
tional information  may  be  needed  to 
complete  the  evaluation.  The  review 
process  normally  begins  after 
January  1. 

Admitted  applicants  must  notify 
the  College  of  their  intent  to  enroll  by 
May  1,  the  national  candidates'  reply 
date.  This  notification  must  be  ac- 
companied by  a  $100  advance  deposit 
which  is  applied  to  the  first-term  tui- 
tion. After  May  1,  the  $100  deposit  is 
not  refundable. 


ADVANCED  STANDING  BY 
TRANSFER 

The  College  welcomes  transfer 
students  from  other  accredited  col- 
leges and  universities  according  to  the 
following  standards  and  procedures: 

—  applicant  must  be  in  good 
academic  standing,  and  pre- 
sent a  minimum  transfer  grade 
point  average  of  2.0; 

—  all  courses  comparable  to 
those  offered  in  the  cur- 
riculum at  Lycoming  will  be 
accepted  for  transfer; 

—  the  grades  earned  in  all 
transferable  courses  are  in- 
cluded in  the  computation  of 
the  transfer  grade  point 
average; 

—  academic  standing  at  Lycom- 
ing will  be  based  on  an  evalua- 
tion of  all  courses  attempted  at 
all  other  institutions; 

—  the  final  eight  courses  for  a 
degree  must  be  taken  at 
Lycoming. 

—  official  copies  of  transcripts 
from  all  institutions  attended 
must  be  submitted  as  a  part  of 
the  admission  application. 


ADMISSIONS  OFFICE 
LOCATION  AND  HOURS 

Prospective  students  and  their 
families  are  encouraged  to  visit  the 
campus  for  a  student-conducted  tour 
and  an  interview  with  an  admissions 
officer,  who  will  provide  additional 
information  about  the  College  and 
answer  any  questions. 

The  Admissions  Office  is  located 
on  the  first  floor  of  Long  Hall.  For 
an  appointment,  telephone  (717) 
326-1951,  or  write  Office  of  Admis- 
sions, Lycoming  College, 
Williamsport,  PA  17701.  Office 
hours  are: 

Weekdays— September  through  April 
9  a.m.  to  4:30  p.m. 
— May  through  August 
9  a.m.  to  4  p.m. 
Saturdays — September  through  April 
9  a.m.  to  12  noon 
— May  through  August 
No  Saturday  hours. 


59 


Expenses  and  Financial  Aid 


EXPENSES  FOR 
THE  ACADEMIC  YEAR  1982-83 

The  following  expenses  are  effective 
for  the  regular  fall  and  spring 
semesters.  The  College  reserves  the 
right  to  adjust  fees  at  any  time.  The 
fees  for  each  semester  are  payable  not 
later  than  the  second  day  of  classes 
for  the  semester. 


Fees 

Comprehensive 

Fee 

Board  and 

Room  Rent 

Total 


Per 

Semester 

$2,490 

1,100 
$3,590 


Per 
Year 

$4,980 

2,200 
$7,180 


One-Time  Student  Fees 

Application  Fee 

Admissions  Deposit 

Contingency  Deposit 


.$  20 
.   100 

.     75 


Part-Time  Student  Fees 

Application  Fee $  20 

Each  Unit  Course 625 

Additional  Charges 

Applied  Music  Fee  (half-hour 

per  week  per  semester 95 

Cap  and  Gown  Rental prevailing  cost 

Laboratory  Fee  per  Unit  Course 5  to  50 

Reregistration  Fee 25 

Parking  Permit 

(for  the  academic  year) 10  to  15 

Parking  Permit  with  Reserved 

Space  (for  the  academic  year) 15  to  35 

Practice  Teaching  Fee 

(Payable  in  Junior  Year) 150 

R.O.T.C.  Basic  Course  Deposit 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University 60 

R.O.T.C.  Advanced  Course  Deposit 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University) 60 

Transcript  Fee 

(No  charge  to  full-time  students 3 

Medical  Questionnaire  Fee 

(Payable  to  Medical  Datamation, 

Inc.) 10 

The  comprehensive  fee  covers  the 
regular  course  load  of  three  to  four 
courses  each  semester.  Resident 
students  must  board  at  the  College 
unless,  for  extraordinary  reasons, 
authorization  is  extended  for  other 
eating  arrangements.  If  a  double 
room  is  used  as  a  single  room,  there  is 
an  additional  charge  of  $200  per 
semester.    The    estimated    cost    for 


books  and  supplies  is  up  to  $200  per 
year,  depending  on  the  course  of 
study.  Special  session  (May  term  and 
summer  term)  charges  for  tuition, 
room,  and  board  are  established  dur- 
ing the  fall  semester. 


ENTRY  FEES  AND  DEPOSITS 

Application  Fee— All  students  for 
admission  must  submit  a  $20  applica- 
tion fee.  This  charge  defrays  the  cost 
of  processing  the  application  and  is 
nonrefundable. 

Admissions  Deposit — After 
students  have  been  notified  of  their 
admission  to  Lycoming,  they  are  re- 
quired to  make  a  $100  admissions 
deposit  to  confirm  their  intention  to 
matriculate.  The  deposit  is  applied  to 
the  general  charges  for  the  first 
semester  of  attendance.  After  May  1, 
the  deposit  is  nonrefundable. 

Contingency  Deposit— A  con- 
tingency deposit  of  $75  is  required  of 
all  full-time  students  as  a  guarantee 
for  payment  of  damage  to  or  loss  of 
College  property,  for  library  and 
parking  fines,  or  similar  penalties  im- 
posed by  the  College.  The  deposit  is 
collected  along  with  other  charges  for 
the  initial  semester.  The  balance  of 
this  deposit  is  refunded  after  all  debts 
to  the  College  have  been  paid,  either 
upon  graduation  or  upon  written  re- 
quest submitted  to  the  Registrar  two 
weeks  prior  to  voluntary  permanent 
termination  of  enrollment  at  Lycom- 
ing College. 


PARTIAL  PAYMENTS 

For  the  convenience  of  those  who 
find  it  impossible  to  follow  the 
regular  schedule  of  payments,  ar- 
rangements may  be  made  with  the 
College  Business  Manager  for  the 
monthly  payment  of  College  fees 
through  various  educational  plans. 
Additional  information  concerning 
partial  payments  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Business  Manager  or  Direc- 
tor of  Admissions. 


REFUNDS  FOR  STUDENTS 
WHO  WITHDRAW 

Refunds  of  tuition  and  board  are 
made  to  students  who  voluntarily  and 
officially  withdraw  from  the  College 
while  in  good  standing  according  to 
the  following  schedule  for  the  fall  and 
spring  semesters  and  the  comparable 
period  for  the  May  and  summer 
terms: 


Period  of 
Withdrawal 

During  the  first 

week  of  the 

semester 
During  second 

and  third  week 
During  the 

fourth  and 

fifth  week 
During  the  sixth 

and  seventh 

week 
After  seven 

weeks 


Refund 

% 

80 
60 

40 

20 
0 


Charge 

% 

20 
40 

60 

80 
100 


60 


The  date  on  which  the  Dean  of  the 
College  approves  the  student's 
withdrawal  form  is  considered  the  of- 
ficial date  of  withdrawal.  Charges  are 
levied  for  services  provided  after 
withdrawal. 

Lycoming  scholarships  and  grants 
are  applied  during  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters  on  the  same  basis  as  tuition 
charges.  If  a  withdrawing  student  is 
charged  60%  tuition,  he/she  will 
receive  60%  of  the  scholarship  or 
grant.  Government  financial  aid  is 
adjusted  according  to  federal  and 
state  guidelines. 

Room  charges,  which  are  establish- 
ed on  a  semester  basis,  and  special 
charges,  such  as  laboratory  fees,  are 
not  refundable  if  a  student  leaves  the 
College  prior  to  the  end  of  the 
semester. 

Full-time  students  who  after  reduc- 
ing their  loads  continue  to  be  enrolled 
for  12  or  more  semester  hours  are  not 
eligible  for  a  refund  of  tuition  for  an 
individual  course.  Similarly,  students 
who  register  for  extra  hours  in  excess 
of  16  hours  per  semester  and  who 
later  reduce  their  loads  are  not  elibi- 
ble  after  the  fifth  day  of  the  semester 


for  a  refund  of  the  fee  charged  for 
overloads.  Charges  will  be 
recalculated  for  students  who  enroll 
full  time  and  subsequently  assume 
part-time  status  by  reducing  their 
loads  below  12  hours  during  the  drop- 
add  period.  The  assumption  of  part- 
time  status  normally  involves  a 
substantial  reduction  of  financial  aid 
since  most  financial  aid  programs  do 
not  extend  eligibility  to  part-time 
students. 

NON-PAYMENT  OF  FEES 
PENALTY 

Students  will  not  be  registered  for 
courses  in  a  new  semester  if  their  ac- 
counts for  previous  attendance  have 
not  been  settled.  Diplomas, 
transcripts,  and  certifications  of 
withdrawals  in  good  standing  are 
issued  only  when  a  satisfactory  settle- 
ment of  all  financial  obligations  has 
been  made  in  the  Business  Office. 

FINANCIAL  AID  POLICY 
AND  PROCEDURES 

The  dominant  factor  in  determining 
the  amount  of  financial  aid  awarded 
to  individual  students  is  the  establish- 
ment of  need.  Scholarships  may  be 
awarded  on  the  basis  of  financial 
need  and  academic  ability,  while 
grants  are  provided  on  the  basis  of 
financial  need.  Long-term,  low-cost 
educational  loans  are  available  from 
federal  and  state  sources  to  most 
students  who  can  demonstrate  need. 
Part-time  employment  is  available  to 
students. 

To  apply  for  financial  assistance, 
obtain  Lycoming's  Financial  Aid  Ap- 
plication (FAA)  from  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid  and  the  CSS  Financial 
Aid  Form  (FAF)  from  the  secondary- 
school  guidance  office  or  Lycoming's 
Office  of  Financial  Aid.  Submit  the 
FAA  to  Lycoming  and  the  completed 
FAF  to  the  College  Scholarship  Ser- 
vice, P.O.  Box  2700,  Princeton,  NJ 
08541,  as  early  as  possible  after 
January  1.  Renewal  applications  are 
required  annually. 


Scholarships — Freshman  Recogni- 
tion Scholarships  of  $700  to  $1,000 
each  are  awarded  to  applicants  who 
have  superior  academic  qualifications 
but  do  not  demonstrate  financial 
need.  These  scholarships  are 
renewable  each  year  if  the  student 
maintains  a  minimum  3.25 
cumulative  grade  point  average. 
Other  scholarships,  ranging  from 
$400  to  full  tuition,  are  awarded  to 
freshman  who  rank  in  the  top  fifth  of 
their  secondary-school  class  and  have 
a  combined  score  of  more  than  1100 
on  the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test 
(SAT).  These  scholarships  are 
renewable  each  year  if  the  student 
maintains  a  minimum  3.00 
cumulative  grade  point  average. 

Grants-In-Aid — Lycoming  has 
established  an  extensive  program  of 
grants-in-aid  for  worthy  students  who 
do  not  qualify  for  scholarships. 
Awards  are  based  on  demonstrated 
need  and  the  prospect  of  the  student 
contributing  positively  to  the  College 
community.  Renewal  requires  con- 
tinued financial  need,  maintenance  of 
satisfactory  academic  and  citizenship 
standards,  and  participation  in  Col- 
lege activities. 

Ministerial  Grants-In-Aid  — 
Children  of  ministers  of  the  Central 
Pennsylvania  Conference  of  The 
United  Methodist  Church  receive 
grants  equal  to  one-third  of  the 
charges  for  tuition,  while  children  of 
ministers  of  other  Conferences  of  The 
United  Methodist  Church  and  of 
other  denominations  receive  grants 
equal  to  one-fourth  of  the  charges  for 
tuition.  Students  who  will  be  entering 
the  ministry  may  apply  for  a 
preministerial  student  grant  equal  to 
one-fourth  tuition.  Applicants  must 
complete  and  submit  the  Financial 
Aid  Form  (FAF),  and  pre-ministerial 
students  must  also  submit  the  Ap- 
plication for  Pre-Ministerial  Grant.  If 
an  applicant  demonstrates  more  need 
for  financial  assistance  than  a 
ministerial  grant-in-aid  provides,  ad- 
ditional types  of  aid  will  be  con- 
sidered. These  grants-in-aid  are  part 


of  a  total  financial  assistance  award 
to  meet  demonstrated  need  and  are 
not  given  in  addition  to  awards 
designed  to  meet  established  needs. 

Pell  Grant  formerly  Federal  Basic 
Educational  Opportunity  Grant 
(BEOG)— These  grants,  established 
through  the  Educational  Amend- 
ments of  1976,  provide  up  to  $1,600 
per  year  for  full-time  students  who 
can  demonstrate  financial  need.  Ap- 
plication can  be  made  when  submit- 
ting the  Financial  Aid  Form  (FAF), 
the  PHEAA  State  Grant  Application, 
or  by  separate  federal  application  on 
forms  which  are  available  in 
secondary-school  guidance  offices 
and  the  Office  of  Student  Financial 
Aid  at  Lycoming.  All  students  are 
urged  to  apply  for  this  program. 

Supplemental  Educational  Oppor- 
tunity Grants  (SEOG)— This  federal 
government  program  provides  addi- 
tional assistance  to  those  students 
with  financial  need.  Awards  can  be 
made  in  amounts  ranging  from  $200 
to  $2,000  and  are  usually  based  en- 
tirely on  exceptional  financial  need. 
Renewal  is  possible  if  the  applicant 
has  no  reduction  in  financial  need  in 
succeeding  years. 

National  Direct  Student  Loan 
(NDSL) — This  federal  five  percent  in- 
terest loan  permits  a  total  of  $6,000  to 
be  borrowed  by  the  undergraduate 
student  at  a  rate  not  to  exceed  $3,000 
the  first  two  years.  Repayment  does 
not  begin  until  after  graduation  or 
withdrawal  from  college.  Loans  are 
normally  renewed  annually  if  the  ap- 
plicant files  a  renewal  application  by 
May  1  and  continues  to  demonstrate 
financial  need. 

Federal  College  Work-Study 
Grants  (CWSP)— An  opportunity  is 
provided  through  this  program  for 
students  to  earn  part  of  their  college 
expenses  and  to  gain  some  practical 
experience  by  working  on  campus. 
Federal  government  financial-need 
guidelines  must  be  met  to  be  eligible 
for  this  program.  Students  who  do 
not  meet  these  guidelines  should  con- 
sult with  the  Career  Development 
Center  or  Office  of  Student  Financial 


61 


Aid    for   other   employment   oppor- 
tunities. 

Other  Sources  of  Financial 
Assistance — 

State  Grants.  All  applicants  for 
financial  aid  are  urged  to  investigate 
programs  sponsored  by  their  home 
states  and  to  learn  about  and  heed  ap- 
plication deadlines.  Pennsylvania  ap- 
plicants should  apply  for  state  aid 
during  their  senior  year  in  high 
school,  usually  before  April  30.  For 
additional  information,  applicants 
should  contact  their  secondary-school 
guidance  counselor  or  write:  Penn- 
sylvania Higher  Education  Assistance 
Agency  (PHEAA),  Towne  House, 
Harrisburg,  PA  17102.  New  Jersey 
applicants  should  use  the  New  Jersey 
version  of  the  CSS  Financial  Aid 
Form  to  apply  for  their  state  Tuition 
Aid  Grant. 

State  Guaranteed  Loans.  Most 
states,  including  Pennsylvania,  New 
Jersey,  and  New  York,  provide  state- 
guaranteed  loans  through  local  banks 


and  lending  institutions.  This  pro- 
gram provides  7-9  percent  interest 
loans  of  up  to  $2,500  per  year  for 
educational  expenses  with  repayment 
extended  over  a  long-term  schedule. 
Applicants  should  consult  local  banks 
early  in  their  senior  year. 

PLUS  Loans.  PLUS  Loans  are 
meant  to  provide  additional  funds  for 
educational  expenses.  The  interest 
rate  is  14  percent.  Parents  of  depen- 
dent undergraduate  students  may 
borrow  up  to  $3,000  per  year.  In- 
dependent undergraduates  may  bor- 
row up  to  $2,500  per  year;  however, 
the  PLUS  loan,  combined  with  any 
GSL  the  undergraduate  may  have  for 
that  level,  cannot  exceed  $2,500.  Ap- 
plications and  information  are 
available  from  your  bank  or  other 
lending  institution. 

Community  Scholarships.  In  many 
communities,  foundations  and 
organizations,  and  in  some  cases  high 
schools,  provide  funds  for  worthy 
students.  Applicants  should  consult 
with  their  guidance  counselor  or  prin- 
cipal. 


Education  Financing  Plans.  The 
Business  Office  at  Lycoming  provides 
information  about  plans  which 
enable  parents  to  pay  college  expenses 
on  a  monthly  basis  through  selected 
companies. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps 
(ROTC)  Scholarships.  Students  who 
participate  in  Army  ROTC  are  eligi- 
ble for  three,  two,  and  one-year 
ROTC  scholarships  to  finance  tui- 
tion, books,  laboratory  fees,  and 
other  charges  with  the  exception  of 
room  and  board.  ROTC-scholarship 
students  also  receive  $100  per  month 
during  the  academic  year. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps 
(ROTC)  Stipends.  Students  who  par- 
ticipate in  the  Army  ROTC  program 
receive  $100  per  academic  month  of 
their  junior  and  senior  years.  They 
also  receive  half  of  a  second  lieu- 
tenant's pay  plus  travel  expenses  for  a 
six-week  advanced  summer  camp  be- 
tween junior  and  senior  years. 


62 


Academic  Calendar:  1982-83 


Fall  semester 

Bills  are  due August  26 

Orientation  of  new  faculty August  27 

Residence  halls  open August  29 

Faculty  available  for  advising August  30 

Classes  begin  first  period August  31 

Processing  of  drop/add  begins August  31 

Re-registration  fee  of  $25  applies  after  this  date September  6 

Last  day  for  drop/add September  6 

Last  day  to  elect  audit  and  satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades September  6 

Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for  courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades  were 

recorded  in  spring.  May,  and  summer  terms October  12 

Mid-semester  deficiency  reports  for  freshmen  due  in  Registrar's  Office  at  noon October  18 

Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for  courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades 

were  recorded  in  fall  semester 

Preregistration  for  students  who  have  completed  at  least  one  semester November  8-10 

Preregistration  for  sophomores  through  seniors 

Preregistration  for  freshmen November  13 

Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W,  WP,  WF  grades November  23 

Residence  halls  close  at  10a.m.  for  Thanksgiving  recess November  24 

Residence  halls  open  at  noon  after  Thanksgiving  recess November  28 

Classes  resume  first  period  after  Thanksgiving November  29 

Residence  halls  close  at  9  p.m.  for  spring  recess 

Residence  halls  open  at  noon  after  spring  recess 

Classes  resume  first  period  after  spring  recess 

Semester  ends  at  5  p.m December  17 

Residence  halls  close  at  9  p.  m December  17 

May  term 

Residence  halls  open May  8 

Classes  begin May  9 

Last  day  for  drop/add May  10 

Last  day  to  elect  audit  and  satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades May  10 

Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W,  WP,  WF  grades May  27 

Terms  ends June  3 

Residence  halls  close  at  4  p.m June  3 


Spring  semester 

January  6 

January  9 

January  10 
January  10 
January  14 
January  14 
January  14 


February  28 
February  18 


April  4-6 
April  9 
April  8 


March  4 
March  13 
March  14 
April  29 
April  29 

Summer  term 

June  19 
June  20 
June  22 
June  22 
July  15 
July  29 
July  29 


Special  dates  to  remember: 

Freshman  convocation August  31 

All-College  picnic September  4 

Labor  Day  (classes  in  session) September  6 

Homecoming  Weekend October  1-3 

Parents  Weekend October  15-17 

Long  weekend  (classes  suspended) October  29 

Thanksgiving  recess November  23-28 

Spring  recess March  4-13 

Good  Friday  (afternoon  classes  suspended) April  1 

Honors  Day April  12 

Baccalaureate May  8 

Commencement May  8 

Memorial  Day  (no  classes) May  30 

Independence  Day  (no  classes) July  4 


63 


Directory 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

Officers 

W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D Chairman 

Nathan  W.  Stuart,  J.D Vice  Chairman 

Paul  G.  Gilmore Secretary 

William  L.  Baker  Treasurer 

Fred  A.  Pennington,  LL.D Chairman  Emeritus 

Honorary  Trustees 
Bishop  Hermann  W.  Kaebnick, 

D.D.,  L.H.D.,  LL.D Hershey 

Ralph  E.  Kelchner  Jersey  Shore 

Arnold  A.  Phipps,  II  Williamsport 

Mrs.  Donald  G.  Remley  Williamsport 

George  L.  Stearns,  II  Williamsport 

Trustees 
Term  expires  1983 
Elected 

1980     Richard  W.DeWald  Montoursville 

1974     Daniel  G.  Fultz  Pittsford,  NY 

1980  David  M.  Heiney,  Ed. D Hughesville 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1965  James  G.  Law,  D.  Text.  Sci Bloomsburg 

1970  John  E.  Person,  Jr Williamsport 

1972  Donald  E.  Shearer,  M.D Montoursville 

1961  Nathan  W.  Stuart,  J.D Williamsport 

1971  Willis  W.  Willard,  III,  M.D Hershey 

1954  W.  Russell  Zacharias  Allentown 

Term  expires  1984 
Elected 

1981  John  B.  Ernst  Doylestown 

(Alumni  Representative) 
1969     Samuel  H.  Evert  Bloomsburg 

1972  The  Rev.  Brian  A.  Fetterman  Harrisburg 

1978     Harold  D.  Hershberger,  Jr Williamsport 

1969     Kenneth  E.  Himes  Williamsport 

1978     JohnC.  Lundy  Williamsport 

1981  William  Pickelner Williamsport 

1978     John  Y.  Schreyer  Little  Falls,  NJ 

1978  M.  L.  Sharrah,  Ph.D New  Canaan,  CT 

1972  Harold  H.  Shreckengast,  Jr Jenkintown 

Term  expires  1985 
Elected 

1979  David  Y.  Brouse Williamsport 

1951     PaulG.  Gilmore Williamsport 

1982  Mrs.  Margaret  D.  L'Heureux  Williamsport 

1973  Robert  G.  Little,  M.D Harrisburg 

1979     David  J.  Loomis,  Ph.D Troy 

(Alumni  Representative) 
1964     W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D Baltimore,  MD 

64~ 


1973  G.  Jackson  Miller  Altoona 

1958  Fred  A.  Pennington,  LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1982  Mrs.  Marguerite  G.  Rich  Woolrich 

1961  The  Rev.  Wallace  F.  Stealer,  HH.D Kingston 

1982  The  Rev.  Stratford  C.  Taylor  Montoursville 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

FREDERICK  E.  BLUMER  (1976) 

President 

B.A.,  Millsaps  College;  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Emory 

University 
SHIRLEY  A.  VAN  MARTER  (1979) 

Dean  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College;  M.A.,  Northwestern 

University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 
WILLIAM  L.  BAKER  (1965) 

Treasurer 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College 
JACK  C.  BUCKLE  (1957) 

Dean  of  Student  Services 

A.B.,  Juniata  College;  M.S.,  Syracuse  University 
PAUL  C.  HASSENPLUG  (1981) 

Director  of  Institutional  Planning  and  Development 

B.S.,  Rochester  Institute  of  Technology 
MARSHALL  RAUCCI,  JR.  (1982) 

Director  of  Admissions 

B.A.,  Marist  College;  M.S.  Ed.,  SUNY  College  at 

Buffalo 
CHRISTINE  D.  BARTH  (1982) 

Admissions  Counselor 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College 
BETTY  S.  BECK  (1965) 

Bookstore  Manager 
DALE  V.  BOWER  (1968) 

Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College;  B.D.,  United  Theological 

Seminary 
GEORGE  W.  BRELSFORD  (1982) 

Residence  Area  Coordinator 

B.S.,  Davis  &  Elkins  College 
CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) 

Director  of  Athletics 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Universitv  of  Pittsburgh 
LOUISE  A.  CALIGIURi  (1978) 

Associate  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Duquesne  University 
JOANNE  B.  DAY  (1981) 

Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Western  Maryland  College 
ROBERT  L.  EDDINGER  (1967) 

Director  of  Buildings  &  Grounds 


JERRY  L.  EISCHEID  (1981) 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania 

Campus  Minister 

State  University 

B.S.,  Mansfield  State  College;  M.Div.,  United 

Theological  Seminary  at  Dayton 

FRED  L.  GROGAN  (1977) 

Assistant  Dean  of  the  College 

A.B.,  Bates  College;  M.A.,  Arizona  State  University; 

FACULTY 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Missouri 

THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966) 

EMERITI 

Director  of  Computer  Services 

B.S.,  Wake  Forest  College;  M.A.,  University  of 

MABEL  K.  BAUER 

Kansas 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

MARY  E.  HERRING  (1978) 

B.S.,  Cornell  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

Pennsylvania 

B.A.,  Albright  College 

LEROY  F.  DERR 

RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Chaplain  of  the  College 

A.B.,  Ursinus  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University; 

B.A.,  Indiana  Central  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston 

Ed.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

University 

ROBERT  H.  EWING 

BRUCE  M.  HURLBERT  (1982) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Director  of  Library  Services 

A.B.,  College  of  Wooster;  M.A.,  University  of 

B.A.,  The  Citadel;  M.S.L.S.,  Florida  State  University 

Michigan;  HH.D.,  Lycoming  College 

HAROLD  H.  HUTSON  (1969) 

JOHN  P.  GRAHAM 

President  Emeritus 

Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

B.A.,  L.L.D.,  Wofford  College;  B.D.,  Duke  University 

Ph.B.,  Dickinson  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago;  L.H.D.,  Ohio  Wesleyan 

State  University 

University 

HAROLD  W.  HAYDEN 

DOUGLAS  J.  KEIPER  (1970) 

Librarian  Emeritus  and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Library 

Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

Services 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania 

A.B.,  Nebraska  State  Teachers  College;  B.S., 

State  University 

University  of  Illinois;  M.A.  in  L.S.,  University  of 

BETTY  J.  PARIS  (1963) 

Michigan 

Registrar 

GEORGE  W.  HOWE 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 

JULIANN  T.  PAWLAK  (1979) 

A.B.,  M.S.,  Syracuse  University;  Ph.D.,  Cornell 

Director  of  Financial  Aid 

University 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 

M.  RAYMOND  JAMISON 

MARLENE  D.  PETTER  (1982) 

Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 

Assistant  Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.S.,  Bucknell  University 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

WALTER  G.  McIVER 

JEFFREY  L.  RICHARDS  (1982) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Controller  and  Assistant  Treasurer 

Mus.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College;  A.B.,  Bucknell 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College 

University;  M.A.,  New  York  University 

WILLIAM  H.  RUPP  (1979) 

LORING  B.  PRIEST 

Director  of  Public  Relations 

Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

B.A.,  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

Litt.B.,  Rutgers  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard 

GORDON  S.  STEARNS  (1982) 

University 

Residence  Area  Coordinator 

DONALD  G.  REMLEY 

B.A.,  Bowdoin  College 

Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics  and 

THOMAS  P.  WOZNIAK  (1979) 

Physics 

Associate  Dean  of  Student  Services 

A.B.,  Dickinson  College;  M.A.,  Columbia  University 

B.A.,  Merrimack  College;  M.Ed.,  Worcester  State 

MARY  LANDON  RUSSELL 

College 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

RALPH  E.  ZEIGLER,  JR.  (1980) 

Mus.B.,  Susquehanna  University  Conservatory  of 

Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

Music;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

65 


LOUISE  R.  SCHAEFFER 

JACK  S.  McCRARY  (1969) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Sociology 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University; 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Southern  Methodist  University;  Ph.D., 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsvlvania  State  University 

Washington  University 

JAMES  W.  SHEAFFER 

ROGER  W.  OPDAHL  (1963) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Economics 

B.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.S., 

A.B.,  Hofstra  University;  M.A.,  Columbia  University; 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsvlvania  State  University 

FRANCES  K.  SKEATH 

ROBERT  W.  RABOLD  (1955) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

Economics 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Bucknell  University;  D.Ed.,  The 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.A., 

Pennsvlvania  State  University 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

JOHN  A.  STUART 

JOHN  A.  RADSPINNER  (1957) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

Chemistry 

B.A.,  William  Jewell  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

B.S.,  University  of  Richmond;  M.S.,  Virginia 

Northwestern  University 

Polytechnic  Institute;  D.Sc,  Carnegie-Mellon 

HELEN  B.  WEIDMAN 

University 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

LOGAN  A.  RICHMOND  (1954) 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Bucknell  University;  Ph.D.,  Syracuse 

Accounting 

University 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College;  M.B.A.,  New  York 

University;  C.P.A.  (Pennsvlvania) 

JANET  A.RODGERS  (1981) 

PROFESSORS 

Nursing 

B.S.  Wagner  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  New  York 

MALTHON  M.  ANAPOL  (1981) 

University 

Mass  Communication 

SHIRLEY  A.  VAN  MARTER  (1979) 

B.S.,  Rutgers  University;  M.A.,  Temple  University; 

Dean  of  the  College  English 

Ph.D.,  The  Ohio  State  University 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College;  M.A.,  Northwestern 

ROBERT  F.  FALK  (1970) 

University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 

Theatre  Marshal  of  the  College 

B.A.,  B.D.,  Drew  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Wayne 

State  University 

MORTON  A.  FINEMAN  (1966) 

Physics 

ASSOCIA  TE  PROFESSORS 

A.B.,  Indiana  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 

ROBERT  B.  ANGSTADT  (1967) 

ERNEST  D.  GIGLIO  (1972) 

Biology 

Political  Science 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Cornell 

B.A.,  Queens  College;  M.A.,  SUNY  at  Albany; 

University 

Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

HOWARD  C.  BERTHOLD,  JR.  (1976) 

EDUARDO  GUERRA  (1960) 

Psychology 

Religion 

B.A.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College;  M.A., 

B.D.,  Southern  Methodist  University;  S.T.M.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Iowa;  Ph.D.,  The  University  of 

Union  Theological  Seminary 

Massachusetts 

JOHN  G.  HANCOCK  (1967)' 

CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) 

Psychology 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Bucknell  University;  Ph.D.,  The 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Pennsvlvania  State  University 

JACK  S.  DIEHL,  JR.  (1971) 

JOHN  G.  HOLLENBACK  (1952) 

Biology 

Business  Administration 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Sam  Houston  State  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

B.S.,  M.B.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

University  of  Connecticut 

JAMES  K.  HUMMER  (1962) 

BERNARD  P.  FLAM  (1963) 

Chemistry 

Spanish 

B.N.S.,  Tufts  University;  M.S.,  Middlebury  College; 

A.B.,  New  York  University;  M.A.,  Harvard 

Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina 

University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin 

66 


WILLIAM  D.  FORD  (1972) 

English 

B.A.,  Occidental  College;  M.A.,  M.F.A.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Iowa 
DAVID  A.  FRANZ  (1970) 

Chemistry 

A.B.,  Princeton  University;  M. A.  T,  The  Johns 

Hopkins  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
CHARLES  L.  GETCHELL  (1967) 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Massachusetts;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

Harvard  University 
STEPHEN  R.  GRIFFITH  (1970) 

Philosophy 

A.B.,  Cornell  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 
DAVID  K.  HALEY  (1980) 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  Acadia  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Queen's 

University 
JOHN  R.  HUBBARD  (1975)  * 

Mathematics 

A.B.,  University  of  Rochester;  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan 
RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970) 

Religion 

B.A.,  Indiana  Central  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston 

University 
BRUCE  M.  HURLBERT  (1982) 

Library  Services 

B.A.,  The  Citadel;  M.S.L.S.,  Florida  State  University 
EMILY  R.  JENSEN  (1969) 

English 

B.A.,  Jamestown  College;  M.A.,  University  of 

Denver;  Ph.D.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
MOON  H.  JO  (1975)  ** 

Sociology 

B.A.,  Valparaiso  University;  M.A.,  Howard 

University;  Ph.D.,  New  York  University 
FORREST  E.  KEESBURY  (1970) 

Education 

B.S.,  Defiance  College;  M.A.,  Bowling  Green  State 

University;  Ed.D.,  Lehigh  University 
ROBERT  H.  LARSON  (1969) 

History 

B.A.,  The  Citadel;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Virginia 
PAUL  A.  MacKENZIE  (1970) 

German 

A.B.,  A.M..  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
GERTRUDE  B.  MADDEN  (1958) 

English 

A.B.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.A.,  Bucknell 

University 


ROBERT  J.  B.  MAPLES  (1969) 

French 

A.B.,  University  of  Rochester;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 
JOHN  F.  PIPER,  JR.  (1969) 

History 

A.B.,  Lafayette  College;  B.D.,  Yale  University; 

Ph.D.,  Duke  University 
DAVID  J.  RIFE  (1970) 

English 

B.A.,  University  of  Florida;  M. A.,  Ph.D.,  Southern 

Illinois  University 
MICHAEL  G.  ROSKIN  (1972) 

Political  Science 

A.B.,  University  of  California  at  Berkeley;  M.A., 

University  of  California  at  Los  Angeles;  Ph.D.,  The 

American  University 
ROGER  D.  SHIPLEY  (1967) 

Art 

B.A.,  Otterbein  College;  M.F.A.,  Cranbrook 

Academv  of  Art 
JOHN  M.WHELAN,  JR.  (1971) 

Philosophy 

B.A.,  University  of  Notre  Dame;  Ph.D., 

The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 
STANLEY  T.  WILK  (1973) 

Anthropology 

B.A.,  Hunter  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
ROBERT  A.  ZACCARIA  (1973) 

Biology 

B.A.,  Bridgewater  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Virginia 


*On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1982-83 
**On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1982-83 


ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS 

RICHARD  J.  BARKER  (1982) 

Spanish 

B.A.,  Hamilton  College; 

M.A.,  University  of  Iowa;  Ph.D.  University  of  Oregon 
SUSAN  K.  BEIDLER  (1975) 

Library  Services 

B.A.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.L.S.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 
GARY  M.  BOERCKEL  (1979) 

Music 

B.M.,  Oberlin  College;  M.M.,  Ohio  University; 

D.M.A.,  University  of  Iowa 
JON  R.  BOGLE  (1976) 

Art 

B.F.A.,  B.S.,  M.F.A.,  Tyler  School  of  Art,  Temple 

University 


67 


ROLF  T.  CARLSON  (1981) 

STEPHEN  E.  ROBINSON  (1979) 

Theatre 

Religion 

B.S.,  Kearney  State  College;  M.F.A.,  University  of 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Brigham  Young  University;  Ph.D.,  Duke 

Montana 

University 

JOHN  H.  CONRAD  (1959) 

KATHRYN  M.  RYAN  (1981) 

Education 

Psychology 

B.S.,  Mansfield  State  College;  M.A.,  New  York 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

University 

Pittsburgh 

RICHARD  R.  ERICKSON  (1973) 

GENE  D.  SPRECHINI  (1981) 

Astronomy  and  Physics 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  University  of  Minnesota;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

B.S.,  Wilkes  College; 

University  of  Chicago 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 

EDWARD  G.  GABRIEL  (1977) 

LARRY  R.  STRAUSER  (1973) 

Biology 

Sociology 

B.A.,  M.S.,  Alfred  University;  Ph.D.,  The  Ohio  State 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.P.A.,  University  of 

University 

A  rizona 

FRED  L.  GROGAN  (1977) 

FRED  M.  THAYER,  JR.  (1976) 

Political  Science 

Music 

A.B.,  Bates  College;  M.A.,  Arizona  State  University; 

A.B.,  Syracuse  University;  B.M.,  Ithaca  College; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Missouri 

M.M.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton;  D.M.A.,  Cornell 

THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966) 

University 

Director  of  Computer  Services  Mathematics 

H.  BRUCE  WEAVER  (1974) 

B.S.,  Wake  Forest  College;  M. A.,  University  of 

Business  Administration 

Kansas 

B.B.A.,  Stetson  University;  J.D.,  Vanderbilt 

OWEN  F.  HERRING  (1965) 

University;  M.B.A.,  Florida  Technological  University 

Philosophy 

BUDD  F.  WHITEHILL  (1957) 

B.A.,  Wake  Forest  College 

Physical  Education 

DAVID  N.  JEX  (1978) 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College 

Music 

M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

B.M.,  University  of  Toledo;  M.M.,  Bowling  Green 

RICHARD  E.  WIENECKE  (1982) 

State  University;  D.M.A.,  Cleveland  Institute  of 

Accounting 

Music 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M.S.,  Bucknell  University; 

DAN  O.  KING  (1977) 

M.B.A.,  Long  Island  University 

Biology 

FREDRIC  M.  WILD,  JR.  (1978) 

B.A.,  University  of  South  Florida;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

English 

Indiana  University 

B.A.,  Emory  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State 

ELIZABETH  H.  KING  (1956) 

University;  M.Div.,  Yale  Divinity  School 

Business  Administration 

MELVIN  C.  ZIMMERMAN  (1979) 

B.  S. ,  Geneva  College;  M.  Ed. ,  The  Pennsylvania  State 

Biology 

University 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Cortland;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Miami 

ELDON  F.KUHNS,  II  (1979) 

University 

Accounting 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M.  Accounting,  University 

*On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1982-83 

of  Oklahoma;  C.P.A.  (Pennsylvania) 

DIANE  M.  LESKO  (1978) 

Art  History 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 

INSTRUCTORS 

RICHARD  J.  MORRIS  (1976) 

History 

MARY  ANN  DOYLE  (1982) 

B.A.,  Boston  State  College;  M.A.,  Ohio  University; 

Education 

Ph.D.,  New  York  University 

B.A.,  University  College  of  New  York  at  Oswego; 

CAROLE  MOSES  (1982) 

E.D.M.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Buffalo 

English 

GEOFFREY  L.  GORDON  (1981) 

B.A.,  Adelphi  University;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania 

Business  Administration 

State  University;  Ph.D.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 

B.S.,  Lehigh  University;  M.B.A.,  Duke  University 

68 


DAVID  B.  HAIR  (1979) 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  East  Stroudsburg  State  College 
DEBORAH  J.  HOLMES  (1976) 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
WILLIAM  E.  KEIG  (1980) 

Astronomy  and  Physics 

A.B.,  University  of  California  at  Santa  Cruz; 

M.S.,  University  of  Chicago 
JACK  D.  MURPHY  (1978) 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Drexel  University 
KATHERINE  PAGANA  (1982) 

Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  University  of  Maryland;  M.S.N. ,  University 

of  Pennsylvania 
RICHARD  D.  TROXEL  (1978) 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  Oberlin  College;  M.A.,  Indiana  University 


LECTURERS  &  SPECIAL  APPOINTMENTS 

DON  M.  LARRABEE  II  (1972) 
Lecturer  in  Law 

A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall;  LL.B.,  Fordham 
University 


PA  R  T-  TIME  FA  CUL  TY 

JOSIAH  ALFORD  (1982) 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  Principia  College;  M.A., 

George  Washington  University 
MARY  P.  BAGGETT  (1977) 

Chemistry 

B.A.,  Regis  College;  M.A.,  Wellesley  College 
ADELLE  DOTZEL  (1981) 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  Kings  College;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania 

State  University 
ROME  A.  HANKS  (1982) 

Art 

B.A.,  M.F.A.,  The  Pennsvlvania  State  University 
DANIEL  HARTSOCK  (1982) 

English 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.A., 

Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 
RAYMOND  McGINNIS  (1982) 

Sociology 

B.A.,  Temple  University;  M.S.  W.,  Marywood  College 


MARY  J.  VESTERMARK  (1977) 
Psychology 

A.B.  Oberlin;  M.A.,  Stetson  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 


APPLIED  MUSIC  TEACHERS 

RICHARD  J.  LAKEY  (1979) 

Organ  and  Piano 

A.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College; 

M.A.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 
THOMAS  GALLUP  (1982) 

Flute  and  Voice 

B.S.,  Mansfield  State  College 
ALBERT  NACINOVICH  (1972) 

Brass 

B.A.,  in  Music  Education,  Mansfield  State  College; 

M.S.,  in  Music  Education,  Ithaca  College 
MARY  L.  RUSSELL  (1936) 

Piano 

M.B.,  Susquehanna  University; 

M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
JUANITA  M.  SERANG 

Violin 


A  DJUNCT  FA  CUL  TY  &  STAFF 

ALBERT  J.  STUNKARD,  M.D. 

Director  of  Institute  of  Community  Health 

MEDICAL  STAFF 

FREDERIC  C.  LECHNER,  M.D. 

College  Physician 

B.  S. ,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College 
ROBERT  S.  YASUI,  M.D. 

College  Surgeon 

M.D.,  Temple  University 
EVELYN  L.  SEAMAN,  R.N. 

College  Nurse 
Williamsport  Hospital  School  of  Nursing 


69 


ADMINISTRATIVE  ASSISTANTS 


Randy  J.  Baker Athletic  Trainer 

(B.S..  Lock  Haven  Stale  College;  M.S.,  University  of  Illinois) 

Louise  S.  Banks  Periodicals  Assistant  in  Library 

Rebecca  Bastian  Data  Entry  Clerk 

Pauline  Berrigan  Secretary,  United  Campus  Ministry 

Emily  C.  Biichle  Coordinator  Facilities  Scheduling/Purchasing 

Barbara  J.  Bodner  Secretary  to  the  Director  of  Admissions 

Barbara  Bowes  Bookstore  Assistant 

Pauline  M .  Brungard  Student  Loan  Coordinator 

IBS.,  Lycoming  College) 

Nancy  Carlin  Faculty  Secretary 

Kathy  A.  Confair  Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Richard  L .  Cowher  Press  Operator 

Elizabeth  G.  Cowles  Career  Development  Secretary 

Patricia  Cundiff  Systems  Analyst 

Robert  L.  Curry  Administrative  Assistant  in  Athletics 

(A.B.,  Lycoming  College) 

Mary  Dahlgren  Admissions  Data  Entry  Assistant 

June  L.  Evans  Secretary,  Education  Office 

Irene  Everdale  Secretary  to  the  Director  of  Buildings  and  Grounds 

S.  Jean  Gair  Secretary,  Music  and  Art  Departments 

Anne  S.  Gibbon  Secretary,  Biology  and  Chemistry  Departments 

I  rene  V .  Gohrig  Secretary  to  Dean  of  Student  Services 

Diane  Hassinger  Secretary  to  Director  of  Development 

Ralph  W.  Hellan  Computer  Operations  Programmer 

(A.B..  Lycoming  College) 

Helen  C.  Heller Secretary  to  the  Registrar 

Mary  C.  Hendricks  Supervisor  of  Housekeeping 


Esther  L.  Henninger  Administrative  Assistant  for  Admissions 

Computer  Applications 

Diane  C.  Hess Receptionist/Sec'y,  Office  of  Student  Services 

BernadineG.  Hileman  Office  Services  Coordinator 

Phyllis  M.  Holmes Secretary  to  the  President 

Barbara  E.  Horn  Secretary  to  the  Athletics  Director 

Sherrie  Landon Administrative  Assistant  in  Student  Financial  Aid 

D.  MaxineMcCormick  Records  Clerk 

Christine  McCracken Computer  Programmer 

Mary  Jane  Murphy  Secretary  in  Admissions  Office 

Marilyn  Mullings Faculty  Secretary 

Phyllis  B.  Myers Secretary  to  the  Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

Marion  R.  Nyman Secretary  to  the  Treasurer 

Kimberly  A.  Owen  Library  Assistant 

Rosalie  Pfaff  Switchboard  Operator 

Terry  Ann  Raup Secretary,  Athletics  Office 

Dolores  J.  Reed  I.L.L.  Assistant/AV  Coordinator 

Pearl  M.  Ringler  Bookstore  Assistant 

Betty  June  Swanger  Assistant  in  Treasurer's  Office 

Sheran  L.  Swank  Faculty  Secretary 

Patricia  J.  Triaca Library  Assistant 

Helen  J.  Vincent Library  Assistant 

Deborah  E.  Weaver  Damage  Assessment  Clerk 

Vickie  Weaver  Secretary  to  Director  of  Student  Aid 

Loretta  M.  Whipkey  Secretary  to  the  Director  of  Public  Relations 

Madelyn  Wonderlich  Secretary  to  the  Dean  of  the  College 

Cheryl  A.  Yearick  Library  Assistant 


70 


Index 


Academic  Advisement  8 

Academic  Calendar  63 

Academic  Honesty  10 

Academic  Honors  11 

Academic  Program  5 

Academic  Standing 10 

Accounting  Curriculum  20 

Accounting-Mathematics  (EIM)  21 

Accreditation  4 

Administrative  Assistants 70 

Administrative  Staff  64 

Admission 59 

Admissions  Deposit  60 

Admissions  Office 59 

Admission  Policy  59 

Admission  Standards  59 

Advanced  Placement  11 

Advanced  Standing  by  Transfer 59 

Advisory  Committees  8 

Health  Professions 8 

Legal  Professions  8 

Medical  Technology  8 

Theological  Professions  8 

Allopathic  Medicine,  Advisement  for  8' 

American  Studies  (EIM)  21 

Anthropology  Curriculum 53 

Application  Fee  and  Deposits 60 

Application  Process 59 

Applied  Music  Requirements  45 

ArtCurriculum  22 

Astronomy  and  Physics  Curriculum   23 

Athletic  Training  49 

Attendance,  Class  10 

Audit  14 

Awards 11 

BFA  Degree  5 

Basic  Educational  Opportunity 

Grants  (BEOG)  61 

Biology  Curriculum  25 

BoardofTrustees 64 

Books  and  Supplies  60 

Business  Administration  Curriculum  27 

Calendar,  Academic  63 

Career  Development  Services  57 

Chemistry  Curriculum 29 

Christian  Ministry,  Advisement  for 8 

ClassAttendance  10 

College  and  the  Church  4 

College  Directory  64 

College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP)  11 

Community  Scholarships  62 

Computer  Science  Curriculum 42 

Conduct,  Standards  of  58 

Contents  2 

Contingency  Deposits  60 

Cooperative  Programs  15 

Engineering  15 

Environmental  Studies  15 

Forestry ..15 

Medical  Technology  15 

Military  Science  17 

Nuclear  Medicine  Technology  16 

Optomet ry  16 

Podiatric  Medicine  17 

Sculpture  17 

Counseling,  Academic  8 


Counseling,  Personal  57 

Course  Credit  by  Examination  11 

Course  Descriptions 20 

Criminal  Justice  (EIM)  30 

Curriculum 20 

Damage  Charges  58 

Degree  Programs 5 

Degree  Requirements 5 

Dental  School,  Advisement  for  8 

DepartmentalHonors  13 

Departmental  Majors  7 

Deposits  60 

Deposit  Refunds  60 

Distribution  Requirements 6 

English  6 

Fine  Arts  6 

Foreign  Language 6 

History  and  Social  Science  7 

Mathematics  6 

Natural  Science  7 

Philosophy  6 

Religion  6 

Early  Admission  Procedure  59 

Economics  Curriculum  31 

Education  Curriculum 32 

Education  Financing  Plans  60 

Educational  Opportunity  Grants 61 

Engineering,  Cooperative  Program  15 

English  Curriculum  34 

English  Requirement  6 

Entrance  Examinations  (CEEB) 1 1 

Entry  Fees  and  Deposits 60 

Environmental  Studies  15 

Established  Interdisciplinary 

Major  (EIM)  7 

Expenses 60 

Faculty  65 

Federal  Grants  and  Loans  61 

Fees  60 

Financial  Aid  60 

Financial  Assistance  60 

Financial  Information  60 

Fine  Arts  Requirements 6 

Foreign  Language  Requirement  6 

Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 

Curriculum 35 

Forestry,  Cooperative  Program  15 

French  Curriculum  36 

General  Expenses  60 

German  Curriculum   36 

GradingSystem 9 

Graduation  Requirements 5 

Grants-in-Aid  61 

Greek  Curriculum  37 

Health  Professional  Careers  8 

Health  Services 57 

Hebrew  Curriculum  37 

History  Curriculum  38 

History  of  the  College 4 

History  Requirements 7 

Honor  Societies  11 

Honors,  Academic  11 

Honors,  Departmental  13 

Independent  Study  13 

Interdisciplinary  Majors 7 

Established  Majors  (EIM) 7 

Individual  Majors  (EIM)  7 


International  Studies 39 

Internship  Programs  14 

Interviews  59 

Johnson  Atelier  22 

Legal  Professions,  Advisement  for 8 

Literature  (EIM)  40 

Loans 61 

Location  3 

London  Semester  17 

Lycoming  Scholar  Program  18 

Major  7 

Admission  to  7 

Departmental  7 

Interdisciplinary  (EIM,  IIM)  7 

Mass  Communication  (EIM) 41 

Mathematical  Sciences 42 

Mathematics  Requirements  6 

May  Term  14 

Medical  School,  Advisement  for 8 

Medical  History 57 

Medical  Staff  69 

Medical  Technology  15 

Military  Science  16 

Ministerial  Grants-in-Aid 61 

Minor  7 

Music  Curriculum  44 

National  Direct  Student  Loans 

(NDSL)  61 

Natural  Science  Requirement 6 

Near  East  Culture  and 

Archaeology  (EIM)  46 

Non-Payment  of  Fees  Penalty  61 

Nuclear  Medicine  Technology  16 

Nursing  46 

Optometry  16 

Optometry  School,  Advisement  for 8 

Osteopathy  School,  Advisement  for  8 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities  14 

Part-time  Student  Opportunities 15 

PaymentofFees  60 

Payments,  Partial  60 

Penalty  for  Non-Payment  of  Fees  61 

Personal  Counseling  57 

Philosophy  Curriculum  47 

Philosophy  Requirement  6 

Physical  Education  Curriculum  49 

Physics  Curriculum  23 

Placement  Services  57 

Podiatric  Medicine,  Cooperative  Program  ..17 

Political  Science  Curriculum  49 

Psychology  Curriculum  51 

Purpose  and  Objectives 3 

Reading  Improvement  Course  57 

Refunds 60 

Registration  9 

Regulations  (Standards  of  Conduct)  58 

Religion  Curriculum  52 

Religion  Requirement  6 

Repeated  Courses  9 

Requirements,  Distribution 6 

Requirements  for  Admission 59 

Requirements  for  Graduation  5 

Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps 

Program  (ROTC) 17 

Scholarships  (ROTC)  62 

Residence 57 

Residence  Halls  57 


71 


Scholarships  61 

Selection  Process  59 

Sculpture  22 

Social  Science  Requirement  6 

Sociology- Anthropology 

Curriculum 53 

Spanish  Curriculum  37 

Special  Features 13 

Independent  Study  13 

Internship  Program  14 

May  Term  14 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities  14 

Standards  of  Admission 59 

Standards  of  Conduct  58 

State  Grants  and  Loans  62 

Student  Enrichment  Semester  (SES) 17 

Student  Records  10 

Student  Services 57 

Study  Abroad  14 

Summer  Session  Calendar  63 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 

Grant  (SEOG)  61 

Theatre  Curriculum  55 

The  Harrisburg  Urban  Semester 

THUS  17 

Theological  Professions,  Advisement  8 

Transfer  59 

Trustees 64 

Unit  Course  System 9 

United  Nations  Semester 17 

Veterans,  Approval  59 

Veterinary  School,  Advisement  for  8 

Washington  Semester 17 

Withdrawal  from  College 60 

Work-Study  Grants  61 


72 


The  general  regulations  and  policies  stated  in 
this  catalog  are  in  effect  for  the  1982-83 
academic  year.  Students  beginning  their  first 
term  at  Lycoming  College  in  the  fall  of  1982  or 
the  spring  of  1983  are  thereafter  governed  by 
the  policies  stated  in  this  catalog.  Requirements 
governing  a  student's  major  are  those  in  effect 
at  the  time  a  major  is  formally  declared  and  of- 
ficially accepted  by  the  major  department. 

If  changes  are  made  in  subsequent  editions 
of  the  catalog  to  either  general  requirements  or 
major  requirements,  students  may  be  permitted 
the  option  of  following  their  original  program 
or  a  subsequent  catalog  version,  but  the  Col- 
lege always  reserves  the  right  to  determine 
which  requirements  apply. 

If  a  student  interrupts  his  or  her  education 
for  more  than  one  semester,  the  catalog  re- 
quirements in  effect  at  the  time  of  readmission 
will  apply.  Students  on  an  approved  leave  of 
absence  retain  the  same  requirements  they  had 
when  they  entered,  if  their  leave  does  not  ex- 
tend beyond  one  year. 

Lycoming  College  reserves  the  right  to 
amend  or  change  the  policies  and  procedures 
stated  in  this  catalog  without  prior  notice  to 
those  who  may  be  affected  by  them.